6-3-1 Specifying the Security Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6-3-2 Setting the Security Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6-3-3 MSU Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
6-3-4-2 To set the built-in clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6-3-4-5 To turn off all the buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
6-4. File Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1
7-1. HDC-900, HD Color Video Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7-1-1 Right Side and Left Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7-1-2 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7-2. HDC-950/930, HD Color Video Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7-2-1 Front Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7-2-2 Front Left Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7-2-3 Back Left Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7-2-4 Back Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7-3. HDCU-900, HD Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7-3-1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7-3-2 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7-3-3 HD Signal Input/Output Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7-3-4 SD Signal Input/Output Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7-3-5 HKCU-901 SD Analog Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7-3-6 HKCU-902 HD Analog Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7-3-8 HKCU-904 Line Converter Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7-3-9 Internal Boards – DPR board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7-3-10 Internal Boards – AT board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7-4. HDCU-950, HD Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7-4-1 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7-4-2 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
7-4-3 Output Block - DIF Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7-4-4 HKCU-951 SD Encoder Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Table of Contents
3
7-4-12 Internal Switches and Internal Boards – EN Board (Internal board of the
optional HKCU-951). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7-4-13 Internal Switches and Internal Boards – FC Board (Internal board of the
optional HKCU-953). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1
7-5. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
7-5-1 Front and Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
7-6. CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
7-6-1 Front and Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
7-6-2 Internal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
7-7. VCS-700, Video Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7-7-1 Front and Rear Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7-8. MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
7-8-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
7-8-3 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7-9. MSU-750, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7-9-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7-10. RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7-10-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7-10-4 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7-11. RCP-700/701, Remote Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7-11-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7-12. RM-B150, Hand-held Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7-12-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7-12-2 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7-13. RM-B750, Hand-held Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7-13-1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7-13-2 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7-14. HDVF-20A, HD Electronic Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7-14-1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7-15. HDVF-700A, HD Electronic Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7-15-1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7-16. HDVF-C700W/C750W, HD Electronic Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7-16-1 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7-17. CA-905L, Large Lens Adaptor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7-17-2 Camera-mounting Section (Inner Base) and the Optional BKP-9057
Viewfinder Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7-17-3 Rear control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8-1-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
8-1-2 Wiring Diagrams for Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8-1-3 Connection Connectors/Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8-2. HDCU-900, HD Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8-2-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Table of Contents
4
8-2-1-1 BNC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
8-2-2 Cable Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8-2-3 Connection Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8-3. HDCU-950, HD Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8-3-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8-3-1-1 BNC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
8-3-2 Connection Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8-4. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8-4-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8-4-2 Cable Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8-4-3 Connection Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8-5. CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8-5-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8-5-2 Cable Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8-5-3 Connection Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8-6. MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8-6-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8-6-2 Cable Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8-6-3 Connection Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8-7. MSU-750, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8-7-1 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8-8. RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8-8-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8-8-1-1 AUX REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8-8-1-2 EXT I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
1
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Table of Contents
5
8-8-2 Connection Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
8-9. HDVF-20A, HD Electronic Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8-9-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8-10. HDVF-700A, HD Electronic Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8-10-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
8-11. HDVF-C700W, HD Electronic Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8-11-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8-12. HDVF-C750W, HD Electronic Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8-12-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8-13. VCS-700, Video Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8-13-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8-14. CA-905L, Large Lens Adaptor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8-14-1 Connector Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1
Chapter 9 Glossary – Terms and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
9-1. Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9-2. Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
9-3. Camera characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Chapter 10 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
10-1. HDC-900, HD Color Video Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
10-2. HDC-950, HD Color Video Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
10-3. HDC-930, HD Color Video Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
10-4. HDCU-900, HD Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
10-5. HDCU-950, HD Camera Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
10-6. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10-7. CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10-8. VCS-700, Video selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10-9. MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
10-10. MSU-750, Master Setup Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
10-11. RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
10-12. RCP-700/701, Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10-13. RM-B150 (front panel), Hand-held Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10-14. RM-B750 (front panel), Hand-held Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10-15. HDVF-20A, HD Electronic Viewfinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10-16. HDVF-700A, HD Electronic Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
10-17. HDVF-C700W/C750W, HD Electronic Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
10-18. HKC-T950, HD CCD Block Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
10-19. CA-905L, Large Lens Adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Function comparison chart – Paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Function comparison chart – File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Table of Contents
6
Function comparison chart – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Function comparison chart – Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Function comparison chart – Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Function comparison chart – Multi, Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Function comparison chart – Button and Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Table of Contents
7
1-1. Overview
1
The HDC-900/950/930 family is designed to provide a
key component such as pickup device, camera head,
camera control unit, and so forth.
wide range of choices of HDTV and SDTV
configurations to fulfill the increasing demands for
multiple global digital origination formats from almost
all applications including broadcasters, filmmakers,
production companies, etc. The HDC-900 Series
consists of HDC-900 full size studio model color video
camera and the HDC-950/930, its flawless companion
portable version. Both of them were developed for
both studio and outside application systems, based on
several newly developed technologies applied to each
One of the major design criteria was to easily
integrate the most popular Sony digital camera control
systems in order to enable the field-proven Sony
camera control system and its familiar menu control
systems to be used with the HDC-900/950/930,
resulting in quick and reliable installation and a wide
choice of camera systems implementations - from a
single stand-alone camera to a sophisticated Multi-
camera installation.
1-2. Advanced Digital Signal Processing (ADSP)
Easy-to-setup and highly reliable
Moreover, variations between cameras, which are very
Digital processing performs parameters in a digital
memory and keeps them intact for long periods of time,
resulting in a dramatic reduction of the need for
operator adjustment.
difficult to avoid in analog models, can be reduced to
a minimum with digital processing by simply
equalizing parameter values.
With the use of digital processing, further
advantages are achieved, such as to easy
implementation of this circuitry in ICs and LSIs while
increasing reliability.
Flexible signal processing and parameter settings
A significant advantage of digital processing is that it
can provide very flexible operation. Many camera
parameters can be controlled and each parameter
setting can be varied over a wide range of values.
Precise adjustment
The values of the camera set-up parameters can be
defined with great precision by digital processing.
1-3. Sony Design Criteria
There are several important design criteria Sony has
taken very seriously in the HDC-900 Series to ensure
that it not only provides the features required for these
new services, but also has compatibility with existing
broadcast environments, and further enhances DSP
(Digital Signal Processing) technology.
• To take full advantage of 12-bit digitization, as many
camera processes as possible should be digital,
particularly gamma, detail and so on.
• Operational controls and connectors are located in
similar positions to those on current Sony HDC and
BVP Series cameras, so operators accustomed to
these models immediately find the HDC-900 Series
familiar and easy to use.
• True multi-standard operation from 1080/24P to
analog composite (NTSC/PAL).
• The HDC-900 Series must provide higher picture
quality than any conventional digital cameras.
Operationally, it must be compatible with current
Sony color video cameras.
• Existing Sony MSUs, CNUs and RCPs can be used
with the HDC-900 Series. Current menu control
systems and auto set-up functions are also
compatible.
• Digital system architecture should be consistent with
current 12-bit digital cameras and the previous
models as well so that all types can be mixed
together without picture matching difficulties.
• Capital cost must not be significantly greater than
Sony standard definition camera equipment.
1-4. Features of the HDC-900/950/930
Exclusive HAD sensor technology
The cost effective 2/3- inch type 2.2 million-pixel IT
CCD used in the HDC-930 provides equivalent
performance as the FIT version CCD excluding the
vertical smear level which is provided at -125 dB*
A new design of CCD has been developed for the
HDC-900, HDC-950, and HDC-930. Based on Sony
HAD sensor technology and using the on-chip lens
structure of the latest Power HAD sensors, this CCD
™
* typical numbers.
is based on the 1920 × 1080 CIF (Common Image
Format) and is switchable between progressive mode
and interlace mode readout (except HDC-930 which is
only available at 1080/60i and 1080/50i without
progressive mode). With its light collecting capability
dramatically improved, this 2/3-inch type 2.2 million-
pixel FIT CCD used in the HDC-900/950 offers an
industry-leading sensitivity of f10 at 2,000 lux. It has a
limiting horizontal resolution of 1000 TVL/ph, a signal-
to-noise ratio of 54 dB (unweighted over 30 MHz) and
the outstandingly low vertical smear level of -135 dB*.
12-bit A/D conversion and ADSP (Advanced Digital
Signal Processing)
The combination of 12-bit A/D conversion and the new
2.2- million sensor CCD provides excellent color
rendition and overall picture quality.
The powerful ADSP circuitry enables camera set-up
parameters to be adjusted over a wide range. Menus
are used to select the required parameters, such as
gain, gamma, flare, pedestal and detail, and with
adjustments made from a central Master Set-up Unit
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction
9
(MSU) parameter settings can be transferred to other
cameras in a system for perfect picture matching.
Memory Stick Media Card
™
1
Sony Memory Stick media card technology
™
provides a new function on both the HDC-900 and
HDC-950/930. Camera operators can store their
personal preferences for a number of camera set-up
parameters and V/F indicators in a personal Memory
Stick media card. Whenever one of these memory
devices is inserted into its slot on a HDC-900/950/930
camera, the operators particular settings are instantly
recalled. All the data stored in one or more Memory
Stickmedia cards also can be registered and stored in
a standard PC, so that each set of preferences can
then be used to initialize individual or groups of
cameras.
Ergonomic Body Design
For over two decades, Sony has been designing and
manufacturing broadcast video cameras and
camcorders. In creating these designs, great
importance has always been given to achieving
control layouts based on the practical, operational
requirements of the user. The control layout of the
HDC-900 therefore naturally follows that of other HDC
and BVP Series cameras. For example, the V/F
adjustment and controls for the intercom system, V/F
return selection, lens filter selection, etc. are all located
in similar positions to previous models, so that
operators with experience of Sony cameras can
operate this new model intuitively.
The HDC-950/930 portable model features a body
that is so compact and lightweight that it opens up new
and exciting possibilities in location camera work.
Newly developed ADSP LSIs drastically reduces its
power consumption, which helps contribute to the
stable operation of the entire system. This design with
a low optical axis and superb weight distribution
means that the camera can be carried comfortably on
the shoulder without causing fatigue. Tripod operation
is just as easy, and the HDC-950/930 has all its
controls and connectors located in similar positions to
those on Sony BVP cameras. Even with a viewfinder,
microphone and a standard ENG lens, the total weight
of the HDC-950/930 is only around 7 kg (about 16
pounds).
Multi Matrix
This function enables a particular color in a scene to be
selected and its hue and saturation changed.
Adaptive Highlight Control (Auto Knee mode)
The Sony ADSP system intelligently monitors the
brightness of all areas of the picture and automatically
adapts the knee point/slope for optimum reproduction
at that particular scene location within the picture. A
typical example is shooting an interior scene which
includes a sunlit exterior seen through a window.
Three-channel Skin Tone Detail Correction
The Skin Tone Detail Correction controls the detail
level of those objects in a scene with specific color
tones. The HDC-900/950/930 allows detail to be set
independently for each of three separate color ranges.
These colors are not limited to skin tones, but can be
set for any color. Detail may be increased or
decreased relative to the normal level.
Optical Filter Wheels
Independent ND and CC optical filters are provided on
both the HDC-900 and HDC-950/930. The filter drives
provided for both 900 and 950/930 are exactly the
same, so that common operation is enabled between
the hard camera and the portable type when the filter
settings are adjusted remotely on a RCP, MSU or RM-
B750/B150 Remote Control Unit.
Knee Saturation Function
This function works similar to - Sony’s TruEye™
processor which is one of the most innovative features
that Sony ADSP allows. This function - makes it
possible to reproduce very natural colors of high
contrast scene content. When knee correction is
individually applied to the RGB channels, it can lead to
color distortion in highlight areas, for example skin
tones can tend to look yellow. Knee Saturation
processing automatically retains accurate color in
these highlight areas to maintain the saturation in those
picture areas compressed by the Knee function.
Electronic Shutter
The electronically operated shutter provides speeds of
1/100, 1/250, 1/500/, 1/1,000, and 1/2,000 of a second
(1080/60i mode).
Clear Scan and ECS (Extended Clear Scan)
Sony’s Clear Scan and ECS* functions eliminate
banding effects when shooting monitor displays by
allowing the shutter speed to be adjusted so that it
exactly matches the various scanning frequencies that
are in use. The clear scan shutter speed range is 60.1
to 4300 Hz (1080/60i mode). The ECS function is
especially effective under the frequency of 60 Hz or 50
Hz.
Low-key Saturation
The Knee Saturation function is also effective for low-
key pictures, maintaining saturation to give color
reproduction characteristics.
Selectable Gamma and Initial Gain
Several Pre-set Gamma curves and Initial Gain
settings are provided to emulate standardized video
gamma transfer characteristics. These gamma tables
are always accessible and interchangeable via the
camera set-up menu.
* The ECS function is available with the HDC-900 and HDC-
950
Super EVS
Super EVS (Enhanced Vertical-definition System)
raises vertical picture resolution, while minimizing line
flicker*. It is ideal for shooting of a stationary subject or
still images - the method used for the “Claymation”
process, for instance.
Variable Black Gamma Range
The Variable Black Gamma Range function helps to
precisely control shadow areas. It can help to bring out
details from the dark areas of the picture without
affecting mid-tones and keeping the absolute black
level unchanged. 12-bit A/D and the low noise CCD
have extended the prowess of this important
subjective picture control.
* The Super EVS functions when operated at Interlace mode.
Standard 2/3-inch type Lens Mount
Either an HD lens or a standard definition 2/3-inch type
format lens can be mounted. This allows standard
lenses that are in everyday use with Sony cameras and
camcorders to be used with the HDC-900 and HDC-
950/930.
Black Stretch
Limits the Black Gamma function to picture luminance.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction 10
Level Dependent Detail
This function provides natural detail enhancement on
extreme highlights by automatically limiting the
amplitude of edge signals when they occur in high
contrast signals.
1
1-5. Features of the System Components
MSU-700A and MSU-750, Master Set-up Units
These MSUs provide a centralized technical control
position in a multi-camera system.
front or bottom of Helicopter (e.g. using Wescam
products) or a mini-crane.
The MSU-700A is designed for use mounted with its
control panel horizontal while the MSU-750 is
designed for mounting vertically. They have been
designed to allow comprehensive, wide ranging,
technical supervision and alignment of a complex
camera system from a single centralized panel. If it is
desirable to extend this supervision to more than one
control location (for example separate operational and
engineering/maintenance control centers) then a
number of MSU panels can form part of a large camera
system. The MSU-700A and the MSU-750 are
designed to work in conjunction with the Command
Network Units CNU-700 and CNU-500. However, in a
single-camera system, these MSUs can operate alone.
They provide rapid, finger-tip access to all controls
relating to the smooth functioning of an operational
system, including:
HDCU-900/950, Camera Control Units
Two camera control units are available for use with the
HDC-900/950: the full size HDCU-900 and half rack
HDCU-950. The HDCU-900 has been designed to
support both the HDC-900 Studio Camera and HDC-
950 Portable Camera in fixed environments for
maximum expandability, flexibility, and full
controllability. The compact HDCU-950 CCU is
intended for mobile use but provides controllability
almost equivalent to the HDCU-900. As standard, the
HDCU-900 has four sets of HD SDI SMPTE 292M
signal outputs and V/F return inputs, plus four sets of
digitally down-converted SDI SMPTE 259M outputs
and four digitally up-converted V/F return inputs.The
HDCU-950 has three sets of input/output interfaces for
HD SDI SMPTE 292M signal outputs and V/F return
inputs, and digitally down-converted SDI SMPTE 259M
outputs and up-converted V/F return inputs.
• Technical alignment controls for the entire camera
chain
• Picture and waveform monitor switching
• System configuration
A variety of optional interface expansion boards are
available for both units. The HKCU-901, HKCU-902,
HKCU-903 and HKCU-904 are for use with the HDCU-
900, and the HKCU-
• Control data filing
• Precise picture adjustment
Some of the important control functions that can be
made from these MSUs are described below.
951 and HKCU-953 are for the HDCU-950. As for the
HDCU-900, the HKCU-901 SD Encoder Boards
provide analog NTSC and PAL VBS signal outputs and
V/F return inputs, and analog component output. The
HKCU-902 HD Analog Interface Board enables HD
Analog output and input (as defined by SMPTE 240M).
Furthermore, the HKCU-903 Frame Converter Boards
provide 2:3 pull-down to change the picture format
between 24P and progressive 30 frames. And lastly,
the HKCU-904 Line Converter Board has the capability
to convert 1080-line pictures into 720-line pictures,
and provides four sets of HD-SDI outputs and V/F
return inputs. The HKCU-951 and HKCU-953 used
with the portable HDCU-950 CCU provide equivalent
functions to the above HKCU-901 and HKCU-903.
HKC-T950, HD CCD Block Adaptor
The new HKC-T950 HD CCD Block Adaptor, which is
a unique accessory of HDC-950 and HDC-930
portable cameras, allows the CCD block to be
extended from the camera body by up to 10 m (up to
50 m with an optional cable). Therefore, more creative
camera shooting such as in space limited or awkward
environments is possible, thus expanding HD camera
applications. The viewfinder can be detached from the
CCD block depending on the environment of the
application. The HKCT950 can also be mounted on a
High Definition Origination
720/60P
(HDCU-900 only)
HD Production Format
1080/60i 1080/50i 1080/30P 1080/25P 1080/24P
Camera Head Capture
Format
1080/60i 1080/50i 1080/30P 1080/25P 1080/24P 1080/60i
540/60P
HDCU-900/950 Output Format
HD-SDI (Reserved slot)
Down-converted SDI
1080/60i 1080/50i** 1080/30P** 1080/25P** 1080/24P** 1080/60i
540/60P
480/60i
480/60i** 576/50i** 480/30P** 576/25P** 480/60i**
480/60i
No
(Removable slot)
HKCU-903/953 Frame
Converter (Optional)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
1080/60i**
No
HKCU-904 Line Converter
(Optional)
No
No
720/60P** 720/60P
No No
HKCU-901/951 SD
Encoder (Optional)
NTSC**
PAL**
NTSC*
PAL*
* Monitoring quality only.
** Entries printed in blue are recommended choices.
*** HDC-930 only supports interlace formats and 1080/60i or 1080/50i.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction 11
The RM-B750 can be connected directly to the any
HDC- 900 Series camera, attached to the half-rack
HDCU-950 Camera Control Unit or connected to an
HDW-250 portable VTR used with these components.
The combination of an LCD touch-panel screen and
direct push buttons enables full parameter adjustment
of the camera to be controlled. When necessary, basic
tape transport functions of a portable VTR can be
controlled*. For further operational convenience, the
1
Standard Definition Origination
Production Format
480/60i 480/30P 576/50i
Camera Head Capture
Format
1080/ 1080/
1080/
50i
60i
30P
HDCU-900/950 Output
Format
1080/
60i**
1080/
30P**
1080/
50i**
RM-B750 has a Memory Stick media card slot so that
®
HD-SDI (Reserved slot)
various setup parameters can be stored and
transferred between camcorders.
Down-converted SDI
(Removable slot)
480/
60i**
480/
30P**
576/
50i**
* VTR REC START/STOP can also be assigned by the
assignable switch.
HKCU-903/953 Frame
Converter (Optional)
CNU-500 and CNU-700, Camera Command Network
Units
HKCU-904 Line Con-
verter (Optional)
The CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command
Network Units form the technical “nerve center” of a
star-shaped camera control network, providing
communication between all the units in the system. A
RISC-based microprocessor system provides high-
speed transfer of command signals to the HDCU-900/
950 CCU for rapid response. The CNU-500 is for use
in systems with up to six cameras and the CNU-700 is
for use in larger systems. One CNU-700 can also
control six cameras, but can be expanded to control
up to 12 cameras when fitted with an optional
expansion board. Several CNU-700 units can be
connected to the camera control network in a large
system.
HKCU-901/951 SD
Encoder (Optional)
NTSC** NTSC* PAL**
* Monitoring quality only.
** Entries printed in blue are recommended choices.
*** HDC-930 only supports interlace formats.
Optical Fiber Digital Transmission
The cable connecting the HDCU-900/950 CCU to an
HDC- 900 or HDC-950/930 camera uses two single-
mode optical fiber lines, two control lines, and two
power lines to carry digitized video, audio, control
signals and power to the camera. An extremely high-
quality, all-digital bi-directional video and audio signal
can be transmitted up to a distance of 3 km (1.86
miles)* with the HDCU-900 and up to 1.2 km (0.75
miles)* with the HDCU-950. This cable and connector
conforms to the SMPTE standard.
HDVF-C700W and HDVF-C750W, Multi-format LCD
HD Color Viewfinders
The viewfinders developed for the HDC-900 and HDC-
950/930 cameras are of a new, innovative design that
is based on a 6-type TFT color LCD panel providing a
resolution of 960 pixels horizontally x 540 pixels
vertically. These viewfinders feature very low power
consumption and, as they are very compact, their
panning and tilting angles are greater than those of
CRT-based viewfinders. The HDVF-C700W is for use
with the HDC-900 camera and the HDVF-C750W for
use with the HDC-950/930 portable camera.
* When supplying power to the camera via the optical fiber
cable, the maximum cable length varies with the camera
system configuration and lens type, the size of the optical
fiber cable and the number of cable connectors.
Safety Oriented Power Supply
As safety is a major design concept of every Sony
design, the HDCU-900/950 continuously checks the
camera cable for open or short circuits. An alarm is
given if a fault is found and some appropriate
precautionary actions taken, case by case.
An additional safety feature is that a low voltage is
initially supplied from the HDCU-900 optical fiber
connector when the unit is switched on. Only when the
system check has verified that an appropriate camera
is connected is the normal operating voltage output.
* The liquid crystal display fitted to this unit is manufactured
with high precision technology, giving a functioning pixel
ratio of at least 99.99 %. Thus a very small proportion of
pixels (at most 0.01 %) may be “stuck”, constantly on or
constantly off. In addition, over a long period of use, because
of the physical characteristics of the liquid crystal display,
such “stuck” pixel may appear spontaneously. These
problems have been kept to an absolute minimum, but are
an unavoidable characteristic of liquid crystal technology.
Locking to External Reference Signals
The HDCU-900/950 can be locked to an external
reference signal. Either a HD tri-level sync signal
(according to SMPTE 240M), or an SD black burst
signal can be used as the reference signal.
HDVF-700A and HDVF-20A, CRT-based Viewfinders
The monochrome CRT-based viewfinders, HDVF-
700A (7-type) and HDVF-20A (2-type), can also be
used with the HDC-900/950/930.
RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panels
Two types of RCP-750 Series Remote Control Panels
are also available, providing a range of control
functions from the basic to very sophisticated for
operational adjustments of an HDC-900/950/930. Each
type is available with either a joystick or dial type iris
control.
RM-B750, Remote Control Unit
The RM-B750 Remote Control Unit has been designed
to establish a highly mobile and fully controllable
camera system in the field by integrating control
capability equivalent to a Master Set-up Unit into a
compact unit powered from the device to be
controlled.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 1 Introduction 12
2-1. System Configuration
2
As a major design criteria, the HDC-900 Series
portable model is designed for full integration into an
HDC-900 studio system, as well as being used as a
standalone acquisition camera.
In addition to the new peripherals such as HDCU-
900/950, RCP-750/751, and RM-B750, a variety of key
peripherals like the CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera
Command Network Units help users to easily expand/
upgrade their systems.
inherited all the benefits from Sony digital camera
systems such as the BVP-900/700/500 Series to
ensure the HDC-900/950/930 Family to be smoothly
integrated into these renowned, field-proven camera
control systems.
This new camera system features two camera
heads, the HDC-900 full-size model and its full
companion portable camera, the HDC-950/930. The
Figure 2-1: HDC-900/950 System Configuration
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
RCP-750
RCP-751
CCA-5 CABLE
CCA-5 CABLE
REMOTE
CONTROL PANEL
MASTER SETUP UNIT MASTER SETUP UNIT
MSU-700A MSU-750
CCA-5 CABLE
CCA-5 CABLE
CCA-5 CABLE
CAMERA COMMAND NETWORK UNIT
CNU-700/500
RCP-700 RCP-701
CCA-5 CABLE
CCA-5 CABLE
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
HDCU-950
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
HDCU-900
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
HKCU-904
VIDEO SELECTOR
VCS-700
HKCU-951
HKCU-953
PIX
WF
PIX
WF
WF
PIX
FIBER CABLE
FIBER CABLE
MULTI FORMAT
ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER
HDVF-700A
2" VF
HDVF-20A
MULTI FORMAT
LCD COLOR VIEWFINDER
HDVF-C750W
STUDIO ZOOM LENS
ENG/EPP LENS
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
HDC-900
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
HDC-950/930
MULTI FORMAT
LCD COLOR VIEWFINDER
HDVF-C750W
MULTI FORMAT
LCD COLOR VIEWFINDER
HDVF-C700W
SCRIPT HOLDER
BKP-7911
STUDIO ZOOM LENS
LARGE LENS ADAPTER
CA-905L
7-TYPE
VIEWFINDER
SADDLE
BKP-9057
MULTI FORMAT
MULTI FORMAT
ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER LCD COLOR VIEWFINDER
HDVF-700A
HDVF-C700W
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 14
Figure 2-2: Optional Accessories for the HDC-900
2
HDVF-700A 7-Type Viewfinder
(with standard hood)
HFH-770 Outdoor Hood
(sold separately)
Front cover (supplied)
HDVF-C700W
6-Type Viewfinder
HDC-900, HDC-900/L
HD Color Video Camera
Zoom lens
BKP-7911 Script Holder
(with Light)
HDCU-900
HD Camera Control Unit
Optical Fiber Cable (option)
V-Shaped wedge
(supplied with tripod)
Tripod
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 15
Figure 2-3: Optional Accessories for the HDC-950/930
2
HDVF-C750W
HD Electronic
Viewfinder
CAC-6 Return
Video Selector
HDVF-20A
HD Electronic
Viewfinder
HDCZ-10/25
Connection Cable
HDW-250, etc.
HD VTR
BKW-401
Viewfinder
Rotation Bracket
BP-L60A/L90A
Battery Pack
Zoom lens
BKP-L551
HDCU-900 HD Camera Control Unit
Battery Adapter
HDC-950/930 HD
Color Video Camera
Optical Fiber Cable
HDCU-950
HD Camera Control Unit
HKC-T950
CCA-5 Cable
RM-B150
Remote
Contorl Unit
VCT-14 Tripod Adapter
P
ANEL STANDARD
TEST
BARS
CLOSE
VTR
START/STOP
ACTIVE
MEMORY
STICK
AWB
WHITE
ABB
MONITOR
FUNCTION
VF DISP
BLACK
MAINTENANCE
VF MENU
SCENE
CANCEL
AUTO IRIS/MB
IRIS ACTIVE
MASTER
BLACK
P
AINT
ENTER
EXT
IRIS
ALARM
MENU SELECT
RM-B750
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-B750
CA-905L Large Lens Adapter
CNU-700 Camera
Command Network Unit
CCA-5 Cable
CCA-5 Cable
(max. 200 meters)
(max. 200 meters)
MSU-700A//750 Master Setup Unit
CCA-5 Cable
(max. 200 meters)
O
I
RCP-700 series
Remote Control Panel
HDS-X3400 Multi Bit Rate Routing Switcher
Figure 2-4: HDC-950 Stand-alone System
PANEL STANDARD MONITOR TEST
ACTIVE
BARS
KNEE
CLOSE
VTR
START/STOP
MEMORY
STICK
1
5600K
AUTO
KNEE
SKIN
BLACK
DETAIL GAMMA SATURATION
AWB
ABB
POWER
CABLE
ALRAM
WHITE
CAM
FUNCTION
OPEN
MAIN
SHORT
ABS
BLACK
MAINTE
NANCE
INCOM MIC ON
OFF
PROD
PRIV
SCENE
PAINT
PGM
ENG
AUTO IRIS/MB
MASTER
ACTIVE
BLACK
IRIS
EXT
IRIS
ALARM
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
HDC-950/930 + HDVF-20A
HDCU-950 + RM-B750 Remote Control Unit
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 16
2-2. Camera Head
2
*1
The HDC-900 Series is an outstanding new-generation
Memory Stick operation
HD camera with a true multi-purpose system in which
many new technologies have been incorporated such
as Sony’s ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing),
a newly developed 2.2-million pixel CCD and 12-bit A/
D conversion. 12-bit A/D conversion improves
gradation analysis by a factor of four compared to 10-
bit conversion, significantly improving control over
picture tonal reproduction, and accuracy of color
reproduction. A 600% dynamic range in conjunction
with the 12-bit A/D and the superior DSP processing
ensure superb processing of overexposed picture
information and the handling of specular highlights.
Just some of the state-of-the-art features are:
• Optical filter wheels
• Multiple output capability
• Optical fibre digital transmission
• Memory Stick
• Triple skin tone detail
• Adaptive detail control
• Electronic soft focus
• Adaptive highlight control
• Knee saturation
The camera is equipped with a Memory Stick drive,
which enables setup data storage and software
upgrading using Memory Stick media cards.
*1 “Memory Stick” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Selection of gamma table
Multiple gamma tables are provided, enabling you to
use multiple formats and perform flexible image
creation.
Wide variety of detail control functions
Skin tone detail function
Allows control (emphasis or suppression) of the detail
level for just a certain hue or chroma area in the image,
by creating a detail gate signal from hue color
components centered on skin tones. Detail boost
frequency control
The boost frequency can be adjusted from 20 MHz to
30 MHz. This allows the detail thickness to be set
appropriately for the subject, thus enabling more
subtle image expression.
H/V ratio control
The ratio between horizontal and vertical detail can be
adjusted.
White/black limiter
The white side and black side detail can be limited
independently.
(media card operation)
• Multi matrix control
These improvements contribute to an unsurpassed
image quality, making the HDC-900 Series a true ‘top-
of-the-line’ studio/OB camera.
The HDC-950/930 is the portable version of the
HDC-900 and has identical video processing circuitry.
Both models have the same signal performance and
can be controlled either at the camera head or by
remote control through studio system peripherals such
as the HDCU-900/HDCU-950 Camera Control Unit,
MSU-700A/750 Master Set-up Unit and CNU-700/500
Camera Command Network Units. Because of this
design concept, users of the HDC-950/930 have the
same features, the same operational performance and
the same operational ‘feel’ as the HDC-900 - an
optimized solution to meet the needs of high-end users
for a companion studio portable camera.
The flexible interfacing of the HDC-900 and HDC-
950/930 means that they are not only high-end HD
broadcasting cameras, but they can also be easily
integrated into conventional studio/OB vehicle
systems that use earlier BVP-900/700/500 Series
cameras.
Easy menu-based setting
Selections and settings for shutter speed, ECS, Super
EVS mode, viewfinder display items, video gain, safety
*2
*3
zone marker or center marker , screen size marker,
etc. may be made quickly and easily using setup
menus displayed on the viewfinder screen or an
external monitor.
*2 Safety zone marker: A box-shaped marker displayed on
the viewfinder screen which indicates 80%, 90%, 92.5%, or
95% of the total screen area.
*3 Center marker: A cross-shaped marker that indicates the
center of the viewfinder screen.
Wide variety of viewfinder display options
Along with items such as operation messages, a zebra
pattern , a safety zone marker, and a center marker,
camera settings may also be displayed on the
viewfinder screen using text and symbols. Further,
there are other indicators arranged above and below
the viewfinder, such as a tally lamp, battery warning
indicator, and an indicator to tell that one or more
settings are other than standard. This makes it simple
to check the status of the camera.
*4
The HDC-900/950 family has the following features:
High picture quality and high performance
The new 2/3-type 1080 FIT CCD with 2,200,000 pixels,
a unique CCD output signal processing circuit, and a
12-bit A/D converter provide high picture quality and
excellent performance for the HDC-900 and HDC-950.
A high-cost-performance IT type - HDC-930 - is also
available.
*4 Zebra pattern: A stripe pattern displayed on the viewfinder
screen which indicates the portions where the video level
is above about 70% or 100%. Used to check the video level
of the subject.
Newly designed integrated unit (HDC-950/930 only)
Low power consumption and high efficiency of heat
radiation were -addressed by integrating the camera
and camera adapter into a single unit, improving the
reliability. In addition, five filter discs each for CC and
ND are provided as standard to match the operability
of the studio-use HDC-900.
Optical digital transmission
The camera uses electro-optical composite cable for
1.5-gigabit digital optical transmission between the
camera and a camera control unit.
High-resolution 2-type multi-format viewfinder (HDC-
950/930 only)
Along with developing the HDC-950, a 2-type multi-
format viewfinder HDVF-20A is provided.
Multiple formats
The HDC-900 and HDC-950 operate with various
formats, covering 24PsF, 50i, 25PsF, 30PsF, as well as
60i systems, while the HDC-930 operates with 50i and
60i systems.
Prevention of electrical shock
When the power connection is unsafe, the power
supply from the HDCU (Camera Control Unit) will be
shut off.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 17
Wide variety of input and output connectors
• Optical connector
• HD SDI output connector
• DC power supply input connector
• Prompter signal output connector
• RCP connector
• Viewfinder connector
• Intercom connector
• Analog audio input connectors
2
• Tracker connector
• Test output connector
• Return control connector
• AC OUT connector
• VTR connector
• Lens connector
• Large lens connector
2-3. Camera Control Unit
The HDCU-900 Camera Control Unit carries out signal
processing and offers an interface for external
equipment. By incorporating a optical digital
transmission and digital control system, as well as
multiple inputs and outputs, the HDCU-900 provides
maximum camera performance combined with flexible
operation. It has been designed to achieve the highest
reliability, afford easy maintenance and allow flexible
system configuration.
HKCU-951 SD Encoder board
This provides the capability of NTSC (or PAL) SD
analog component signal output.
HKCU-953 HD Frame Rate Converter board
This provides 60i-/50i-format HD and SD signal
outputs in a 24P Cinema Production system.
Three return video inputs (HDCU-950 only)
The HDCU-950 has three return video input
connectors, which receive either HD SDI, SD
component SDI or analog VBS signals (mixed input of
different signals is not allowed), may be set to 4:3 edge
crop, 16:9 squeeze, or letterbox.
The HDCU-900 features a down converter to convert
*1
*2
HD signals to SD , and a return video up converter
to convert SD signals to HD, making it usable with
standard definition color video cameras as well as
high-definition color video cameras. It can be
combined with an optional MSU-700A/750 Master
Setup Unit or an optional RCP-750/751/700/701
Remote Control Panel to form a camera control system
that meets your system needs. Furthermore, a system
capable of controlling multiple video cameras can also
be -configured - by adding a CNU-700/500 Camera
Command Network Unit.
External reference signals
The HDCU-900/950 family can be locked to an
external reference signal. Either an HD tri-level sync
signal or an SD sync (black burst) signal may be used
as the reference signal.
Internal down converter
When the system is operating at a 59.94/50 Hz field
frequency, HD signals can be converted to SD
component SDI signals using the down converter. The
output signal aspect ratio may be set to 4:3 edge crop,
16:9 squeeze, or letter box. The down converter has
independent image enhancement, gamma control,
and matrix ON/OFF features, and can be controlled
externally.
*1 High Definition (HD) signal: A name for 1125-line high-
definition TV signals.
*2 Standard Definition (SD) signal: A name for NTSC/PAL,
525/625 component, or 525/625 composite signals.
The HDCU-950 Camera Control Unit is also
available for use with the HDC-950 and HDC-930
cameras. Its compact body and multiple video outputs
make this unit ideal for field use. A stand-alone system
can be easily configured by attaching the control
panel of the RM-B750 Remote Control Unit to the
HDCU-950, which allows you to directly operate the
connected camera from the HDCU-950.
Internal up converter
The HDCU-900/950 family has an up converter to allow
monitoring of SD signal return video using an HD
viewfinder. The aspect ratio of the return video signal
may be set to 4:3 edge crop, 16:9 squeeze, or letter
box.
The HDCU-900 and HDCU-950 camera control units
have the following major features:
Multiple video inputs and outputs (HDCU-900 only)
The HDCU-900 has four sets of HD-SDI (Serial Digital
Interface) signal inputs and outputs, and four sets of
SD component SDI signal inputs and outputs. Adding
of various optional function boards allows the following
signal input and output:
HKCU-901 SD Analog Interface board
This provides the capability of PAL, NTSC, and SD
analog component signal input and output.
HKCU-902 HD Analog Interface board
This provides HD analog signal input and output.
HKCU-903 Frame Rate Converter board
This provides 60i-/50i-format output in a 24P Cinema
Production system.
Optical digital transmission
The HDCU-900/950 can be connected to a camera
with the use of an optical fiber cable (two single-mode
optical fiber lines, two power lines, two control lines) for
the transmission of digitized video, audio, and control
signals. By connecting optical fiber cables, signals
can be transmitted up to a maximum of 3000 meters
(1.86 miles) when using the HDCU-900 and up to 1200
meters (0.7 mile) using the HDCU-950. The maximum
length of the cable supplying power to the camera
varies with the camera system configuration and with
the type of optical fiber cable.
HKCU-904 Line Converter board
Safety-oriented power supply
This provides 720/60P input and output.
The HDCU-900/950 is designed for safety. When the
power is turned on, a low voltage is supplied at first.
Only after it has been verified that an appropriate
camera is attached, the normal 240 V power supply is
activated. The power is not supplied unless a camera
is connected via an optoelectric cable.
Multiple video outputs (HDCU-950 only)
The HDCU-950 has three HD-SDI (Serial Digital
Interface) signal outputs (2 regular outputs and 1
monitor output) and two SD component SDI signal
outputs. Adding the optional units allows the following
signal outputs:
Also, the HDCU-900/950 is equipped with an alarm
indicator to warn of open or short circuits in the cable.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 18
Wide range of audio functions
Character signal output
2
The HDCU-900/950 family has connectors for two-
channel microphone outputs, a digital audio output,
and a program audio input. The family can use an
intercom system with two independent channels, and
supports four-wire and RTS intercom systems. Further,
a Clear-Com system can also be supported.
Note
The results of the HDCU-900/950 self-diagnosis can
be obtained with a text display by an SD character
signal output.
Rack mountable
The HDCU-900 can be installed in a full 19-inch rack of
3U height, while the HDCU-950 can be installed in a
half 19-inch rack of 3U height in combination with the
RMM-301.
For information on support for RTS systems, contact a
Sony service or sales representative.
Remote control
Plug-in unit configuration
The levels and phases of the HDCU-900/950 output
signals can be controlled remotely by an MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit.
Internal printed circuit boards used in the HDCU-900/
950 are designed for easy plug-in and removal for
easy inspection and maintenance. Furthermore, the
power supply housed in the HDCU-900 is also a plug-
in type unit.
Microphone volume control
The camera’s microphone volume can be controlled
via the MIC REMOTE connector.
2-4. Control System
In addition to the MSU-700A/750 Master Set-up Unit
and several types of RCP-700 Series Remote Control
Panels, the CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera
Command Network Units form the command nerve
center for a new concept in a camera control system.
A wide selection of control peripherals allows each
user to configure the most suitable system to meet a
specific operational need. The following are the key
peripherals.
the CNU-700 and CNU-500 give them a fast response
time whatever the system configuration.
Video Selector (VCS-700)
The VCS-700 Video Selector is used to switch
composite video monitoring signals from an HDC-900
Series multi-camera system to a picture monitor and
waveform monitor. The VCS-700 accepts the video
monitoring signal from up to six HDCU-900 or HDCU-
950 Camera Control Units and switches these signals
to two picture monitor outputs and two waveform
monitor outputs. The selection of monitoring signals
can be controlled by the camera selection buttons on
the MSU-700A/750 Master Set-up Unit, or by external
control equipment through the D-sub 37-pin I/O port
on the VCS-700. For SDI monitoring, the optional BKP-
7933 S-Bus Interface Board provides connection to a
Sony digital routing system.
Master Set-up Unit (MSU-700A and MSU-750)
The MSU-700A/750 Master Set-up Unit can control up
to 6 cameras (up to 12 cameras by using an expansion
board - BKP-7930) in combination with the CNU-700
Camera Command Network Unit. The adoption of an
EL Touch Panel in the MSU-700A/750 helps to simplify
the operation of its sophisticated control system. Data
such as scene files can be stored in a world-standard
PCMCIA memory card.
Remote Control Panels (RCP-700 Series)
There are four ranges of remote control panels for
remote control of the HDC-900 Series via the HDCU-
900/950 Camera Control Unit. For the iris and master
black adjustments, each range has two types - joystick
control and dial control.
The RCP-750/751 is the newly developed, top of the
range for sophisticated operational use, and can be
used as a substitute for the MSU-700A/750 Master Set-
up Unit. The panel is connected to the HDCU-Series
Camera Control Unit (or the CNU-Series Camera
Command Network Unit, which is connected to the
HDCU-Series) by a special cable of up to 200 m (656
ft) in length.
Camera Command Network Units (CNU-700 and
CNU-500)
The Camera Command Network Units are designed to
be the nerve center of the Sony camera control system
for the newly developed HDC-900/950/930 family and
the conventional BVP-900/700/500 SD Series of
cameras. They work as ‘Command Selector’,
‘Command Distributor’ and ‘Command Arbitrator’.
These two types of camera command network units
give a cost/performance choice. The CNU-500 is
suitable for applications with up to six cameras, while
the standard six-camera capability of the CNU-700
can be expanded to 12 cameras with use of the BKP-
7930 optional expansion board. The carefully
designed software and the high-speed CPU of both
The RCP-700/701 features the basic control items
required for daily operation of camera acquisition
systems.
2-5. Viewfinders
As well as the HDVF-700A, a high performance 7-type
multi-format electronic monochrome viewfinder with
extremely high horizontal resolution, the HDVF-C700W
6-type multi-format LCD color viewfinder is also
available for the HDC-900. This multi-format LCD color
viewfinder is especially convenient for cases where
color needs to be identified by the camera operator.
For the HDC-950, the HDVF-C750W - a 6-type multi-
format LCD color viewfinder and the HDVF-20A - a 2-
type HD monochrome electronic viewfinder are newly
designed, which fulfill the requirement for different
applications.
All of these models are very compact in size, light in
weight and economical in power consumption. The low
mounting positions of the HDVF-700A and HDVF-
C700W provide convenient viewfinder displays
aligned as close as possible to the lens axis.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 19
The HDVF-700A has the following features:
Multiscan
In addition to the 60i format, formats such as 24PsF
and 50i are supported for control signals from the
camera.
Stable picture
2
The LCD panel provides a stable image without
distortion, regardless of screen brightness.
Step-variable peaking
Step-variable peaking circuits provide a sharp image,
making it easy to focus the camera.
16:9 display capability
When operated from an external device such as a
camera control unit, the screen can be switched
between 16:9 and 4:3 display modes.
High resolution
Tally lamps
The viewfinder has red and green tally lamps which
light in response to tally signals.
Superior usability
The viewfinder uses a high-resolution cathode-ray
tube, providing 800 or more lines of horizontal
resolution.
The height of the HDVF-C750W can be set to one of
three positions. It can be tilted up to 90° upwards or
90° downwards, and can be panned up to 90° -to the
left or 90° -to the right. The HDVF-C700W can be tilted
up to 90° upwards or 50° downwards.
Drip-proof construction
The drip-proof design is able to withstand light rain,
making the viewfinder well suited to outdoor use.
Studio monitor hood, outdoor hood
The viewfinder can be fitted with a strong, easy-to-use
hood (supplied), or an outdoor hood with excellent
shading ability (option).
Stable picture
A high-voltage regulation circuit provides a stable
image with a minimum of distortion, regardless of
screen brightness.
Continuously variable peaking
A continuously variable peaking circuit provides a
sharp image, making it easy to focus the camera.
Tally lamps
The viewfinder has red and green tally lamps which
light in response to tally signals.
Energy-saving design
Superior usability
The viewfinder will accept a wide range of power
supply voltage (from 10.5 to 17 volts) with low power
consumption (10 watts).
The viewfinder height may be set to one of three
positions, and it may be tilted up to 60° upwards or 50°
downwards.
Drip-proof construction
The HDVF-20A has the following features.
Multiscan
In addition to the 60i format, formats such as 24PsF
and 50i are supported for control signals from the
camera.
High-performance CRT
• Quick-start type (The image appears as soon as the
camera is turned on.)
The drip-proof design is able to withstand light rain,
making the viewfinder well suited to outdoor use.
Studio monitor hood, outdoor hood
The viewfinder may be fitted with a strong, easy-to-use
studio hood (supplied), or an outdoor broadcasting
(OB) hood with excellent shading ability (option).
Energy-saving design
The viewfinder will accept a wide range of power
supply voltage (from 10.5 to 17 volts) with low power
consumption (33 watts).
• Enhanced resolution
• Reduced flare
Marker indication
When the camera setting allows the center marker or
safety zone marker indication, the viewfinder can set
the marker indication on or off.
The HDVF-C750W/C700W has the following features:
Compact and lightweight
The viewfinder uses an LCD panel, making it more
compact in size and lighter in weight as compared with
a CRT viewfinder that has a display of the same size.
Multiscan
In addition to the 60i format, formats such as 24PsF
and 50i are supported for control signals from the
camera.
High resolution
The high-resolution LCD panel of the viewfinder
provides 500 or more lines of horizontal resolution.
Removable eyepiece
Detaching the eyepiece gives you a clear view of the
center of the screen even with your eye away from the
viewfinder. You can clean dust from the screen or the
mirror by detaching the eyepiece.
Other features
Fitting an optional fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-
12) over the viewfinder lens prevents breath or vapor
condensation on the lens.
2-6. Optional Accessories
For HDC-900
HDVF-700A
CRS-3P
HKC-T950
Cradle Suspension
CCD Block Extension
Adaptor
HD Electronic Viewfinder
HD Electronic Viewfinder
HDElectronicViewfinder
(7-type, monochrome)
HDElectronicViewfinder
(6-type, color)
HDVF-C700W
HDVF-20A
HDVF-C750W
VFH-770
BKP-7911
Outdoor Hood
Script Holder (with script
light)
MSA-8A/16A /32A/64A Memory Stick Media
Card
VCT-14
EX-738(A-8327-351-A) Extension Board
For HDCU-900
AC power cord:
Tripod adaptor
CAC-6
Return Video Selector
EX-738(A-8327-351-A) Extension Board
For HDC-950/930
BKP-L551
USA and Canada: 1-
551-812-XX
Battery Adaptor
Viewfinder Rotation
Bracket
BKW-401
Other countries: 1-782-
929-XX
C-74
Microphone
Power cord plug holder:USA and Canada: 2-
CA-905L
CAC-6
CAC-12
Large Lens Adaptor
Return Video Selector
Microphone holder
990-242-01
Other countries: 3-613-
640-01
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 20
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
SD Analog Interface Unit
HD Analog Interface Unit
Frame Rate Converter
Unit
Line Converter Unit
Connection Cable (3
meter/10 feet)
CCA-5-10
RMM-301
Connection Cable (10
meter/33 feet)
Rack Mount Adaptor
2
EX-854(A-8344-228-A) Extension Board
EX-893(A-8344-696-A) Extension Board
HKCU-904
CCA-5-3
For CNU/ MSU/RCP
BKP-7900
Extender Board for
CNU-700/500
Expansion Board for
system expansion up to
12 cameras for the CNU-
700
CCA-5-10
Connection Cable (10
meter/33 feet)
BKP-7930
BKP-7932
EX-450(A-8314-633-A) Expansion Board
For HDCU-950
AC power cord:
USA and Canada: 1-
551-812-XX
BVP-370 Series
Other countries: 1-782-
929-XX
Interface Board for the
CNU-700
Power cord plug holder:USA and Canada: 2-
BKP-7933
S-Bus Interface Board
for CNU-700
990-242-01
Other countries: 3-613-
640-01
SD Encoder Unit
HD Frame Rate
Converter Unit
CCA-5 Cables
8p-8p cables for the
CNU-700/500, MSU-
700A/750, VCS-700 and
RCP-700 Series
HKCU-951
HKCU-953
CCA-5-3
CCA-5-10
CCA-5-30
3 m
10 m
30 m
CCA-5-3
Connection Cable (3
meter/10 feet)
2-7. System Setup
The slots to which the circuit boards are inserted and
the internal switches of the unit differ depending upon
the system used. They need to be set according to the
system used.
2-7-1 Setting the System Format using
HDCU-900
The HDCU-900 can support input and output of
multiple formats. It can also support various types of
user’s format by installing the optional circuit boards.
HDCU-900 and list of optional boards
Board name
Model name
Board name
Slot to be installed
(Slots on the rear)
(Slots on the front)
DPR-163
RC-86
SDI-54A
Fixed to the top most slot
HDCU-900
DIF-102
–
Second or third slot from the top
Fixed to the bottom most slot
AT-141
SD Analog Interface Unit
HKCU-901
*1
*2
IF-789A /789P
VDA-57
ADA-59
SDI-54B
SDI-54C
Third slot from the top
HD Analog Interface Unit
HKCU-902
–
Second or third slot from the top
Second slot from the top
Frame Rate Converter
Unit HKCU-903
FC-83
LC-41
Line Converter Unit
HKCU-904
Second or third slot from the top
*1 for the USA and Canada.
*2 for the countries other than the USA and Canada.
Note
• Be sure to install the HKCU-901 of the same -regional
location as the HDCU-900.
• When the HKCU-901 is going to be installed, confirm
beforehand that the RC-86 board is installed in the
second slot from the top on the front side, the DIF-
102 board or the HKCU-902 is installed in the second
slot from the top on the front side.
• When installing the optional boards, be sure to start
installation from the second slot from the top on both
the front side and rear side. Never install an optional
board in the third slot from the top leaving the slots
blank without installing the board.
• Be sure to install the HKCU-901/903/904 into the
same slot on the front and rear sides.
• Do not install two or more of the same circuit boards
at the same time.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 21
2-7-1-1 HD System
2
CNU-700
HDC-900
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
HKCU-904
MSU-700A/750
HD-SDI Monitor
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
HKCU-904
HDC-900
HDC-950
HDCU-900/950
HKCU-901/951
HKCU-902
HKCU-903/953
HKCU-904
RCP-700/701
RCP-750/751
HDC-950
HDCU-900/950
HKCU-901/951
HKCU-902
HKCU-903/953
HKCU-904
Combination of boards
Combination of boards (Slots on the front)
System format
Signal input/output slot
Second slot from the top Third slot from the top
*1
1080/59.94I SDI
RC/FC/LC/–
RC/LC/IF /–
RC/LC/–
IF/–
Top most slot
1080/59.94I SDI Film Like FC
Second slot from the top
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
Top most slot
*2
RC
1080/59.94I Analog
*3
RC/FC/LC
–
*1
1080/50I SDI
RC/FC/LC/–
RC/LC/IF /–
*1 When installing the IF-789A/789P board (HKCU-901),
confirm that the RC-86 board is installed in the second slot
from the top.
*2 The second slot from the top on the rear side must have the
ADA-59 board (HKCU-902) installed.
*3 The third slot from the top on the rear side must have the
ADA-59 board (HKCU-902) installed.
Setting switches
Switch setting
AT-141
System format
DPR-163 board (S804 : LOCAL)
FC-83 board
board
S805
S807
S806
S603
S2
S2
1080/59.94I SDI
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
60
48
60
50
Intr
PsF
Intr
Intr
/1001
/1001
/1001
/1000
*
30
*
*
i
1080/59.94I SDI Film Like
1080/59.94I Analog
1080/50I SDI
*
*
*
* -NA
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 22
Figure 2-7-1-1: Example of connection using HDCU-900 (1) – System format: 1080/59.94I SDI
Required boards
2
Board name
(Slots on the front)
Board name
(Slots on the rear)
Slot to be installed
Top most slot
Remarks
DPR-163
RC-86
Blank
SDI-54A
DIF-102
Blank
HDCU-900
HDCU-900
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
REFERENCE IN
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
REFERENCE SIGNAL
HD REFERENCE SIGNAL
PROMPTER SIGNAL
HD-SDI SIGNAL
SYNC OUT (HD)
PROMPTER IN
HDC-900
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
HDCU-900
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
SYNC OUT (HD)
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
HD REFERENCE SIGNAL
HD-SDI SIGNAL
HDC-900
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
HDCU-900
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
Next HDCU-900
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
HD-SDI Monitor
HD-SDI Monitor
CNU-700
Terminated at 75 Ω
VCS-700
PIX 1 PIX 2
REMOTE
WF 1 WF 2
PIX A
WF A
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 23
Figure 2-7-1-2: Example of connection using HDCU-900 (2) – System format: 1080/59.94I SDI Film Like
Required boards
2
Board name
(Slots on the front)
Board name
(Slots on the rear)
Slot to be installed
Top most slot
Remarks
DPR-163
FC-83
SDI-54A
SDI-54B
DIF-102
HDCU-900
HKCU-903
HDCU-900
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
RC-86
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
REFERENCE IN
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
HD REFERENCE SIGNAL
1080/29.97 PsF, tri-level SYNC SIGNAL
1080/59.94I, tri-level SYNC SIGNAL
PROMPTER SIGNAL
SYNC OUT
SYNC OUT
PROMPTER IN
HDC-900
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3
HD-SDI SIGNAL
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
MONI
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
IN OUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
SYNC OUT
SYNC OUT
FRAME REFERENCE
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
PIX OUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
HDCU-900
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
SYNC OUT
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
1080/29.97 PsF, tri-level SYNC SIGNAL
1080/59.94I, tri-level SYNC SIGNAL
SYNC OUT
HDC-900
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3
HD-SDI SIGNAL
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
MONI
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
IN
OUT
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
SYNC OUT
SYNC OUT FRAME REFERENCE
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
SD REFERENCE
SIGNAL
HDCU-900
SD ANALOG VIDEO
SIGNAL
Next HDCU-900
HD-SDI Monitor
HD-SDI Monitor
CNU-700
VCS-700
PIX 1 PIX 2
Terminated at 75 Ω
REMOTE
WF 1 WF 2
PIX A
WF A
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 24
Figure 2-7-1-3: Example of connection using HDCU-900 (3) – System format: 1080/59.94I Analog
Required boards
2
Board name
(Slots on the front)
Board name
(Slots on the rear)
Slot to be installed
Top most slot
Remarks
DPR-163
RC-86
Blank
SDI-54A
DIF-102
ADA-59
HDCU-900
HDCU-900
HKCU-902
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
REFERENCE SIGNAL
PROMPTER SIGNAL
HDC-900
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
1
2
3
4
Y/G
PB/B
PR/R
Y/G
PB/B
PR/R
RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
OUT PUT
1
OUT PUT
2
HDCU-900
HD Analog Video
HD Analog Video
SYNC OUT(HD)
RET INPUT 1 to 4
HD-ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
HD-ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
HD REFERENCE SIGNAL
HD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
HDC-900
Next HDCU-900
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
1
2
3
4
Y/G
PB/B
PR/R
Y/G
PB/B
PR/R
RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
OUT PUT
1
OUT PUT
2
HDCU-900
HD Analog Video
HD Analog Video
SYNC OUT(HD)
RET INPUT 1 to 4
HD-ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
HD-ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
HD REFERENCE SIGNAL
HD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
Picture Monitor
Picture Monitor
CNU-700
Terminated at 75Ω
SD ANALOG VIDEO
SIGNAL
VCS-700
PIX 1 PIX 2
SD REFERENCE
SIGNAL
REMOTE
WF 1 WF 2
PIX A
WF A
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 25
2-7-1-2 SD System
2
PIX/WF
(HKCU-901)
VCS-700
CNU-700
HDC-900
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
HKCU-904
MSU-700A/750
PIX/WF (HDCU-900)
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
HKCU-904
HDC-900
HDC-950
HDCU-900/950
HKCU-901/951
HKCU-902
HKCU-903/953
HKCU-904
RCP-700/701
RCP-750/751
HDC-950
HDCU-900/950
HKCU-901/951
HKCU-902
HKCU-903/953
HKCU-904
Combination of boards
Combination of boards (Slots on the front)
System format
Signal input/output slot
Second slot from the top Third slot from the top
525/59.94I SDI
RC
FC
LC/IF/–
RC
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
525/29.97 PsF SDI Film
Like
NTSC
RC
RC
RC
IF
LC/IF/–
IF
Third slot from the top
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
625/50I SDI
PAL
Setting switches
Switch setting
AT-141
board
RC-86
FC-83 board
System format
DPR-163 board (S804 : LOCAL)
board
S805
S807
S806
S603
S2
S3
S802
525/59.94I SDI
NOT
60
Intr
/1001
*
*
525
525/29.97 PsF SDI Film
Like
NOT
48
PsF
/1001
*
*
525
NTSC
NOT
NOT
NOT
60
50
50
Intr
Intr
Intr
/1001
/1000
/1000
*
*
*
*
*
*
525
625
625
625/50I SDI
PAL
* -NA
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 26
Figure 2-7-1-4: Example of connection using HDCU-900 (4) - System format: 525/59.94I SDI
Required boards
2
Board name
(Slots on the front)
Board name
(Slots on the rear)
Slot to be installed
Top most slot
Remarks
DPR-163
RC-86
Blank
SDI-54A
DIF-102
Blank
HDCU-900
HDCU-900
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
SD COMPONENT SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
REFERENCE SIGNAL
REFERENCE IN
SYNC OUT
HDC-900
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 4
PROMPTER SIGNAL
SD COMPONENT SDI SIGNAL
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
1
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
HDCU-900
CHARACTER OUTPUT
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
SD COMPONENT SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
HDC-900
SYNC OUT
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 4
SD COMPONENT SDI SIGNAL
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
HDCU-900
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
Next HDCU-900
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
Picture Monitor
Picture Monitor
Waveform Monitor
Waveform Monitor
CNU-700
Terminated at 75 Ω
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 27
Figure 2-7-1-5: Example of connection using HDCU-900 (5) – System format: 525/29.97 PsF SDI Film Like
Required boards
2
Board name
(Slots on the front)
Board name
(Slots on the rear)
Slot to be installed
Top most slot
Remarks
DPR-163
FC-83
SDI-54A
SDI-54B
DIF-102
HDCU-900
HKCU-903
HDCU-900
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
RC-86
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
SD COMPONENT SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
REFERENCE SIGNAL
REFERENCE IN
SYNC OUT
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
HDC-900
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 4
PROMPTER SIGNAL
SD COMPONENT SDI SIGNAL
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
IN OUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
1
2
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
SYNC OUT
SYNC OUT FRAME REFERENCE
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
HDCU-900
CHARACTER OUTPUT
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
SD COMPONENT SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
HDC-900
SYNC OUT
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 4
SD COMPONENT SDI SIGNAL
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
MONI
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
IN OUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
SYNC OUT
SYNC OUT FRAME REFERENCE
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
HDCU-900
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
Next HDCU-900
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
Picture Monitor
Picture Monitor
Waveform Monitor
Waveform Monitor
CNU-700
Terminated at 75 Ω
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 28
Figure 2-7-1-6: Example of connection using HDCU-900 (6) – System format: NTSC
Required boards
2
Board name
(Slots on the front)
Board name
(Slots on the rear)
Slot to be installed
Top most slot
Remarks
DPR-163
RC-86
SDI-54A
DIF-102
VDA-57
HDCU-900
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
IF-789A
RET INPUT 1 to 4
ANALOG RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
REFERENCE SIGNAL
REFERENCE IN
PIX OUT(For RCP)
PROMPTER IN
PICTURE MONITOR OUTPUT FOR RCP
PROMPTER SIGNAL
WF OUT(For RCP)
WF MODE(For RCP)
RGB/Component OUT
VBS OUT
WAVEFORM MONITOR OUTPUT FOR RCP
HDC-900
WAVEFORM MONITOR MODE FOR RCP
ANALOG COMPONENT VIDEO SIGNAL
ANALOG COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
Y/G
SERIAL OUTPUT
1
2
3
4
B-Y/B
R-Y/R
1
2
RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT
OUTPUT
VBS OUT
HDCU-900
SYNC OUT
WF OUT(For MSU)
PIX OUT(For MSU)
SD SYNC REFERENCE SIGNAL
RET INPUT 1 to 4
PIX OUT(For RCP)
WF OUT(For RCP)
WF MODE(For RCP)
RGB/Component OUT
VBS OUT
ANALOG RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
PICTURE MONITOR OUTPUT FOR RCP
WAVEFORM MONITOR OUTPUT FOR RCP
HDC-900
WAVEFORM MONITOR MODE FOR RCP
ANALOG COMPONENT VIDEO SIGNAL
ANALOG COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
Y/G
SERIAL OUTPUT
1
2
3
4
B-Y/B
R-Y/R
1
2
RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT
OUTPUT
VBS OUT
HDCU-900
SD SYNC OUT
SD SYNC REFERENCE SIGNAL
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
VCS
PIX OUT(For MSU)
WF OUT(For MSU)
PIX 2
WF 2
Next HDCU-900
VCS-700
PIX 1
WF 1
REMOTE
PIX A
WF A
CNU-700
Terminated at 75 Ω
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 29
2-7-1-3 Progressive and Cinema Production System
2
CNU-700
HDC-900
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
HKCU-904
MSU-700A/750
PIX/WF or SDI Monitor
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
HKCU-904
HDC-900
HDC-950
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
HKCU-904
RCP-700/701
RCP-750/751
HDC-950
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-902
HKCU-903
HKCU-904
Combination of boards
Combination of boards (Slots on the front)
System format
Signal input/output slot
Second slot from the top Third slot from the top
720/59.94P SDI
RC/FC
FC
LC
Third slot from the top
Third slot from the top
Top most slot
720/59.94P SDI Film Like
1080/23.98PsF SDI
1080/24PsF SDI
LC
RC/FC/LC/–
RC/FC/LC/–
RC/FC/LC/–
RC/FC/LC/–
RC/FC/LC/–
RC
RC/LC/–
RC/LC/–
Top most slot
*4
1080/25PsF SDI
RC/LC/IF /–
Top most slot
*4
1080/29.97PsF SDI
1080/30PsF SDI
RC/LC/IF /–
Top most slot
RC/LC/–
LC/IF /–
Top most slot
525/29.97PsF SDI
Second slot from the top
*4 When the IF-789A/789P board (HKCU-901) is going to be
installed, confirm beforehand that the RC-86 board is
installed in the second slot from the top.
Setting switches
Switch setting
AT-141
DPR-163 board
System format
LC-41
board
RC-86
board
FC-83 board
(S804 : LOCAL)
board
S805
S807
S806
S603
S2
S3
S2
S802
540P
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
*
*
/1001
*
*
720P
*
720/59.94P SDI
60
48
48
48
50
60
60
60
Intr
PsF
PsF
PsF
PsF
PsF
PsF
PsF
720/59.94P SDI Film Like
1080/23.98PsF SDI
1080/24PsF SDI
/1001
/1001
/1000
/1000
/1001
/1000
/1001
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
720P
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1080/25PsF SDI
*
*
1080/29.97PsF SDI
1080/30PsF SDI
*
525/29.97PsF SDI
525
* -NA
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 30
Figure 2-7-1-7: Example of connection using HDCU-900 (7) – System format: 720/59.94P SDI
Required boards
2
Board name
(Slots on the front)
Board name
(Slots on the rear)
Slot to be installed
Top most slot
Remarks
DPR-163
RC-86
SDI-54A
DIF-102
SDI-54C
HDCU-900
HDCU-900
HKCU-904
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
LC-41
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
REFERENCE SIGNAL
REFERENCE IN
SYNC OUT
720/59.94P, tri-level SYNC SIGNAL
PROMPTER SIGNAL
PROMPTER IN
HDC-900
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3
HD-SDI SIGNAL
1
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
2
3
1
2
3
SERIAL RET INPUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
SYNC OUT SYNC OUT
HDCU-900
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
720/59.94P, tri-level SYNC SIGNAL
HD-SDI SIGNAL
HDC-900
SYNC OUT
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3
1
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
SERIAL OUTPUT
2
3
1
2
3
SERIAL RET INPUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
SYNC OUT SYNC OUT
HDCU-900
Next HDCU-900
PIX 2
WF 2
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
VCS
VCS-700
PIX 1
WF 1
REMOTE
PIX A
WF A
CNU-700
Terminated at 75 Ω
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 31
2-7-1-4 HD/SD Simul-Cast System
2
PIX/WF
(HKCU-901)
VCS-700
CNU-700
HDC-900
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-904
MSU-700A/750
PIX/WF (HDCU-900)
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-904
HDC-900
HDC-950
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-904
HDC-950
HD-SDI Monitor
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
HKCU-904
MSU-700A/750
RCP-700/701
RCP-750/751
Combination of boards
Combination of boards
(Slots on the front)
System format
Signal input/output slot
Second slot Third slot
from the top from the top
HD
SD
1080/59.94I SDI
1080/59.94I SDI
1080/50I SDI
525/59.94I SDI
NTSC
RC
RC
RC
RC
LC/IF/–
IF
Top most slot or second slot from the top
Top most slot or third slot from the top
Top most slot or second slot from the top
Top most slot or third slot from the top
625/50I SDI
PAL
LC/IF/–
IF
1080/50I SDI
Second slot from the top or third slot
from the top
720/59.94I SDI
525/59.94I SDI
RC
LC
Setting switches
Switch setting
System format
DPR-163 board
(S804 : LOCAL)
AT-141 LC-41 RC-86
board
board
board
HD
SD
S805
S807
S806
S603
S2
S802
1080/59.94I SDI
1080/59.94I SDI
1080/50I SDI
525/59.94I SDI
NTSC
NOT
NOT
NOT
NOT
540P
NOT
60
60
50
50
*
Intr
Intr
Intr
Intr
*
/1001
/1001
/1000
/1000
*
*
*
*
525
525
625
625
625/50I SDI
PAL
1080/50I SDI
720/59.94I SDI
525/59.94I SDI
/1001
720P
525
60
Intr
* -NA
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 32
Figure 2-7-1-8: Example of connection using HDCU-900 (8) – System format: HD: 1080/59.94I SDI, SD: NTSC
Required boards
2
Board name
(Slots on the front)
Board name
(Slots on the rear)
Slot to be installed
Top most slot
Remarks
DPR-163
RC-86
SDI-54A
DIF-102
VDA-57
HDCU-900
HDCU-900
HKCU-901
Second slot from the top
Third slot from the top
IF-789A
RET INPUT 1 to 4
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
SD SYNC OUT
ANALOG RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
SD SYNC REFERENCE SIGNAL
REFERENCE SIGNAL
REFRENCE IN
PIX OUT (For RCP)
PROMPTER IN
PICTURE MONITOR OUTPUT FOR RCP
PROMPTER SIGNAL
WF OUT (For RCP)
WF MODE (For RCP)
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3
WAVEFORM MONITOR OUTPUT FOR RCP
WAVEFORM MONITOR MODE FOR RCP
HD-SDI SIGNAL
HDC-900
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
Y/G
SERIAL OUTPUT
1
2
3
4
B-Y/B
R-Y/R
1
2
RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT
OUTPUT
VBS OUT
VBS OUT
HDCU-900
ANALOG COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL
ANALOG COMPONENT VIDEO SIGNAL
WF OUT (For MSU)
PIX OUT (For MSU)
RGB/Component OUT
RET INPUT 1 to 4
ANALOG RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 4
PIX OUT (For RCP)
WF OUT (For RCP)
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
PICTURE MONITOR OUTPUT FOR RCP
HDC-900
WAVEFORM MONITOR OUTPUT FOR RCP
WAVEFORM MONITOR MODE FOR RCP
WF MODE (For RCP)
SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3
HD-SDI SIGNAL
1
1
2
3
4
4
1
1
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
3
2
3
2
4
SERIAL RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT WF MODE
Y/G
SERIAL OUTPUT
1
2
3
4
B-Y/B
R-Y/R
1
2
RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT
OUTPUT
VBS OUT
HDCU-900
VBS OUT
RGB/Component OUT
SD SYNC OUT
ANALOG COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL
ANALOG COMPONENT VIDEO SIGNAL
SD SYNC REFERENCE SIGNAL
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
PIX OUT (For MSU)
WF OUT (For MSU)
PIX 2
WF 2
VCS
Next HDCU-900
PIX 1
WF 1
VCS-700
REMOTE
PIX A
WF A
CNU-700
Terminated at 75 Ω
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 33
(3) Setting the frame conversion (when the HKCU-
953 is installed)
When the shooting mode of the camera is set to 24PsF,
set the HD-SDI output signal format from the HKCU-
953.
2-7-2 Setting the System Format using
2
HDCU-950
For a system using the HDCU-950, the output signal
format must be set.
Normally the Multi-Format is set from the RM/MSU or a
device that is connected externally. However, it can
also be set by the switches on the AT-149 board or FC-
88 (HKCU-953) board.
Setup switch : S2 on the FC-88 board (Factory
setting: OFF)
ON : When the shooting mode of the camera is set
to 24PsF, the frame frequency conversion is
implemented.
OFF :The frame frequency is not converted. The
same signal as the main HD-SDI signal is
output.
(1) Setting the HD-SDI output
Set the output signal format as the HD-SDI signal. At
the same time, this setting becomes the shooting
mode of the camera.
1. Set the field frequency coefficient.
Setup switch : S420 on the AT-149 board (Factory
setting : REMOTE)
Note:
The setting of the frame conversion frequency must
follow the set format of the SD signal output.
When S423-1 on the AT-149 board is set to OFF
(NTSC), the frame frequency is converted to 60i (30
Hz).
1.001 :
Set the field frequency to 1/1.001 times
(Set the field frequency to 1.001 when
using NTSC (525/60) signal in the SD
system.)
When S423-1 on the AT-149 board is set to ON (PAL),
the frame frequency is converted to 50i (25 Hz).
1.000 :
Set the field frequency to 1 time. (Set the
field frequency to 1.000 when using PAL
(625/50) signal in the SD system.)
REMOTE : Set it with RM/MSU, etc., that is
connected outside.
2. Set the field frequency.
Setup switch: S418 on the AT-149 board (Factory
setting: 60 V)
60 V : When the FC-88 board (HKCU-953) is not
used but the NTSC (525/60) signal is used in
the SD system.
50 V : When the FC-88 board (HKCU-953) is not
used but the PAL (625/50) signal is used in
the SD system.
48 V : At present, this function is not supported.
3. Set the shooting mode of the camera.
Setup switch : S419 on the AT-149 board (Factory
setting : INTR)
INTR : When shooting with interlacing system.
PROG : When shooting with progressive (PsF)
system.
540P : When shooting with 540-60P system. (At
present, this function is not supported.)
Note:
If you select a format of 48i (48 field interlace) or
another format that is not supported by the HDCU-950,
the setting causes an error and the indicators (D201 to
D205) on the AT-149 board will flash.
(2) Setting the SD signal output
When S420 on the AT-149 board is set to a position
other than REMOTE, set the SD signal output to NTSC
(525/60) or PAL (625/50).
Setup switch : S423-1 on the AT-149 board (Factory
setting : OFF)
ON : PAL (625/50)
OFF : NTSC (525/60)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 34
2-7-2-1 Standard System
2
PIX/WF
(HDCU-950)
VCS-700
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MSU-700A/750
HDCU-950
HKCU-951
HKCU-953
CNU-700
HDC-950 + CA-905L
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
PIX/WF (HDCU-950)
HDCU-950
HKCU-951
HKCU-953
HDC-950 + CA-905L
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
HDC-950
HDCU-950
HKCU-951
HKCU-953
+B M3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
HDC-950
HD-SDI Monitor
HDCU-950
HKCU-951
HKCU-953
MSU-700A/750
RCP-700/701
RCP-720/721
RCP-730/731
RCP-740/741
RCP-750/751
Combination of boards
Board name
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Front side
AT-149
AVP-4
DTX-1
SDI-70
DTX-1
SDI-70
DTX-1
SDI-70
DRX-1
HIF-5
DRX-1
HIF-5
DRX-1
HIF-5
RC-91
-
HDCU-950
Rear side CN-2219 CN-2220
Front side AT-149 AVP-4
Rear side CN-2219 CN-2220
Front side AT-149 AVP-4
Rear side CN-2219 CN-2220
DIF-124
RC-91
-
EN-145
VDA-61
RC-91
DIF-124
HDCU-950 w/ HKCU-951
installed
DIF-124
FC-88
HDCU-950 w/ HKCU-953
installed
SDI-73
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 35
2-7-2-2 Standard HD/SD System
2
Figure 2-7-2-1 Example of connection using HDCU-950 (1) - System format: HD/SD system
SYNC OUT (HD)
HD REFERENCE SIGNAL
PROMPTER IN
PROMPTER SIGNAL
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 3
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
REFERENCE IN
HDC-950 + CA-905L
REFERENCE SIGNAL
HD-SDI SIGNAL
SERIAL OUTPUT 1, 2
+
B
M
3
CAMERA
+
B
M
3
REFERENCE
PROMPTER
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
RC
SD SDI
OUT 1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
SD SDI
OUT 2
SERIAL
OUT 1
RET1
RET2
RET3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
SD ANALOG Monitor
MIC2
SYNC OUT
+
B
M
3
PIX
OUT
SERIAL
OUT 2
+
B
M
3
WF
OUT
MONI
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
4
Waveform Monitor
HD-SDI Monitor
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
M3
M3
MIC REMOTE
INCOM/TALLY/PGM
13
1
8
1
+
B
M
3
15
9
25
14
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
HDCU-950
SYNC OUT (HD)
HD REFERENCE SIGNAL
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 3
SERIAL OUTPUT 1, 2
HD-SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
HD-SDI SIGNAL
HDC-950 + CA-905L
+
B
M
3
CAMERA
+
B
M
3
REFERENCE
PROMPTER
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
RC
SD SDI
OUT 1
+
B
M
3
SD ANALOG Monitor
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
SD SDI
OUT 2
SERIAL
OUT 1
RET1
RET2
RET3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC2
SYNC OUT
+
B
M
3
PIX
OUT
SERIAL
OUT 2
+
B
M
3
WF
OUT
MONI
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
Waveform Monitor
4
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
M3
M3
MIC REMOTE
INCOM/TALLY/PGM
13
1
8
1
+
B
M
3
15
9
25
14
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
HDCU-950
HD-SDI Monitor
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
Next HDCU-950
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
CNU-700
Terminated at 75 Ω
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 36
2-7-2-3 HD/SD Film Like System
2
Figure 2-7-2-2 Example of connection using HDCU-950 (2) - System format: HD/SD film like system
SYNC OUT
SYNC SIGNAL
PROMPTER IN
PROMPTER SIGNAL
SERIAL RET INPUT 1 to 3
SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
REFERENCE IN
REFERENCE SIGNAL
SERIAL
OUTPUT 1, 2
HD-SDI SIGNAL
HDC-950 + CA-905L
HD SDI OUT 1, 2
HD-SDI SIGNAL
FRAME REF IN
SUB REFERENCE SIGNAL
SD-SDI SIGNAL
+
B
M
3
CAMERA
+
B
M
3
REFERENCE
PROMPTER
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
RC
FC
SD SDI
OUT 1
HD SDI
OUT 1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
SD SDI
OUT 2
HD SDI
OUT 2
SERIAL
OUT 1
RET1
RET2
RET3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC2
SYNC OUT
+
B
M
3
PIX
OUT
FRAME
REF IN
SERIAL
OUT 2
Picture Monitor
+
B
M
3
WF
OUT
MONI
RCP/CNU
OUT
WF MODE
4
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
M3
M3
MIC REMOTE
INCOM/TALLY/PGM
13
1
8
1
+
B
M
3
Waveform Monitor
15
9
25
14
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
HDCU-950
SYNC OUT
SYNC SIGNAL
SERIAL RET INPUT
1 to 3
SDI RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
HD-SDI SIGNAL
SERIAL
OUTPUT 1, 2
HDC-950 + CA-905L
HD SDI OUT 1, 2
HD-SDI SIGNAL
SD-SDI SIGNAL
+
B
M
3
CAMERA
+
B
M
3
REFERENCE
PROMPTER
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
RC
FC
SD SDI
OUT 1
HD SDI
OUT 1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
SD SDI
OUT 2
HD SDI
OUT 2
SERIAL
OUT 1
RET1
RET2
RET3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC2
SYNC OUT
+
B
M
3
PIX
OUT
FRAME
REF IN
SERIAL
OUT 2
Picture Monitor
+
B
M
3
WF
OUT
MONI
RCP/CNU
OUT
WF MODE
4
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
M3
M3
MIC REMOTE
INCOM/TALLY/PGM
13
1
8
1
+
B
M
3
15
9
25
14
Waveform Monitor
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
HDCU-950
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
Next HDCU-950
CNU-700
Terminated at 75 Ω
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 37
2-7-2-4 Analog NTSC/PAL System
2
Figure 2-7-2-3 Example of connection using HDCU-950 (3) - System format: Analog NTSC/PAL system
SYNC OUT
SD SYNC REFERENCE SIGNAL
PROMPTER IN
PROMPTER SIGNAL
RET INPUT 1 to 3
ANALOG RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
REFERENCE IN
REFERENCE SIGNAL
RGB/
HDC-950 + CA-905L
Component OUT
ANALOG COMPONENT VIDEO SIGNAL
ANALOG COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL
VBS OUT
+
B
M
3
CAMERA
+
B
M
3
REFERENCE
PROMPTER
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
EN
RC
SD SDI
VBS
OUT
OUT 1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
SD SDI
OUT 2
SERIAL
OUT 1
RET1
RET2
RET3
Y/G
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC2
SYNC OUT
+
B
M
3
PIX
OUT
SERIAL
OUT 2
B-Y/B
R-Y/R
+
B
M
3
WF
OUT
MONI
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
4
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
M3
M3
MIC REMOTE
INCOM/TALLY/PGM
13
1
8
1
+
B
M
3
15
9
25
14
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
HDCU-950
SYNC OUT
SD SYNC REFERENCE SIGNAL
ANALOG RETURN VIDEO SIGNAL
RET INPUT 1 to 3
RGB/
Component OUT
ANALOG COMPONENT VIDEO SIGNAL
ANALOG COMPOSITE VIDEO SIGNAL
VBS OUT
HDC-950 + CA-905L
+
B
M
3
CAMERA
+
B
M
3
REFERENCE
PROMPTER
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
EN
RC
SD SDI
VBS
OUT
OUT 1
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
SD SDI
OUT 2
SERIAL
OUT 1
RET1
RET2
RET3
Y/G
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
MIC2
SYNC OUT
+
B
M
3
PIX
OUT
SERIAL
OUT 2
B-Y/B
R-Y/R
+
B
M
3
WF
OUT
MONI
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
4
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
M3
M3
MIC REMOTE
INCOM/TALLY/PGM
13
1
8
1
+
B
M
3
15
9
25
14
+
B
M
3
+
B
M
3
HDCU-950
Next HDCU-950
WF 2
PIX 2
SD ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
SD REFERENCE SIGNAL
VCS
VCS-700
PIX 1
WF 1
PIX A
WF A
REMOTE
CNU-700
Terminated at 75 Ω
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 38
2-8. Rack Mounting of System Equipment
2
19-inch size equipment
2. Secure the inner members to both sides of the unit
with the screws (+B4 x 8). Use the screws removed
from or supplied with the unit.
The HDCU-900 Camera Control Unit, CNU-700 and
CNU-500 Camera Command Network Units, and VCS-
700 Video Selector can be mounted in a 19-inch
standard EIA rack. These units either mount directly
into the rack or with optional slide rails such as the
Sony RMM-30 Rack Mount Rail. These slide rails allow
the unit to be easily pulled out from the rack and are
recommended if you intended to pull out the unit
frequently.
Warning for Safety Purpose: It takes two or more people to
mount a unit into a rack. Mounting the unit into a rack by
yourself can cause back or other injuries.
Mounting the unit directly to the rack
Fix the unit to the rack using the rack mount bracket of
the unit. Daily maintenance is easy with the unit
mounted with this method.
3. Loosen the screw of the bracket of the outer
member.
Universal-type rack
12.7
15.9
15.9
12.7
4. Attach the front and rear brackets of the outer
member to the rack. Screws (b), (c) and (d) are
supplied with the RMM-30.
c
Plate nut
Rear
Front
Wide-type rack
12.7
31.75
12.7
12.7
15.9
15.9
12.7
15.9
15.9
b
Screw
31.75
d
Screw
Front
Rear
12.7
31.75
12.7
Mounting the unit using the RMM-30 Rack Mount
Rail
When the RMM-30 Rack Mount Rail is used, the unit
can be mounted into a rack with a depth of 660 to 830
mm (26 to 32 3/4 inches). Proceed as follows:
31.75
1. Pull out inner member while pushing against the
stopper.
31.75
d
Screw
d
Screw
When a 1U unit is mounted
Stopper
(1) Attach the front bracket to the inside of the front
of the rack at the screw holes at 15.9 mm (22/
32 inch) intervals, using screw (b) and plate nut
(c).
Outer member
Inner member
(2) Attach the rear bracket to the outside of the rear
of the rack at the screw holes at 31.75 mm (1 5/
16 inches) intervals, using screws (d).
When a unit other than 1U height is mounted
(1) Attach the front bracket to the outside of the
front of the rack at the screw holes at 31.75 mm
intervals, using screws (d).
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 39
(2) Attach the rear bracket to the outside of the rear
of the rack at the screw holes at 31.75 mm
intervals, using screws (d).
Installation
2
1. Secure the RMM-301 in the 19-inch EIA standard
rack with the four B5 screws (6 mm or longer).
5. Fasten the screws loosened in step 3.
6. Pull the rails out.
57.2 mm
B5 screw
(6 mm or longer)
RMM-301
B5 screw
(6 mm or longer)
7. Insert the inner member to the outer member while
pushing against the stopper, and then fully push
the unit into the rack.
2. Secure the unit with the supplied four screws (B4 x
6) and the four washers.
Warning for Safety Purpose: It takes two or more people
to mount a unit into a rack. Mounting the unit into a rack by
yourself can cause back or other injuries.
8. Push the unit into the rack, and secure the front
panel to the rack with screws (+RK M5 x 16 to 20)
and washers (φ 5).
W4
W4
B4 x 6
B4 x 6
Warning
• If the rack falls due to the weight of the equipment, it
may cause death or major injury. To prevent the rack
from falling or moving, be sure to fix the rack to the
floor.
• If the rack falls, death or serious injury may result.
When attaching the unit, be sure to fix the rack to the
floor and be careful not to attach at a height of 1.2 m
or higher from the floor.
HDCU-950
The two HDCU-950 can be mounted in parallel in a 19-
inch EIA standard rack by using the rack mount
adapter RMM-301 (optional). (Three-unit height)
Caution
• Use the specified rack mount adapter. If not, injury
could occur by drop of the unit because strength of
the shelf board is not enough.
• Mount the unit with more than two persons. A one-
man job may cause injury.
• Be careful not to catch your finger or hand in the rack
mount rail.
• Mount in the rack in a stable position. Injury could
occur by drop of the unit in unbalance condition of
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 40
installation or removal. Install in a posture of stability
and carefully.
2
Required Parts
• Rack mount adapter RMM-301 1 set
• Screw (B4 x 6) (supplied with the RMM-301) 4 pcs
Sony part No.: 7-682-560-04
• Washer (W4, SMALL) (supplied with the RMM-301) 4
pcs
Sony part No.: 7-688-004-03
• B5 screw (6 mm or longer) 4 pcs
RCP-700 Series and MSU-700 Series
The RCP-750/751/700/701 and the MSU-700A/750
can be mounted into a 19-inch rack using an optional
drawer. Each type of equipment requires different
parts to mount it into the drawer.
Cover
2
Drawer
RCP-700 Series
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 2 Total System 41
Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing)
Benefit of SonyADSP(Advanced
Digital Signal Processing)
3
3-1. Full DSP Camera Processing
3
The HDC-900 Series uses 12-bit A/D conversion
based on the latest LSI technology. This advanced
technology has allowed Sony to take a major step
forward from the 10-bit conversion of its previous
generation of cameras - a move that was not possible
with earlier A/D converters and DSP LSIs.
Photo 3-1: Multi Matrix ON and OFF
(1) Multi Matrix
Multi Matrix is a function that electronically adjusts the
basic RGB color 'taking characteristics' of the camera
to achieve optimum colorimetry. It makes it easy to
match the color of cameras under multi-camera
operations, or to reproduce the characteristics of
another type of camera. It can also be used to
manipulate color for a particular special effect. A
conventional linear matrix function provides only six
adjustable parameters, with considerable interaction
between their effects on a specific color. Multi Matrix
divides the spectrum into 16 segments, each of 22.5
degrees, for each of which there is an independent
hue and saturation parameter. Multi Matrix allows the
selection of each of these segments, with separate
adjustment of hue and saturation parameters.
Operation flow is as follows:
Normal
1. Select Multi Matrix on the paint menu of the MSU-
700A/750 Master Set-up Unit.
2. Turn the Matrix and the Multi switches to ON.
3. The MSU-700A/750 EL display now shows a
representation of the Multi Matrix as it would appear
on a vectorscope. You can select the desired color
phase that you want to adjust.
On
4. After selection of the color phase, its hue and
saturation can be adjusted.
Photo 3-2: Multi Matrix (Vectorscope)
Figure 3-1: Multi Matrix
R-Y
saturation
hue
B-Y
Normal
ON
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) 43
(2) Auto Knee
When the Auto Knee button on the MSU or RCP panel
is pressed, it optimizes the knee point and knee slope
for best reproduction of the high lights. The Adaptive
Highlight control function can also be used in
conjunction with Auto Knee.
3
Figure 3-2: Auto Knee curve image
Input signal level
white clip
auto slope
Output signal level
point limit
auto knee circuit
(3) Gamma
(5) Black Clip
New 12-bit A/D conversion more precisely defines the
required gamma characteristic by using a gamma
curve created from 48 segments. This is in comparison
with the 32 segments in the previous camera range.
Improvements in the Black Clip circuitry have
improved the signal/noise ratio for more natural
reproduction.
(6) Auto Black/White
The HDC-900 Series provides superb accuracy in
black and white balance.
(4) Black Gamma
Black Gamma allows control of the linear part of the
gamma characteristic, providing adjustment of the
shadow areas of the picture during shooting.
Also, the Black Gamma range can be adjusted
depending upon the situation.
3-2. Precise Handling of Highlight Position
(1) Optimized bit assignment
Photo 3-3: Knee saturation ON and OFF
Washed out
Highlights are compressed by a pre-knee circuit
before A/D conversion, providing the most efficient
utilization of the 12-bit A/D conversion process.
(2) Knee saturation
Knee Saturation eliminates both the 'washed out' effect
and hue changes in overexposed areas of a picture,
providing more natural color reproduction.
Normal
On
Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) 44
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
(3) Low key saturation
Photo 3-5: Adaptive highlight control ON and OFF
Normal (Olympic Stadium of Barcelona)
On (Olympic Stadium of Barcelona)
3
With conventional cameras, low light areas can be
subject to a reduction in saturation. This can result in
color in these areas being "washed out". The Low Key
Saturation function on the HDC-900 Series eliminates
this problem by optimizing the amplification of color
saturation at low light levels, providing more natural
color reproduction.
Photo 3-4: Low key saturation ON and OFF
Normal
(5) Triple Skin Tone Detail Correction
Skin Tone Detail Correction controls the detail level of
those objects which have specific color tones. The
HDC-900 Series allows detail to be set independently
for each of three separate color ranges. Colors are not
limited to skin tones, but can be setfor any color. Detail
may be increased or decreased relative to the normal
level.
Phase:
Sets the color phase for which Skin Tone
Detail Correction is activated.
Colorimetry in dark areas are improved.
On
Width:
Sets the color width for which Skin Tone
Detail Correction is activated.
(4) Adaptive highlight control (Auto Knee mode)
Conventional cameras only have a single knee point/
slope characteristic. In contrast, the Sony ADSP
system has multiple knee point/slope characteristics.
The camera monitors the brightness of all areas of the
picture and adapts the knee point/slope for optimum
reproduction. A typical example is shooting an interior
scene which includes a sunlit exterior seen through a
window. This new function applies only to video levels
in excess of the knee point, the middle and low
luminance parts remaining unchanged.
Saturation:Sets the saturation for which Skin Tone
Detail Correction is activated.
Figure 3-4: Skin Tone Detail Correction
R-Y
Width
Phase
B-Y
Figure 3-3: Knee curve image
Intput signal level
white clip
Saturation
auto slope
Output signal level
........
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) 45
Photo 3-6: Triple Skin Tone Detail Correction ON and OFF
3
Sharper
Softer
Normal
CH-2 On
CH-1 On
Softer
(6) Adaptive Detail Control
The Adaptive Detail Control provides natural detail
enhancement on extreme highlights by automatically
altering the amplitude of the edge signal for those
forms of high contrast signals.
Photo 3-7: Adaptive Detail Control ON and OFF
Normal
The black edges are removed.
On
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) 46
(7) Electronic Soft Focus
3
This function is similar to an optical soft filter. By
subtracting the edge enhancement signal from the
original video signal, slight 'defocused' pictures are
created electronically. This is an important new
creative feature that can be used to either complement
or replace the Skin Tone Detail Correction function,
when more of a 'film look' is sought for close-ups, etc.
Figure 3-5: Electronic Soft Focus signal image
Original
Enhancer
Soft Focus
Photo 3-8: Electronic Soft Focus ON and OFF
Normal
Electronic Soft Focus On (Softer than with Detail Off)
Detail Off
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) 47
3-3. Outstanding reliability and easy maintenance
3
One of the most important concerns for broadcasters
is the reliability of equipment. This is considerably
improved with Sony digital processing. In Sony ADSP
cameras, all the processing parameters are
contained menu system, enables easy and accurate
set-up of camera systems for regular realignment.
Finally, a great benefit of Sony ADSP cameras is their
advanced self-diagnostic system. HDC-900 Series
cameras detect problems in their digital processing
and provide a viewfinder warning indication. Detailed
information, such as identifying the faulty board, is also
shown on the Master Set-up Unit screen and the
Camera Command Network Unit character display to
provide easy and rapid fault location.
completely and precisely defined at the design stage,
and almost all the potentiometers are replaced by
semiconductor memories. Consequently, Sony ADSP
cameras show extremely stable performance,
regardless of environmental conditions such as
temperature, humidity, shock and vibration. This high
stability, together with the advantages of the self-
3-4. Low power consumption
To achieve its design aim of complete digital
processing, including digital implementation of the
nonlinear processing stages, Sony has developed
VLSIs which contain over 1,600,000 actual gates. This
complexity demonstrates the advances that Sony has
made in the application of its semiconductor
technology. Despite this complexity, Sony ADSP
cameras approach the same low power consumption
as previous analog/digital portable cameras. This has
been made possible by using the Sony EDA
(Electronic Design Automation) system to optimize the
complex camera circuitry in a short time scale and to
incorporate the latestLSItechnologies (2.5 V drive and
0.35 µm design rule) to give a total power consumption
of just 25 W for the HDC-950 portable HD camera (in
stand-alone use without options).
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 3 Benefit of Sony ADSP (Advanced Digital Signal Processing) 48
4-1. Sony Camera Command Network System
4
Several decades of TV operations have led to the
development of many alternative operational and
engineering philosophies relating to the deployment of
video and technical control and to the monitoring and
routine maintenance of multi-camera studio and OB
truck installations. Sony has re-examined the entire
studio camera architecture with the goal of structuring
a far higher degree of system flexibility. This new
architecture is based on:
• High-speed communication of digital control
commands
• A considerably augmented Master Set-up Unit, the
MSU-700A/750
• The introduction of a powerful technical 'nerve
center' concept - the camera Command Network
Units, CNU-700 and CNU-500
• Electronically assignable camera remote control
panels for use with these camera command network
units
4-2. Master Set-up Unit – MSU-700A/750
The Master Set-up Unit (MSU) is the centralized
technical control position for multi-camera systems.
The MSU-700A/750 has been designed to provide
comprehensive and wide ranging technical
supervision and alignment of a complex camera
system from a single centralized panel. If it is desirable
in a large program origination complex to extend this
supervision to more than one control location (for
example, separate operational and engineering/
maintenance control centers) then a number of MSU-
700A/750 units can access the entire camera system.
To exercise maximum flexibility in controlling a multi-
camera system, the MSU-700A/750 is designed to
work in conjunction with the CNU-700 and CNU-500
Command Network Units. However, if a simplified
system is desired, the MSU-700A/750 can also
operate as a stand-alone unit. It provides rapid, finger-
tip access to all controls relating to the smooth
functioning of an operational system, including:
• Technical alignment controls for the entire camera
chain
better illustrate the enhanced degree of centralized
control than that relating to access to the many
adjustments required for the image enhancement
system. Depending upon the creative desires of the
program director, the MSU-700A/750 allows highly
flexible, finger-tip access to all critical adjustments,
including skin detail control.
The main features of the MSU-700A/750 are given
below.
(1) Easy operation
• Frequently used functions are directly accessed from
the panel.
• The following modes can be easily accessed by
using the new EL touch panel display for
maintenance and daily operation.
• Paint mode: Various paint items such as White,
Black and Flare are adjustable
• File mode: Storing, retrieving and transferring
reference files, lens files and scene files between
camera heads on a PC memory card
• Picture and waveform monitor switching
• System configuration
• Control data filing
• Maintenance mode: System phase control, HDCU
video level alignment, selection of character display
from a CNU-700 and CNU-500, etc.
• Configuration mode: Entire control system
Extended Technical Access to Camera Video
Processing
configuration, RCP assignment, etc.
• Card mode: PC memory card initialize, store to PC
memory card/recall from PC memory card, etc.
• Multi-mode: Setting of multi-camera operation such
as 'All', 'Control Priority', 'Parallel Mode', etc.
A traditional high-end studio/OB camera chain entails
a multiplicity of technical adjustments. In combination
they optimize of the technical alignment of the RGB
video processing channels and allow a broad degree
of control over certain critical video subsystems (such
as image enhancement, color reproduction, dynamic
range, etc.). Typically, these technical controls are
segregated into those requiring regular operational
access - and are provided as remote adjustments on
video operational panels or technical control panels -
and others, perhaps requiring less frequent access,
which are relegated to screwdriver adjustments on
various circuit boards within the camera head and
HDCU. This separation often entailed a degree of
protracted (and frustrating) re-alignment when subtle
creative readjustments are desired for a particular
picture composition.
(2) Multi-MSU operation
In a conventional system, a single MSU controls a
single studio or multiple studios. However, in this new
control system, multiple MSUs can be used to remotely
control/supervise a single studio from different
operational engineering and control rooms.
(3) Standard switch
Users standard setting data is easily recalled by
pressing the 'standard' switch.
Photo 4-1: MSU-700A Master Set-up Unit
In the HDC-900 Series camera system, Sony has
adopted the philosophy that all technical controls are
important and that remote access to virtually all
controls on a single control panel would bring higher
operational efficiency. This led to the introduction of
the MSU-700A/750 Master Set-up Unit. To avoid undue
complication of the ergonomics of the panel layout that
would result from such extensive access, a novel
Electro Luminescent (EL) sub-panel forms an integral
part of the overall MSU-700A/750 control panel - Photo
4-1. This menu-driven touch screen allows remote pre-
programmed and logical access to dozens of
technical adjustments. Perhaps no other system can
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 50
4-3. Camera Command Network Units – CNU-700 and CNU-500
4
The CNU-700 and CNU-500 Camera Command
Network Units are designed as the technical 'nerve
center' of a Star Shape Network System where all
commands such as 'All', 'Control Priority', 'Parallel/
Mode', etc. are centralized and distributed to the
respective HDCUs of the studio system. They are
furnished with an RS-232C port to provide interface
capability to external systems such as ISR (Interactive
Status Reporting), external PC or modem and robotics
control systems. They can be mounted in a 19-inch
standard rack (3U height for the CNU-700, and 1U
height for the CNU-500). Through the modem or PC,
camera data files can be transferred from a master
camera in a studio to cameras at several remote sites
during a live broadcast.
continue.
As mentioned in Section 2, Total System, the cost
versus performance balance between the two types of
Camera Command Network Units allows users to build
up systems that meet their application needs. The
CNU-500 is suitable for applications with up to six
cameras, while the CNU-700 can be expanded to
handle up to 12 cameras with use of the BKP-7930
optional expansion board.
(1) High-speed data transmission rates
CNU to MSU/RCP/HDCU: More than 500 Kbps
Camera Head to HDCU: 35 Kbps
(2) System configuration
By employing a RISC-based microprocessor in the
CNU-700 and CNU-500, the communication speed
has been greatly improved. Consequently, real-time
control and instant response to the MSU-700A/750 or
RCP-700 Series commands have been made possible.
With the combination of one VCS-700 Video Selector
with a CNU-700 or CNU-500, each of six pictures and
six waveform monitoring video signals can be handled
(and expanded to 96 of each with eight CNU-700
units).
Basic system: Up to six cameras with one CNU-700
or CNU-500
Expanded system: Up to 12 cameras with one CNU-
700 with one BKP-7930 optional board installed
Maximum system: Up to 96 cameras with eight CNU-
700 units (each with a BKP-7930 optional board
installed) via I/O port on the rear panel (four MSU-
700A/750 Master Set-up Units required).
(3) Character display
Through a CNU-700 or CNU-500, one RCP can
control one HDCU while one MSU is able to control
multiple HDCUs. All units connected to the CNU can
easily communicate with each other. Because of this
useful new -function, simultaneous control of multi
cameras, file transfer between multi cameras and
control from an external device are now possible.
As a convenient tool for system set-up and
Information concerning the camera heads and HDCUs
connected to the CNU-700 and CNU-500 can be
displayed on a monitor via the CHARACTER
connector. This includes:
• Camera settings
• System connection information
• Results of Auto set-up
• Self-diagnostics information
maintenance, both MSU control routing and CNU
control assignment can be displayed on a monitor.
Since the CNU is the nerve center of a system, it has
a bypass facility to maintain communication between
the HDCUs and RCPs in the event of a CNU
malfunction or power loss. Therefore, even when the
power unit or AT board of the CNU-700 or CNU-500
has failed, camera heads and HDCUs can be directly
controlled from the RCPs to let program production
(4) Emergency feature
In the event of a problem with the CNU-700 and CNU-
500, turning their internal OPERATION switch to the
EMERGENCY position allows control signals from the
remote control panel to be directly connected to the
camera head. In this way, program production
cancontinue by bypassing the CNU.
Table 4-1:A comparison between the CNU-700 and CNU-500
CNU-700
CNU-500
Up to 6 cameras
Up to 6 cameras
No
Number of Cameras
connectable
Up to 12 cameras with BKP-7930 fitted
Up to 96 cameras with multi CNU
connected
No
Up to 6 RCPs
Up to 6 RCPs
No
Up to 12 RCPs with BKP-7930 fitted
Number of RCPs connectable
Up to 96 RCPs with multi CNU
connected
No
Multi MSU connectable
Multi VCS connectable
Other controller connectable
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Available with optional AUX connector
Programable with remote
control
Yes
No
RS-232C connector for ISR
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
1
One
RS-232C connector for
switcher etc.
Two when BKP-7930 fitted
REF. video in
Character out
Yes
2
Assignment between RCP and
CHU/CCU
Free
Fixed
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 51
CNU-700
CNU-500
4
No (But RCP can be powered from
CCU)
Power supply to RCP
Height
Yes
3 U
Yes
1 U
19-inch standard rack
mauntable
Yes
Figure 4-1:CNU-700/500 Basic System Configurations (Up to six cameras with one CNU-700 or CNU-500)
Command
Video
Character
Monitor
HDC-900
Waveform Vector
HDCU-900
Monitor
Scope
1
2
Down Con.Outputs
VCS-700
B/W monitor
for character
display
3
4
CNU-700/500
NTSC or
PAL
HDCU-950
HDC-950
MSU-700A
5
6
RCP-700 Series
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 52
Figure 4-2:CNU-700 Expanded System Configurations (Up to 12 cameras with one CNU-700 with one BKP-7930 installed)
4
Monitor
HDC-900
Waveform
Monitor
Vector
Scope
Down Con.
Outputs
HDCU-900
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCS-700 (1)
VCS-700 (2)
B/W monitor
for character
display
BKP-7930
CNU-700
NTSC
or
PAL
HDC-950
HDCU-950
Down Con.Outputs
7
8
MSU-700A
9
10
11
12
Command
Video
Character
RCP-700 Series
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 53
Figure 4-3:CNU-700 Maximum System Configurations (expandable to 96 cameras)
4
HDC-900
Down Con.
Outputs
HDCU-900
VCS-700 (1)
VCS-700 (2)
1
2
6
B/W monitor
for character
display
Down Con.
Outputs
7
NTSC or
PAL
8
BKP-7930
CNU-700 (1)
CNU-700 (2)
BKP-7930
12
HDC-950
HDCU-950
13
14
18
19
20
24
MSU-700A
Down Con.
Outputs
VCS-700 (4)
VCS-700 (3)
Down Con.
Outputs
Command
Video
Monitor
Waveform Vector
Monitor
Scope
Character
Note:
With the addition of an external camera selector switching panel,
upto 96 cameras with 8 CNU-700s (with BKP-7930 installed) can
be controlled from a single MSU-700A.
RCP-700 Series
RCP-700 Series
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 54
Figure 4-4:Multi-MSU Operation Example (1)
4
HDC-900
ENGINEERING ROOM
MSU-700A
HDCU-900
VCS-700
Down Con.
Outputs
HDC-950
CNU-700 (1)
HDCU-950
MSU-700A
RCP-700 Series
VIDEO CONTROL ROOM
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 55
Figure 4-5:Multi-MSU Operation Example (2)
4
Supervising a complete system with a supervisiory MSU
STUDIO 1
HDC-900
HDCU-900
VCS-700
MSU-700A
Down Con.
Outputs
CNU-700
RCP
RCP
STUDIO 2
HDC-900
HDCU-900
VCS-700
Down Con.
Outputs
MSU-700A
CNU-700
STUDIO 3
HDC-900
HDCU-900
VCS-700
Down Con.
Outputs
MSU-700A
CNU-700
MSU-700A
Supervisory MSU
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 56
4-4. New Remote Control Panels - RCP-750/751
4
The RCP-750/751 Remote Control Panel is newly
designed for remote control of the Sony BVP/HDC-
Series Color Video Camera via the CCU/HDCU-Series
Camera Control Unit. The panel is connected to the
CCU/HDCU-Series Camera Control Unit (or the CNU-
series Camera Command Network Unit, which is
connected to the CCU/HDCU-Series) by a special
cable of up to 200 m (656 feet) in length.
Four units mountable on a 19-inch rack
Up to four units of this control panel can be mounted in
a line on a 19-inch EIA standard rack.
The RCP-750 and RCP-751 are completely identical
in their functions except with respect to the iris and
master black adjustments, for which the RCP-750 uses
a joystick type control while the RCP-751 uses rotary
knobs.
The RCP-750/751 has the following features:
Optimal control -arrangement for basic camera
operation
This remote control panel is provided with essential
control functions for basic operation of a BVP/HDC
Series camera. The buttons, knobs, and other controls
have been arranged according to their functions and
with consideration to their frequency of use. Indicators
and buttons light or flash to indicate the status of the
system operation. Also, guard frames are provided to
protect against accidental use of those buttons vital to
camera operation. These features ensure easy and
error-free use of this remote control panel.
Controlling the automatic setup function
The RCP-750/751 has built-in microcomputers that
reliably perform automatic setup for the majority of the
control items. The various items can be automatically
adjusted independently or in combination.
Controlling the scene file function
Camera adjustment and control data such as paint
data for a particular scene can be stored in the video
camera in the form of a scene file. The stored data can
easily be retrieved at any time to automatically adjust
the camera to the shooting conditions for that
particular scene. This panel enables up to five scene
files to be created and handled.
Controlling the ECS/shutter function of the camera
The ECS (Extended Clear Scan) and electronic shutter
functions of the camera can be turned on/off from this
panel. The ECS frequency and shutter speed are also
selectable.
Signal transmission via a digital line
Between this remote control panel and the camera
control unit, signals are digitally transmitted via a
single connection cable (CCA-5), ensuring a reliable
signal. Operating power is also supplied via the cable.
Memory Stick media card slot
Various data, including scene files and reference files,
can be stored on a Memory Stick media card and
reproduced at any time.
Touch panel with 31/2-inch LCD for various
operations
The control panel has a touch panel that permits
various items to be selected and adjusted on the LCD
in menu format.
Parallel operation with another control panel
Video cameras can be concurrently controlled from
this panel and another controller, such as the MSU-
700A/750A/750 Master Setup Unit.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 57
Figure 4-6:Operation Panel of the RCP-750/751
4
RCP-750
1Control select block
q;Power and output signal select block
PARA MASTER SLAVE
CAM PW TEST
AUTO SETUP
BARS
CLOSE
BLACK
2STANDARD button
qaAUTO SETUP block
CHAR SKIN DTL LEVEL START/
STANDARD
WHITE
ACTER AUTO HUE
BREAK
3Camera/CCU function
5600K
AUTO
KNEE
SKIN
DETAIL
DTL
BLACK
GATE GAMMA
ON/OFF buttons
PAINT
1
PAINT
2
PAINT
3
SCENE MAINTE
NANCE
FUNCTION
qsMenu operation block
4WHITE knobs
qfDETAIL knob
DETAIL
WHITE
5BLACK/FLARE knobs and
indicator
BLACK/FLARE
a
qgMEMORY STICK slot and
access lamp
EXT
6Camera number/tally indication
window
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
MASTER
BLACK
SENS
AUTO
Iris/master black control block
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
CLOSE
COARSE
OPEN
7ALARM indicator
8CALL button
9PANEL ACTIVE button
ALARM
CALL
PANEL
ACTIVE
IRIS
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
RCP-751
BLACK/FLARE
6Camera number/tally indication
EXT
window
MASTER
BLACK
RELATIVE
SENS
CLOSE
OPEN
COARSE
AUTO
Iris/master black control block
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
7ALARM indicator
8CALL button
9PANEL ACTIVE button
ALARM
CALL
PANEL
ACTIVE
IRIS
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 58
Figure 4-7:Flexible Configuration
4
Extremely Flexible Configuration
- When ex-factory -
The assignments between CCUs and RCPs are set as below.
HDC-900
CNU-700
HDCU-900
1
2
3
4
5
6
CCU 1
CCU 2
CCU 3
CCU 4
CCU 5
CCU 6
Down Con.
Outputs
VCS-700
MSU-700A
MSU 1
HDC-950
RCP-740/741
- For flexibility, assignments can be easily changed e,g -
CAM 1 controlles from RCP 1&2, CAM 2 controlled from RCP 3&4,
CAM 3 controlles from RCP5, and CAM 5 controlled from RCP 6
HDC-900
CNU-700
HDCU-900
1
2
3
4
5
6
CCU 1
CCU 2
CCU 3
CCU 4
CCU 5
CCU 6
Down Con.
Outputs
VCS-700
MSU-700A
MSU 1
HDC-950
RCP-740/741
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 59
4-5. Auto Set-up
4
The HDC-900 and HDC-950/930 cameras incorporate
• Auto white shading (The shading compensation is
achieved with horizontal and vertical sawtooth and
parabolic waveform as well as with a digitally
synthesized waveform for almost 1000 individual
correction zones created by DSP.)
a sophisticated Auto Setup system to adjust the video
processing circuitry parameters for optimum color
matching. In addition to auto white balance, auto black
balance and auto level set-up, the following
parameters can also be adjusted according to a
reference file.
• Skin detail auto hue (automatic hue detection for
specified color range, with full skin detail function.)
4-6. Control Priority and Parallel Mode
Control Priority
on the MSU-700A/750 and can be set by pressing the
lit IRIS/MB ACTIVE button.
When a camera system is configured using the CNU-
700 or CNU-500, each camera can be connected in
parallel to both an RCP-700 Series Remote Control
Panel and the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit, and
is controlled from whichever unit has control priority.
Priority for iris/master black adjustments only can be
obtained when the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button on the
panel on which the PANEL ACTIVE button is not lit.
When the MSU-700A/750 is in the panel active status,
only the iris and master black controls are inoperative
Parallel Mode
The MSU-700A/750 and RCP-700 Series panels have
a PARA button to select Parallel Mode. When the PARA
button of the unit is pressed and lit, Parallel Mode is
activated and all the control functions, other than the
iris/master black controls, become operative from both
units. The Parallel Mode can be canceled by pressing
the PARA button of the MSU-700A/750 or RCP-700
Series control panel.
4-7. S-BUS Control
The S-Bus Concept
of the operational advantages of the S-Bus system is
that the routing of input signals to the primary inputs -
of a DVS-7000/8000 Series Video Switcher can be
changed at any time without having to re-connect
cables. Even the source name display, tally signal and
tally display are interlocked and changed
automatically.
A further advantage of the Sony camera control system
is the 'S-Bus control' technique, which is based on an
original Sony concept. Studio installations and OB
units use digital routers as the nerve center for a
complete audio/video system. With Sony system
integration, all the equipment is connected to the Sony
digital router via a LAN, called the 'S-Bus'. With the S-
Bus system, control and tally signals are interlocked so
that they, along with video and audio signals, can be
simultaneously switched from a central terminal. Each
input/output source can be given a name, which can
then be displayed on the source name display panel of
a DVS-7000/8000 Series Video Switcher or on the BKS-
R3280/R3281 Status Character Display. One example
Sony camera command system with S-Bus
Controlling the router from an MSU panel
The digital router's cross point can switched from the
MSU-700A/750 by pressing its camera select button.
SDI video monitoring is enabled.
Figure 4-8:Router control from MSU
NTSC or PAL
CNU character
MSU-700A
PIX
CNU with BKP-7933
SDI
HDCU-900
with A/D board
IN1
PIX WFM
IN2
HDCU-900
with A/D board
SDI Monitor
from MSU camera select
IN5
OUT25
Router
(DVS-V3232 etc.)
Primary Station
HDCU-900
with A/D board
S-BUS BNC
CCA-5
Video BNC
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 60
Interlocking the RCP Assignment and WFM/PIX
Assignment
When the assignment of any RCP is changed from the
MSU-700A/750, the picture and waveform monitoring
is also automatically changed to follow the new
arrangement.
4
Figure 4-9:Interlocking RCP and monitor assignment
1CAM monitor
2CAM monitor
3CAM monitor
4CAM monitor
5CAM monitor
5CAM monitor
PIX WFM
4CAM monitor
PIX WFM
3CAM monitor
PIX WFM
2CAM monitor
PIX WFM
1CAM monitor
PIX WFM
Control 1CAM
Control 5CAM
Control 2CAM
Control 4CAM
Control 3CAM
Control 3CAM
Control 4CAM
Control 2CAM
Control 5CAM
Control 1CAM
When the RCP assignment is canged, PIX/WFM video is
also changed automatically.
Controlling the router from an RCP
Pressing the preview switch on an RCP-700 Series
control panel switches the appropriate digital router
cross point. SDI video monitoring is enabled.
Figure 4-10:Router control from an RCP
NTSC or PAL
CNU character
PIX
CNU with BKP-7933
MSU-700A
SDI
HDCU-900
with A/D board
SDI Monitor for RCP
PIX WFM
IN1
OUT1
IN2
HDCU-900
OUT2
with A/D board
IN5
OUT5
Router
(DVS-V3232 etc.)
Primary Station
HDCU-900
with A/D board
PIX WFM
S-BUS BNC
CCA-5
PIX WFM
Video BNC
Controlling the RCP assignment from other S-Bus
equipment
assignment of RCPs in a system that does not include
an MSU-700A/750
All S-Bus equipment detects the connection
configurations between camera heads, HDCUs and
RCPs by communicating with each other. This means
that other S-Bus equipment can change the
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 61
Figure 4-11:Remote control of the RCP assignment without an MSU-700A/750
4
(IN1 to 5) PIX1 video in
(IN13 to 17)WF1 video in
(OUT1 to 5)PIX1 video out
(OUT13 to 17)WF1 video out
NTSC or PAL
CNU
character
PIX
CNU with BKP-7933
HDCU
WF1
IN1
PIX1
OUT1
IN2
OUT2
PIX1
IN5
HDCU
WF1
OUT5
IN13
IN14
PIX1
OUT13
OUT14
IN17
HDCU
Router
(DVS-V3232 etc.)
Primary Station
OUT17
WF1
PIX/WF Monitor for RCP
RCP
Remote Assign
Panel
S-BUS BNC
CCA-5
PIX WFM
PIX WFM
PIX WFM
Video BNC
Camera name display onto CNU
Serial Tally Transfer
Sony uses a PC as the primary control station of a
digital router. Each camera can be given a name with
this primary PC, and these names are then
automatically shown on the CNU character display.
Decodes S-Bus serial tally signal and forward to
HDCU.
A CNU-700 requires a BKP-7933 option for S-Bus
functionality.
Figure 4-12:Current tally and S-Bus tally
S-BUS Tally
Current Tally
TOP MENU
TOP MENU
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
WIPE
DME
CHR
CHR
CHR
BKGD
WIDTH
LUM
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
WIPE
DME
CHR
CHR
CHR
BKGD
WIDTH
LUM
TRANS
P
A
TERN
KEY
AD
TRANS
P
A
TERN
KP
A
E
DY
M/E-1
1
2
3
4
5
M/E-1
1
2
3
4
5
BKGD
MODIFY
1
WIPE
DME
BKGD
MODIFY
1
TRANS
WIPE
DME
M/E-2
KEY
AD
TRANS
M/E-2
KEY
AD
MODIFY
2
S
A
T
MODIFY
2
S
A
T
AUX DELEGATION
DSK
1
DSK
2
WIPE
P/P
DME
BKGD
DSK
1
DSK
2
WIPE
P/P
DME
BKGD
TRANS
AUX DELEGATION
TRANS
PGM/PST
DIRECT
POSIT
HUE
KEY
AD
PGM/PST
DIRECT
POSIT
HUE
KEY
AD
DSK
KEY
DSK
P/P
DSK
DME
FRAME
MEN
1
FRAME
MEN
2
S
T
A
T
S
P
DSK
KEY
DSK
P/P
DSK
DME
FRAME
MEN
1
FRAME
MEN
2
S
T
A
T
S
P
USER
WIPE
USER
WIPE
PROG
FREZE
DISK
PIC
STILL
CHR
IN
SETUP
D
L
A
G
KEY
AD
STILL
CHR
IN
SETUP
D
L
A
G
KEY
AD
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
EDIT
FMRA
ME
FMRA
ME
M/E1
M/E2
P/P
P
PROG
FREZE
DISK
PIC
E
E
SYSTEM
VIDEO
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
A
U
X
EDIT
FRAME
MEM
1
FRAME
MEM
2
M/E1
M/E2
P/P
P
1
2
UTIL
SYSTEM
VIDEO
BKGD
NON-
UTIL
BKGD
NON-
SHIFT
SHIFT
GRAPH
LIGHT
DME
DME
GRAPH
LIGHT
DME
DME
UTILITY
UTILITY
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
SHIFT
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
EXIT
M/E
1
M/E
2
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
AUX
BLACK
PGM
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
1
M/E
2
AUX
BLACK
PGM
M/E-1
K1
ON
ON
KEY CONTROL
M/E-1
K1
ON
ON
KEY CONTROL
O
V
E
R
O
V
E
R
XPT
KEY
O
V
E
R
O
V
E
R
XPT
KEY
M/E
M/E
M/E
M/E
KEY
KEY
2
KEY
KEY
KEY
1
2
3
4
KEY
KEY
BKGD
MIX
2
KEY
KEY
2
KEY
2
1
2
3
4
BKGD
MIX
N
E
X
T
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
SHIFT
DME
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
K2
A
N
E
X
T
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
SHIFT
DME
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
M
A
T
T
E
A
U
T
O
DROP
PTN
OUT
K2
A
SUPER
NAM
SPLIT
BORD
CHR
SHDW
M
A
T
T
E
A
U
T
O
DROP
PTN
OUT
WIPE
SUPER
NAM
SPLIT
BORD
CHR
SHDW
WIPE
BLACK
COLOR
SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
2
KEY
PROC
KEY
BLACK
BLACK
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
2
KEY
PROC
KEY
DME
1
DME
2
LUM
KEY
LIN
CLEAN
DME
1
DME
2
LUM
KEY
LIN
CLEAN
WIPE
SNAP
WIPE
SNAP
FRAMES
UTO
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
T
Y
P
E
FRAMES
UTO
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
T
Y
P
E
BLACK
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
2
A
CUT
EFF
A
UTO
KEY
KEY
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
2
A
CUT
EFF
A
UTO
KEY
KEY
B
SHOT
DISS
TRANS
B
SHOT
DISS
TRANS
KEY1
KEY2
KEY1
KEY2
ON
VER
ON
VER
KEY CONTROL
M/E-2
K1
ON
VER
ON
VER
KEY CONTROL
AUX
BUS
XPT
KEY
O
O
M/E-2
K1
AUX
BUS
XPT
KEY
O
O
M/E
M/E
M/E
M/E
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
2
1
2
3
4
KEY
KEY
2
BKGD
MIX
KEY
2
KEY
KEY
2
KEY
1
2
3
4
BKGD
MIX
SHIFT
DME
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
N
E
X
T
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
K2
A
SHIFT
DME
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
N
E
X
T
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
M
A
T
T
E
A
U
T
O
DROP
PTN
OUT
K2
A
SUPER
NAM
SPLIT
BORD
CHR
SHDW
M
A
T
T
E
A
U
T
O
DROP
PTN
OUT
WIPE
SUPER
NAM
SPLIT
BORD
CHR
SHDW
WIPE
BLACK
BLACK
COLOR
SHIFT
M/E
1
KEY
PROC
KEY
BLACK
BLACK
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
1
KEY
PROC
KEY
BKGD
DME
1
DME
2
LUM
KEY
LIN
CLEAN
DME
1
DME
2
LUM
KEY
LIN
CLEAN
WIPE
SNAP
WIPE
SNAP
FRAMES
UTO
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
T
Y
P
E
FRAMES
UTO
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
T
Y
P
E
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
1
EFF
A
UTO
A
CUT
KEY
KEY
B
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
1
EFF
A
UTO
A
CUT
KEY
KEY
SHOT
DISS
TRANS
B
SHOT
DISS
TRANS
KEY1
KEY2
KEY1
KEY2
ON
ON
DOWN STREAM KEYER
M
A
S
T
E
R
E
-
F
I
L
E
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
P
A
N
E
L
PGM/PST
DSK1
ON
ON
DOWN STREAM KEYER
M
A
S
T
E
R
E
-
F
I
L
E
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
PA
N
E
L
O
V
E
R
O
VER
PGM/PST
DSK1
SNAP
O
V
E
R
O
VER
M/E
M/E
M/E
M/E
EFF
ALL
M/E
M/E
M/E
M/E
M/E
EFF
SNAP
ALL
M/E
DSK
DSK
2
KEY
DSK
DSK
2
DSK
DSK
2
BKGD
MIX
1
3
2
4
DSK
DSK
2
KEY
1
3
2
4
BKGD
MIX
TRANS
TRANS
N
E
X
T
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
DME
1
R
A
T
E
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF
DIS
N
E
X
T
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
DME
1
R
A
T
E
7
4
1
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
EFF
DIS
DSK2
M
A
T
T
E
A
U
T
O
SPLIT
BORD
DROP
PTN
SHD
W
OUT
DSK2
M
A
T
T
E
A
U
T
O
DROP
PTN
OUT
NAM
SUPER
WIPE
SUPER
NAM
SPLIT
BORD
SHD
W
CLR
WIPE
DME
2
M/E
CLR
DSK1
LASTX
AUTO
TRANS
DME
2
M/E
LASTX
COLOR
SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
1
M/E
2
DSK1
A
UTO
PGM BLACK
PST BLACK
KEY
PROC
DSK
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
1
M/E
2
TRANS
DME
1
DME
2
LUM
DSK
LIN
CLEAN
PGM BLACK
PST BLACK
LUM
DSK
LIN
CLEAN
KEY
PROC
DSK
1
3
2
4
STORE
LEARN
TRIM
DME
DME
2
DME
3
1
1
3
2
4
STORE
LEARN
TRIM
P/P
DSK
XPT
DME
3
P/P
DSK
FRAMES
UTO
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
T
Y
P
E
DSBL
XPT
DSBL
FRAMES
UTO
T
R
A
N
S
I
T
I
O
N
T
Y
P
E
FADE
T
COLOR
SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
1
M/E
2
A
CUT
DSK
DSK
O
DME
4
DME
COLOR SHIFT
BKGD
M/E
1
M/E
2
A
CUT
DSK
DSK
F
ADE
T
O
DME
4
DME
BLACK
USER
RCALL
ENTER
USER
RCALL
ENTER
DSK2
BLACK
DSK2
DSK1
DSK2
DSK1
DSK2
DVS-7250system
DVS-7250system
RS-422A
RS-422A
S-BUS
S-BUS
CNU
CNU
Tally Decoder
HDCU
Tally Decoder
HDCU
CCA-5 cable
HDCU
HDCU
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 4 Control System 62
5-1. Optical Fiber Overview
5
In order to secure the High Definition signal
and audio signal can be transmitted up to a distance
of 3 km (1.86 miles)* with the HDCU-900 and 1.2 km
(0.75 miles)* with the HDCU-950. To maintain this high
performance, an appropriate cleaning is
transmission between the HDCU-900/950 to an HDC-
900 or HDC-950/930 with a much longer distance
compared with the conventional Triax cable, the
SMPTE standard optical fiber connector and cable
have been adopted. The connecting cable uses two
single-mode optical fiber lines, two control lines, and
two power lines to carry digitized video, audio, control
signals and power to the camera. As a result, an
extremely high-quality, all-digital bi-directional video
recommended to carry out periodically.
* When supplying power to the camera via the optical fiber
cable, the maximum cable length varies with the camera
system configuration and lens type, the size of the optical
fiber cable and the number of cable connectors.
5-2. Cleaning of the Connector and Cable
It is recommended to clean the optical contact
portions mentioned below before connecting this unit
to the camera control unit.
Cleaning
Male connector
• CCU connector of this unit
• Camera connector of the camera control unit
• Optical/Electrical cable
Clean the tip of the white optical contacts with a cotton
swab moistened with alcohol.
Optical contacts (white)
It is also necessary to clean the optical contact
portions mentioned below before using the HDC-950/
930 with the large lens adaptor CA-905L.
• CA cable of a large lens adaptor
• CCU connector of a large lens adaptor
Follow the procedures below for cleaning.
Tools Required
• Alignment sleeve remover HC-001 (for female
connector)
Sony P/N: J-6480-010-A
Female connector
Note
The optical contacts for the female connector are in an
unexposed area. When cleaning, it is necessary to -
expose the contacts by first removing the alignment
sleeve. Proceed as follows.
Insert the shorter nose end when removing/installing
the alignment sleeve.
Grasp the handle, not the shock absorber.
Shock absorber portion Handle
1. Insert the alignment sleeve remover into the
alignment sleeve in a straight line and turn it
clockwise.
Insert the shorter nose end
• Cotton swabs (commercially available)
Note
Use the cotton swab with a diameter of around 4 mm.
The cotton swab with a diameter more than 5 mm does
not reach far enough in to the inner part of the cable,
to clean the tip of the optical contact.
2. When the turning stops, forcedly pull out the
remover in the straight line.
Note
The alignment sleeve can be removed/reinstalled
with the sleeve itself attached to the tip of the
remover.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 5 Optical Fiber Connector and Cable 64
Great care should be taken so as not to lose or
damage the alignment sleeve.
(Alignment sleeve: Sony P/N 9-980-074-01)
5
Alignment sleeve
3. Clean the tip of the white optical contacts with a
cotton swab moistened with alcohol.
Optical contacts (white)
4. Insert the remover with the alignment sleeve
attached to its tip, and push it until it clicks.
5. Rotate the remover counterclockwise to install the
alignment sleeve, and extract the remover.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 5 Optical Fiber Connector and Cable 65
The following are two quick setting guides for the HDC- experience is required or for unmanned, robotic
6
900 Series: Case-1 and Case-2. The former is mainly
for applications where minimal camera operational
control operations. The latter is for general operations.
6-1. Case 1 — for situations requiring minimal camera operator
experience
1. One-touch power on
4. Scene files
Use the main switch of the power supply to turn on/off
the whole system rather than using the power on/off
switches on the individual devices for operating
convenience.
Recall desired scene files that will be used. It is very
efficient to use the scene files for patternized weather
forecasts or special corner inserts in news programs.
5. End
2. Stable time
Just turn off the main switch of the power supply.
Normally, a camera system can be used to start
shooting within a few seconds after power is turned on.
If the camera is connected in a large system
environment, it may require a little more time especially
for System Locking after the power is turned on.
System components that need continual system
stability, such as a sync-generator, should be in round-
the-clock operation in case it is needed to respond to
an emergency broadcasting condition.
Notes
• Prepare reference files beforehand if necessary,
otherwise the factory set files will be stored.
• Make a scene file for every corner and file them.
• Use the main switch of the power supply to turn on/
off the camera system. Setting Color Mode or Test
Mode is not recommended because it will lengthen
the set up process time. Also, lens close is not
necessary for CCD cameras.
3. Setup
Usually, this kind of operation works well. So a
system check or adjustment once every 3 to 6
months should suffice.
Store all the data for standard camera status on a
Reference file so the camera system can be operated
under a standard condition previously set just by
pressing the Standard button.
6-2. Case 2 — for general operations
1. One-touch power on
room temperature in a dark area because it is
painted with a specific pigment that may be
altered depending on its storage environment.
(2) Monitor adjustment - Perform the adjustment by
using the calibrations on the waveform monitor
and picture monitor.
(3) Color bar adjustment - Precisely adjust the
color bar level and black balance of each
camera to the same level.
(4) Gray scale adjustment - Make the R/G/B levels
be consistent with each other from black level
to white level by shooting a gray scale.
(5) In case the black balance is out of line - Check
the black balance at the time of lens close
whether it is in line or not. If not, execute Auto
Black, or adjust the R/G/B BLK to the same
level between each signal.
(6) Open the IRIS and adjust the white level to
100%. Execute Auto White or adjust RGB WHT
to make the R/G/B levels be consistent with
each other.
(7) Perform Gamma level adjustment when the
gray scale cross-point level is out of line.
(8) Perform Flare adjustment when the gray scale's
darkest level has a level difference in the low
frequency area. Even if the level difference is
around 1 to 2 stop iris in the Flare adjustment,
perform a fine adjustment to minimize the
difference. Be sure to repeat the adjustments
because the adjusted items affect each other
subtlety when using a gray scale for
Turn on the power for the whole camera system using
the main switch of the power supply for system
stability.
2. Camera head connection
(1) When the CCU has already been connected to
the camera head, do the heat run for 10 to 30
minutes.
(2) When the camera head connection needs to be
changed, turn off the HEAD POWER through
the CCU or RCP.
(3) Check the cable indicator on the CCU. If the
light of the indicator goes off, then you can turn
on the camera power.
(4) Turn the camera power off using the POWER
SW on the camera head side when changing
the accessories such as a lens or viewfinder.
3. Camera adjustment
(1) Press the STANDARD button to clear the data
from the last shooting, or execute Auto Setup.
(2) Perform auto white balance using a gray scale
or standard white chart.
(When shooting the scale or chart, use the
same lighting equipment that will be used for
program shooting. Be sure to direct light on the
scale or chart uniformly under standard
illumination that will be used in the studio
because it will affect the shading adjustment)
4. Keep all the cameras at the same level by
adjusting the IRIS and MASTER PED. Usually,
this step can be skipped over if the initial setting
is accurate.
fundamental adjustment.
(9) Shading adjustment - Sometimes the R/G/B
levels are not consistent with each other even
after a gray scale adjustment. This occurs when
the shading adjustment is not sufficient or when
a lens is changed.
5. Precise camera adjustment
(1) Previous check - Check the gray scale for any
stains, spots, cracks, or imperfections. It is
recommended to change the scale every 3 to 6
months. Be sure to keep the scale at normal
[1] Preparation beforehand - A total white
pattern or an integrating spherical pattern
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings 67
box. For this adjustment, a White Chart
exposed to a uniform light is also needed.
[2] Black shading - Execute AUTO BLK
SHADING for the models that have this
function. For manual adjustment, adjust in
12 (3 x 2 x 2) different combinations: R/G/B
channels (3), vertical (V) and horizontal (H)
(2) for each of them, SAW wave, and PARA
wave (2).
[3] White shading - Select a lens file. V-SAW in
white shading changes according to the
exit pupil of the lens. The exit pupil also
changes according to the zoom position
when using a zoom lens. The change
caused by the exit pupil appears on the G-
channel. For that, a MOD V SAW
6. Color matching between the cameras
6
Even after making the above camera adjustments
(Steps 5-(1) to 5-(9)), there still might be a very small
difference between the cameras. This difference is so
slight that it can usually be ignored. However, if it is
desired to make a closer match, then please proceed
as follows: Choose a camera as a standard reference
and adjust the levels of black, gamma and flare detail
of the other cameras to match those of the camera
chosen as the reference standard.
Notes
Be sure to situate each camera as close as possible to
each other because the reflected light changes
depending on the angle of reflection even when
shooting the same chart. There are always some
variances between different-model lenses. Fine
adjustment is needed even between the same model
lenses because the correction value cannot be the
same.
adjustment should be carried out.
Sometimes the color matching between the
cameras may still not be in line even after a
gray scale adjustment. In most cases, this
is because the white shading is out of line.
6-3. Initial Settings for the Control System
For a system using the MSU-700A/750, you need to set
parameters for control of your system from the MSU-
700A/750 as well as the operating conditions of the
MSU-700A/750. The MSU-700A/750 has an Engineer
Mode, which allows you to assign cameras to be
controlled from the MSU-700A/750 and to limit the
operations on the MSU-700A/750. To authorize
specific persons to use this Engineer Mode, specify a
security code in advance. Once the security code is
set, the MSU-700A/750 will enter into the Engineer
Mode when this security code is input.
The MSU Configuration Menu appears.
Exit
MSU Configuration
MSU
Adjusting
MSU SW
Set
Date /
Time
Security
6-3-1 Specifying the Security Code
You can set, change, or delete the security code for
entering into the Engineer Mode as follows:
3. Press [Security].
The Security Menu display appears.
6-3-1-1 To set a new security code
Menu operation block (Example:MSU-700A)
Exit
Security Menu
Configuration Menu
MODE
Configuration Menu
Camera
CNU
CCU
MSU
Engineer Mode
MULTI
CARD
2
1
CONFIG
MAINTENANCE
FILE
4. Press [Engineer Mode] to set it to inverse video.
The Security Menu items now appear.
PAINT
Exit
Security Menu
Note
At the factory the unit is set in a mode in which no
security code is used. To use a security code, it is
necessary to enable the use of a security code. See
"To enable to cancel the security code"
Engineer Mode
Code
Status
Change
1. Press and light the CONFIG button.
The configuration menu appears on the display.
Engineer Mode
2. Press [MSU].
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings 68
5. Press [Code Change].
Note
6
The numeric keys and field for entering a New Code
No. are displayed.
Each digit you input will be displayed as an
asterisk. Security menu items now appear.
Code Change
Exit
Exit
Security Menu
78 9
New Code
Engineer Mode
No:
Code
Status
Status
4 5 6
1 2 3
Change
Engineer Mode
0
OK
Cancel
6. Enter the desired code (1 to 8 digits) using the
numeric keys, then press [OK].
Note
4. Press [Code Change].
The numeric keys and field - for entering the Old
Code No. are displayed.
Each digit you input will be displayed in an asterisk.
The message "Retype New Code No." is then
displayed.
Code Change
Old Code No:
7. Enter the same code you entered in step 5 once
again, then press [OK].
7 8 9
The security menu is restored.
4 5 6
1 2 3
0
8. Press [Exit].
The specific security code is now registered. When
you next press [Engineer Mode] on the security
menu, the numeric keys appear and the code input
is required. The MSU-700A/750 will enter the
Engineer Mode, if you enter the code properly and
press [OK].
OK
Cancel
5. Enter the old code, then press [OK].
6-3-1-2 To change the security code
When the registered security code must be changed,
proceed as follows.
The field for entering a New Code No. now appears.
Code Change
Old Code No:
1. Display the security menu items by following steps
1 through 3 of the above procedure for setting a
new code.
********
7 8 9
New Code
No:
2. Press [Engineer Mode].
4 5 6
The numeric keys and field for entering the Code
No. are displayed.
1 2 3
0
Engineer Mode
Code No:
OK
Cancel
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0
6. Specify a New Code No. by following steps 6
through 8 of the previous procedure.
6-3-1-3 To enable to cancel the security code
To use a security code while in the Engineer Mode, it
is necessary to set the unit in a mode to use the
security code. If the operator forgets the security code,
or if an adjustment while in the Engineer Mode
becomes necessary in an emergency when the
authorized operator is absent, the security code can
be canceled by the following procedure:
OK
Cancel
3. Enter the old security code using the numeric keys,
then press [OK].
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings 69
1. Turn on the power to the MSU-700A/750 while
holding PARA, PANELACTIVE, and camera select
buttons pressed.
Operation
Proceed as follows:
6
Menu operation block(Example:MSU-700A)
Configuration Menu
PARA button
MSU-700A
WAVEFORM MONITOR
CC
PARA
MULTI
MODE
TALLY
PANEL
ACTIVE
Configuration Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
EXPAND
Camera
CNU
CCU
MSU
MULTI
CARD
Camera select button 1
PANEL ACTIVE button
2
1
CONFIG
MAINTENANCE
FILE
PARA button
MSU-750
PANEL ACTIVE
button
PAINT
PANEL PARA EXPAND
ACTIVE
MULTI
TALLY
1. Press to light the CONFIG button.
0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 1 1 1 2
2. Press [MSU]. The MSU Configuration Menu
appears.
MULTI
TALLY
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6
Exit
MSU Configuration
Camera select
button 1
MSU
Adjusting
MSU SW
Set
The numeric keys appear on the display.
2. Press the [0] [3] [5] [9] of the numeric keys to enter
"0359" in the field for entering the security code,
then press [OK].
Date /
Time
Security
The Engineer Protection display now appears.
Exit
Engineer Protection
3. Press [Security]. The Security Menu display
Protection
appears.
Code
Enable
Exit
Security Menu
Code
Delete
3. To delete the security code, press [Code Delete].
To temporally disable the security code, press
[Code Enable] to change it from inverse video to
unhighlighted display. (Once you press it again to
return it to inverse video, the security code is
enabled.)
Engineer Mode
4. Press [Engineer Mode] to set it to inverse video.
The numeric keys and field for entering the Code
No. are displayed.
4. As the message "Code Delete, OK?" is displayed, if
you press [Code Delete] in step 3, press [OK] to
return to the Engineer Protection display.
5. Press [Exit].
Engineer Mode
Note
Code No:
At the factory, the unit is set in a mode in which no
security code is used.
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0
6-3-2 Setting the Security Status
You can limit the control functions of the MSU-700A/
750 when required. The status setting is enabled in the
Engineer Mode.
OK
Cancel
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings 70
5. Enter the security code using the numeric keys,
then press [OK].
Operation
Proceed as follows:
6
Note
Configuration Menu
Each digit you input will be displayed as an
asterisk. The Security Menu items now appear.
MODE
Configuration Menu
Exit
Security Menu
Camera
CNU
CCU
MSU
MULTI
CARD
Engineer Mode
Code
Status
2
Change
1
CONFIGURATION
MAINTENANCE
FILE
Engineer Mode
PAINT
(Example:MSU-700A)
6. Press [Status]. The display changes to the Security
1. Press to light the CONFIG button on the menu
control block to call the Configuration menu on the
display.
Status setting display.
Exit
Security Status
2. Press [CNU].
The CNU Configuration menu appears.
Engineer Mode
CNU Configuration menu
Ref.
Enable
Lens
OHB
Enable
Enable
Exit
CNU Configuration
Engineer Mode
Engineer Mode
MSU
Assign
RCP
Assign
View
Mode
Paint
Only
Full Lock
7. Setting the status for control from the MSU-700A/
750.
[Ref. Enable]: Set it to inverse video to enable the
setting in the reference file (Factory setting: ON).
[Lens Enable]: Set it to inverse video to enable the
setting in the lens file (Factory setting: ON).
[OHB Enable]: Set it to inverse video to enable the
setting in the OHB file (Factory setting: ON).
[Full Lock]: Set it to inverse video to fully disable
the MSU-700A/750 (Factory setting: OFF)
[View Mode]: Set it to inverse video to disable all
operations from the MSU-700A/750 other than
data reference (Factory setting: OFF). (Only the
display and indicators will be active. Any setting
and adjustment will be disabled.)
Note
The item [MSU Assign] is displayed only when the
Engineer Mode is active.
3. Press [MSU Assign].
The MSU Assignment menu now appears.
Simultaneously, the character display of the CNU-
700 changes to the MSU Assignment mode. Using
the four arrow buttons on the MSU Assignment
menu (MSU-700A/750), move the cursor on the
character display of the CNU-700 to the point
where you wish to change the assignment.
[Paint Only]: Set it to inverse video to enable the
paint control only (Factory setting: OFF).
MSU Assignment menu
8. When the status settings are completed, press
[Exit].
Exit
MSU Assignment
The Security menu display in step 5 is restored.
9. Press [Engineer Mode] to exit the Engineer Mode.
The statuses specified in step 7 become valid.
Note
Set
All operations are enabled in the Engineer Mode
regardless of the above status settings.
Cancel
6-3-3 MSU Assignment
You can assign specific units among the cameras in
the same system to be selected or controlled from the
MSU-700A/750. The MSU assignment is to be made,
for example, to assign cameras to each MSU-700A/
750 when multiple MSU-700A/750 units are used in the
same system. This assignment operation is enabled in
the Engineer Mode. Turn on the CONFIG/MSU/
SECURITY/ENGINEER Mode to activate the Engineer
Mode.
Default
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings 71
mode cannot be selected anymore. If this occurs,
change the MSU assignment as described in "To
restore operations of the MSU-700A/750" on the
next page.
To resume the initial assignment
Press [Default] on the MSU Assignment menu.
6
Character display of the CNU-700 (in MSU Assignment mode)
MSU assignment
SUPERVISER MSU mode
OFF
7. When your settings are completed, press [Set] on
the MSU Assignment menu with the cursor on [Ret]
in the upper right of the CNU character display. (To
cancel the settings, press [Cancel].)
LOCAL MSU mode
ON
1 - 6
7 - 12
CAMERA SELECT
/ACTIVE assignment
NEXT
– – – –
– – – –
– – – –
The character display of the CNU-700 returns to its
previous status (MSU Assignment display).
In SUPERVISER MSU mode, perform the settings
for the cameras of other groups in the same
manner.
When the MSU assignment is completed
Press [Exit] on the MSU Assignment menu.
4. Select the control mode.
SUPERVISER MSU mode: To control the cameras
connected to the entire CNU (Camera Network
Unit) in the same system.
6-3-3-1 To restore operations of the MSU-
700A/750
LOCALMSU mode: To control the cameras
connected to only the CNU (Camera Network
Unit) connected to the MSU-700A/750 being
operated.
Selection can be linked between the camera select
buttons on the MSU-700A/750 and the HD router
(MP-1007) and routing switcher (DVS-V1201). In
this case, 9-pin cables are needed to connect
between the MP-1007 and DVS-V1201.
Move the cursor to the mode in OFF status and
press [Set] on the MSU Assignment menu to switch
between modes. When the SUPERVISER mode is
active, you can select the setting display for each
camera group in the same system from the lower
rows on the character display of the CNU-700.
If the MSU-700A/750 has become inoperative by
disabling the selection/control for all the connected
cameras, change the MSU assignment using the
internal switches of the CNU-700 as follows:
MODE
CHARACTER
PHASE
+5
AT
UP DOWN SET CANCEL
SET/CANCEL switch
UP/DOWN switch
MODE switch
1. Set the MODE switch to 3.
The message "MSU Assignment" appears on the
screen.
5. Select the camera group to be set.
In LOCAL MSU mode, only the group of cameras 1
through 12 (standard) can be selected. Pressing
[Set] on the MSU Assignment menu with the cursor
on [NEXT] calls up the setting display for the
selected camera group.
2. Push the SET/CANCEL switch (S6) toward SET.
The same MSU Assignment display as that in step
3 on the previous page appears. Each press of the
UP/DOWN switch (S5) toward DOWN moves the
cursor on the display to the right, or down when it
reaches the right edge of the frame. Each press of
the switch toward UP moves the cursor to the left,
or up when it reaches the left edge of the frame.
Example: Setting display in LOCAL MSU mode
[
]
MSU assignment LOCAL
Ret
3. Move the cursor to the desired position, then push
the SET/CANCEL switch (S6) toward SET.
Camera Select
Active/Para
Camera Select
Active/Para
1CAM
2CAM
7CAM
8CAM
9CAM
10CAM
11CAM
12CAM
Camera Select
Active/Para
Camera Select
Active/Para
4. Repeatedly push the UP/DOWN switch (S5) toward
UP until the cursor reaches the SAVE position
outside the frame.
Camera Select
Active/Para
Camera Select
Active/Para
3CAM
4CAM
5CAM
6CAM
Camera Select
Active/Para
Camera Select
Active/Para
5. Push the SET/CANCEL switch (S6) towards SET.
The assignment set in steps 3 and 4 is written to
nonvolatile memory.
Camera Select
Active/Para
Camera Select
Active/Para
Camera Select
Active/Para
Camera Select
Active/Para
6. Return the MODE switch to 0.
6-3-4 Setting the Operating Conditions
6. Select the control functions for each camera.
Camera Select: Selection by the corresponding
camera select button on the MSU-700A/750
Active/Para: Control from the MSU-700A/750 in
Panel Active/Parallel mode.
of the MSU
By using the MSU Configuration menu you can also set
the built-in clock of the MSU-700A/750 and adjust
various conditions of the MSU-700A/750, such as the
sound volume of the warning buzzer and the
brightness of the lamp and EL display.
Each item is on (selection/control enabled) when
the characters are shown in black, and off
(selection/control disabled) when the characters
are shown in white. Each time [Set] is pressed on
the MSU Assignment menu with the cursor on the
item turns it on or off.
Caution
Be sure to enable the camera selection for at least
one camera. If selection/control is disabled for all
the connected cameras, the MSU-700A/750
becomes inoperative and the MSU Assignment
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings 72
(2) Set the Year, Month, and Day with the left three
control knobs.
(3) Press [Set].
The set date becomes valid. To restore the previous
setting, press [Cancel] instead of [Set]. Date/Time
Set Exit
6-3-4-1 To display the MSU Configuration menu
6
Configuration Menu
MODE
Configuration Menu
3. To set the time:
Camera
CNU
CCU
MSU
(1) Press [Time].
MULTI
CARD
2
Exit
Date/Time Set
1
CONFIG
MAINTENANCE
FILE
1998/7/1
(
)
WED
11:47:51
PAINT
(Example:MSU-700A)
Date
Hour
Time
Minute
Set
Second
Cancel
1. Press to light the CONFIG button.
The Configuration Menu appears on the display.
11
47
51
2. Press [MSU].
The MSU Configuration menu appears.
(2) Set the Hour, Minute, and Second with the left
three controls.
Exit
(3) Press [Set] in synchronization with a time
signal.
MSU Configuration
The set time becomes valid. To resume the
previous setting, press [Cancel] in place of [Set].
MSU
MSU SW
Set
Adjusting
When the clock setting is completed
Press [Exit] to leave this menu.
Date /
Time
Security
6-3-4-3 To adjust the buzzer sound
A buzzer sounds on the MSU-700A/750 when it
receives a call signal or when a panel control is
operated. When required, you may turn on/off the
buzzer or adjust the sound volume. To adjust the
buzzer, proceed as follows:
6-3-4-2 To set the built-in clock
The MSU-700A/750 has a built-in clock to record the
date and time when reference and scene files are
saved to IC memory cards. To set the clock, proceed
as follows.
1. Press [MSU Adjusting] on the MSU Configuration
menu.
The MSU adjustment menu appears.
1. Press [Date/Time] on the MSU Configuration menu.
The current setting is displayed on the Data/Time
Set menu.
Clear
Exit
Auto Iris
EL Bright
1
1
LED
Bright
LED Disp
Bright
Exit
Date/Time Set
Buzzer
1998/7/1
(
)
WED
11:47:00
Date
Time
Note
[LED Disp Bright] is displayed with the MSU-750
only.
2. Press [Buzzer] to set it to inverse video.
The lower half of the display becomes the Buzzer
Volume Level adjustment display.
2. To set the date:
(1) Press [Date] to set it to inverse video.
Exit
Clear
Home
Date/Time Set
1
1
1999/7/1
LED
Bright
LED Disp
EL Bright
Bright
Buzzer
(
)
WED
11:47:27
Buzzer Volume Level
Call
Buzzer
Touch
Click
Switch
Click
Date
Year
Time
Month
Set
Cancel
All Off
Day
Call
Touch
Switch
Master
1998
7
1
30
85
68
66
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings 73
3. Adjust the levels with the three control knobs.
Call: Sound volume of the buzzer when a call signal
is received
1. Press [MSU Adjusting] on the MSU Configuration
6
menu to display the MSU Adjustment menu.
2. Press [EL Bright] to set it to inverse video. The
lower half of the display becomes the EL Display
adjustment display.
Touch: Sound volume of the buzzer when a button
displayed on the menu display is operated
Switch: Sound volume of the buzzer when a button
on the panel is operated. The master volume can
be adjusted with the rightmost control knob.
Clear
Home
6-3-4-4 To turn on/off the buzzers
independently
1
1
LED Disp
Bright
LED
Buzzer
EL Bright
Press the corresponding button. When it is in inverse
video, the buzzer is on.
Bright
EL Display Brightness
[Call Buzzer]: For the buzzer sound when a call signal
is received
[Touch Click]: For the buzzer sound when a button
displayed on the menu display is operated
[Switch Click]: For the buzzer sound when a button on
the panel is operated
Level
50
3. Adjust the brightness with the leftmost control knob.
6-3-4-5 To turn off all the buzzers
Press [All Off].
When the adjustment is completed
Press [Home] to return to the MSU adjustment menu,
and press [Exit] to leave this menu.
When the adjustment is completed
Press [Home] to return to the MSU adjustment menu,
and press [Exit] to release the menu operation.
6-3-4-8 To adjust the brightness of the LED
displays (MSU-750 only)
6-3-4-6 To adjust the brightness of the LEDs
You can adjust the brightness of the LEDs of the panel
buttons and camera number/tally indication window.
To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows.
You can adjust the brightness of the LED displays
(camera number indicators) on the control panel. To
adjust the brightness, proceed as follows.
1. Press [MSU Adjusting] on the MSU Configuration
1. Press [MSU Adjusting] on the MSU Configuration
menu to display the MSU Adjustment menu.
menu to display the MSU adjustment menu.
2. Press [LED Disp Bright] to set it to inverse video.
The lower half of the display becomes the LED
Display Brightness adjustment display.
2. Press [LED Bright] to set it to inverse video. The
lower half of the display becomes the LED
Brightness adjustment display.
Clear
Home
Clear
Home
1
1
1
1
LED Disp
Bright
LED
Bright
LED
Bright
LED Disp
Bright
Buzzer
EL Bright
Buzzer
EL Bright
LED Display Brightness
LED Brightness
Level
Switch
Tally
Other LED
Master
50
72
78
93
78
3. Adjust the brightness with the leftmost control knob.
3. Adjust the brightness with the three corresponding
control knobs.
When the adjustment is completed
Press [Home] to return to the MSU adjustment menu,
and press [Exit] to leave this menu.
Switch: Brightness of the built-in LEDs of the
control buttons
Tally: Brightness of the built-in LEDs of the camera
number/tally indication window
Other LED: Brightness of the other LED indicator,
such as those of the camera select block and the
ACCESS indicator
6-3-4-9 To set the screen saver
The screen saver can be activated to protect the menu
display when the MSU-700A/750 is not operated for a
certain time. The screen saver can be turned on and
off as required, and the time to activate it can be
adjusted. To set the screen saver, proceed as follows.
The master brightness can be adjusted with the
rightmost control knob.
When the adjustment is completed
Press [Home] to return to the MSU adjustment menu,
and press [Exit] to release the menu operation.
6-3-4-7 To adjust the brightness of the EL
display
You can adjust the brightness of the display of the
menu control block. To adjust the brightness, proceed
as follows.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings 74
1. Press [MSU SW Set] on the MSU Configuration
menu.
Note
6
The Test SW Mode Setting area is displayed with
the MSU-750 only.
The MSU SW Setting display appears.
2. Press [ON] to set it to inverse video to activate the
screen saver.
Exit
MSU SW Setting
3. When the screen saver is turned on, set the wait
time (in units of minutes) until it activates by
pressing f or F.
PIX/WF
All Mode
PIX/WF
Syncro
PIX/WF Control
Mode
Alter-
Direct
ON
ON
nate
When the adjustment is completed
Press [Exit] to leave this menu.
Screen Saver
Test SW Mode
Wait
Time
Saw
3 Step
10 Step
5
[min]
ON
Screen saver setting area
6-4. File Structure
The HDC-900 is able to store adjustment data in
memory in the form of files. There are six types of files,
for different purposes:
(4) Reference File
Stores the custom paint data adjusted by the video
engineer. This file is stored in the camera and Memory
Stick media card.
(1) Operator File
Stores the items displayed on the viewfinder and
switch settings for the camera operator. This file is
stored in the Memory Stick media card, yet the video
data (paint data) cannot be stored.
(5) Lens File
Used for compensation of the deviation which
generates by switching the lens extender from OFF to
ON and for compensation of the difference in the
characteristics between lenses. This file is stored in the
camera.
(2) Preset Operator File
Stores the standard state of operator file items.
This file is stored in the camera, yet video data (paint
data) cannot be stored.
(6) OHB File
Used for adjustment of the CCD block maintenance.
This file is stored in the camera.
(3) Scene File
Stores the temporary video setting data according to
the scene. This file is stored in the camera and Memory
Stick media card.
Table 6-1:Structure of Paint Related Files
Scene File
Refer to "File Items".
When STANDARD
is executed.
Lens File
When lens extender setting is OFF, Flare R/G/B and
V Modulation Shading R/G/B/Master can be stored.
When lens extender setting is ON, White R/B, Flare R/G/B and
V Modulation Shading R/G/B/Master can be stored.
Output to
hardware*
Reference File
Refer to "File Items".
OHB File
R/G/B for each White Shading H SAW, H PARA,
V SAW, VPARA can be stored.
R/G/B for each Black Shading H SAW, H PARA, V SAW, and
V PARA can be stored.
Factory-set value 0
And OHB matrix and the ND offset can be stored.
* The additional data of each file is sent to each circuit on the
unit.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 6 A Quick Lesson on Camera Settings 75
7-1. HDC-900, HD Color Video Camera
7
7-1-1 Right Side and Left Side Panels
1 Up tally lamp
2 Safety lock
Right side
3 Camera number plate
1
4 Side panel lock screw
5 Lens lock and knob
7 Accessory bracket
6 Cable clamp
8 AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors
qh DC OUT connector
9 AUDIO IN switch
qf RET CONTROL connector
qg TRACKER connector
qd REMOTE connector
0 Microphone power switch
For feture use
qa PROMPTER connector
qs TEST OUT connector
1 Up tally lamp
2 Safety lock
3 Camera number plate
Left side
1
4 Side panel lock screw
5 Lens lock and knob
7 Accessory bracket
6 Cable clamp
qj CCU connector
qk DC IN connector
ql AC OUT connector
wa HD SERIAL OUT connector
w; VTR connector
a Up tally lamp
c Camera number plate
Lights when the camera receives a red tally signal.
When the CALL button on the MSU-700A/750 Master
Setup Unit or the RCP-700 series Remote Control
Panel is pressed, the lamp lights if previously off or
goes off if previously on. The brightness of the lamp
may be adjusted using the menu. Setting the UP
TALLY switch on the rear panel to OFF will keep the
lamp from lighting. Attach a supplied number plate (0
through 9) to display the camera number.
Attach a light gray number plate (supplied) to display
the camera number.
d Side panel lock screws
These screws secure the side panel. Turn clockwise
until tight to lock the panel.
e Lens lock and knob
These lock the lens. To attach or remove a lens, turn
the knob counterclockwise until the lens lock is
horizontal. To secure the lens, turn the knob clockwise
until the lens lock is vertical.
b Safety lock
Locks the side panel to prevent accidental opening. To
open the side panel, loosen the side panel lock
screws, slide the safety lock toward the lens and open
the panel. The side panel locks automatically when
closed.
Note
To attach a large lens, remove the pin from the bayonet
mount of the lens.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 77
f Cable clamp
Used to secure the fiber optic cable. The clamp is
designed for the FC2-PD50 and FC2-PD250.
r DC IN connector (4-pin)
Connect to a DC power source (10.5 to 17 V) when
using the HDC-900 as a stand-alone unit.
7
g Accessory bracket
s AC OUT connector
Used to secure optional accessories such as the BKP- Used to supply AC power (200 VA maximum).
7911/7912 Script Holder or Focus/Zoom Demand.
t VTR connector (26-pin)
For more information on attaching an accessory, see the
accessory’s operation manual.
When using the camera in stand-alone use, a VTR can
be connected using an HDCZ cable to this connector.
In this case, however, the VTR cannot be started or
stopped from the camera.
h AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors (XLR 3-pin)
Used to input microphone or line signals.
u HD SERIAL OUT connector
i AUDIO IN switch
A serial digital interface with a transfer speed of 1.5
Gbps, this connector may be used to output a video
signal to a monitor or VTR.
Set this switch according to the device connected to
the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors.
MIC: When connecting microphones
LINE: When connecting line signal sources
j Microphone power switches
For the microphones connected to the AUDIO IN CH-
1 and CH-2 connectors, respectively.
+48 V: When the connected microphone requires an
external power source. A power of +48 V is supplied
to the microphone.
OFF: When the connected microphone requires no
external power.
Note
To supply a power of +12 V, modification of the camera
is required. For details, refer to the Installation &
Maintenance Manual. Note that the modification must
be performed by service personnel.
k PROMPTER connector (BNC type)
Used to output the signal input from the HDCU-900
Camera Control Unit’s PROMPTER INPUT connector.
l TEST OUT (test signal output) connector (BNC
type)
Used to output the signal selected by the video signal
select buttons on the rear panel. If the RET 1 or RET 2
button is pushed in, the output will be a return video
signal.
m REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Used to connect the camera to an optional MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit or RCP-700 series Remote
Control Panel, via a CCA cable. The connected unit
may then control the HDC-900.
n TRACKER connector (20-pin)
Used for communication between the camera operator
and the tracker, and also for intercom channels 1 and
2. It also supplies the up tally signal and the program
audio signal.
o RET (return video) CONTROL connector (6-pin)
This connector allows an external controller to switch
return video 1, 2, and 3, as well as turn the intercom
microphone on and off.
p DC OUT connector (4-pin)
Used to supply power (12 V, 5 W maximum) to a script
light of the BKP-7911/7912 Script Holder.
q CCU (camera control unit) connector (electro
optical multi-connector)
Connect to the CAMERA connector of the HDCU-900
Camera Control Unit using an electro-optical
composite cable. Power and video, audio, and control
signals are passed between the camera and the
control unit using just one cable.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 78
7-1-2 Rear Panel
7
e; H-POSI control
wl WIDTH control
wk V-POSI control
wj HEIGHT control
wh CURSOR ON button
wg CURSOR STORE button
wf RET 2 button
1 Video signal select buttons
wd RET 1 button
2 POWER indicator
POWER
R
G
B
RET 2
RET 1
3 ND filter selector
ws RETURN SELECT knob 2
2
3
2
3
4
4
4 CC filter selector
1
1
FILTER LOCAL
H-POSI
WIDTH
V-POSI
3
2
4
wa RETURN SELECT knob 1
1
5
MEMORY STICK
ON
5 FILTER LOCAL button
ND
w; Memory stick section
UP TALLY
ON
STORE
CURSOR
2
HEIGHT
C
B
D
A
E
1
3
6 UP TALLY switch
ql Back tally lamp
1
CC
OFF
VF SCREEN SIZE CENTER SAFETY
DISPLAY
ON
MENU SELECT
SCAN MARKER MARKER ZONE
VF DETAIL
qk CURSOR 1, 2, and
3 buttons
16:9
4:3
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
MENU
CALL
7 VF SCAN switch
CANCEL ENTER
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
qj CALL button
8 SCREEN SIZE MARKER switch
qh VF DETAIL control
9 CENTER MARKER switch
qg VF DETAIL switch
qf Assignable switch
qd MENU SELECT control
qs MENU SELECT switch
qa DISPLAY switch
q; SAFETY ZONE switch
ea VF connector
Memo clip
1
es INTERCOM 1 and 2 connectors
MIC
MIC
ON
ENG
PROD
OFF
ON
ENG
PROD
1
OFF
1
2
2
INTERCOM
PGM
INTERCOM
PGM
INTERCOM 1
INTERCOM 2
ed INTERCOM PROD/ENG switch
ef INTERCOM volume control
eg PGM 1/2 switch
ej MIC ON/OFF switch
eh PGM volume control
eg PGM 1/2 switch
eh PGM volume control
ef INTERCOM volume control
ed INTERCOM PROD/ENG switch
ej MIC ON/OFF switch
a Video signal select buttons
b POWER indicator
Select the video output signal (R, G, or B) to the
viewfinder. The R, G, and B buttons may be pressed
This indicator lights up or goes off as follows to indicate
the power supply status:
individually or in combination. The signal
Green: Power is being supplied to the HDC-900.
Red: The CAM PW button of the MSU-700A/750
Master Setup Unit or RCP-700 series Remote
Control Panel is set to OFF.
corresponding to each pressed button will be output.
When two buttons are pressed, the output of will
consist of those two signals mixed together.
The video output to the monitor connected to the TEST
OUT connector will always be the Y signal regardless
of these buttons.
Yellow: Power is being supplied to the HDC-900, but
the VF PW button of the MSU-700A/750 Master
Setup Unit or RCP-700 series Remote Control Panel
is set to OFF, and power is not being supplied to the
viewfinder.
When a color viewfinder is used:
Off: Power is not being supplied to the HDC-900.
• When all three buttons are pressed, the output to the
viewfinder and monitor will be the Y signal.
• When no button is pressed, the output to the
viewfinder will be the color signals and to the monitor
will be the Y signal.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 79
c ND filter selector
When the FILTER LOCAL button is lit up, this selector
may be used to select an ND filter.
Operation menu, the size of the displayed frame
may also be set to 80%, 92.5%, or 95% of the picture
area.
7
OFF: The safety zone will not be displayed.
Selector position
Selected filter
k DISPLAY switch
1
2
3
4
5
Clear
The functions of the DISPLAY switch are as follows:
ON: Text and messages describing the camera
settings and operating status may be displayed on
the viewfinder screen.
OFF: Status messages will not appear on the
viewfinder screen.
1/4ND
1/8ND
1/16ND
1/64ND
MENU: Menus for camera settings will be displayed on
the viewfinder screen.
d CC (color temperature conversion) filter
selector
When the FILTER LOCAL button is lit up, this selector
may be used to select a color temperature conversion
filter appropriate to the light source illuminating the
subject.
l MENU SELECT switch
The functions of the MENU SELECT switch are as
follows:
ENTER: Confirm the menu or page selected using the
MENU SELECT control, or confirm setting values.
CANCEL: Cancel menu setting values or return to
page select mode or the top menu.
Selector position
Selected filter
Cross filter
A
B
C
D
E
3200K (clear)
4300K
m MENU SELECT control
Used to select menu items or change setting values in
the menus displayed on the viewfinder screen.
6300K
8000K
n Assignable switch
You can assign a function, such as lens extender ON/
OFF, using the OPERATION menu.
e FILTER LOCAL (filter local control) button
Pressing this button enables selection of a color
temperature conversion filter or ND filter using the CC
filter selector and ND filter selector. Pressing the
button again gives control of the filters to the MSU-
700A/750 Master Setup Unit or RCP-700 series
Remote Control Panel.
o VF DETAIL (viewfinder detail adjustment) switch
ON: Emphasizes the contours of the image on the
viewfinder screen. When the switch is set to this
position, you can adjust the amount of detail using
the VF DETAIL control.
OFF: Disables contour emphasis.
f UP TALLY switch
Set whether or not the camera’s Up Tally lamp and the
lens’ tally lamp will light when the camera receives a
red tally signal.
ON: The tally lamps will light.
OFF: The tally lamps will not light.
p VF DETAIL (viewfinder detail) control
Adjust the amount of detail of the picture on the
viewfinder screen when the VF DETAIL switch is set to
ON. This has no effect on the output signal of the
camera.
Note
g VF (viewfinder) SCAN switch
The viewfinder detail control function has no effect on
a return video signal.
Used to control the viewfinder screen display.
16:9: To set the viewfinder display to 16:9 aspect ratio.
4:3: To set the viewfinder display to 4:3 aspect ratio.
q CALL button
• Press to call the operator of the HDCU-900 Camera
Control Unit, the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit,
or the RCP-700 series Remote Control Panel. When
pressed, the camera’s red tally lamp will light up if
previously off, and turn off if previously on. The CALL
button on the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit or
RCP-700 series Remote Control Panel will light up,
and their buzzer will sound.
h SCREEN SIZE MARKER switch
Used to control the display of the screen size marker
as follows:
ON ( ): Areas outside the specified ratio area will be
darkened.
ON ( ): The screen size marker (white lines) will be
displayed.
OFF: The screen size marker will not be displayed.
• When the CALL button on the RCP-700 series
Remote Control Panel or the MSU-700A/750 is
pressed, this button will light up.
i CENTER MARKER switch
Used to control the display of the center marker as
follows:
r CURSOR (cursor memory) 1, 2, and 3 buttons
Used to store the size and position of the box cursor
displayed on the viewfinder screen. Three different
box cursor settings may be stored in memory using
buttons 1, 2, and 3. Pressing one of these buttons will
cause a cursor of the stored size to be displayed in the
stored position.
ON: A marker indicating the center of the picture area
will be displayed on the viewfinder screen. The
position of the center marker may be adjusted for
the lens being used. The adjusted position may be
stored in a lens file.
OFF: The center marker will not be displayed.
Note
j SAFETY ZONE switch
When one of the CURSOR buttons is lit up, the HPOSI,
V-POSI, WIDTH, and HEIGHT buttons will be disabled.
Used to control the display of the safety zone marker
as follows:
ON: A frame marking 90% of the picture area (the
safety zone) will be displayed on the viewfinder
screen. Using the Marker Settings page in the
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 80
s Back tally lamp
e; H-POSI (horizontal position) control
Adjust the horizontal position of the box cursor
displayed on the viewfinder screen within the effective
resolution area
7
This lamp lights red when the red tally signal is
supplied. When the CALL button on the MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit or the RCP-700 series Remote
Control Panel is pressed, the lamp lights if previously
off or goes off if previously on. The brightness of the
lamp may be adjusted using a control provided in the
camera.
Attach a supplied number plate (0 through 9) to
display the camera number. Lights green when the
green tally signal is supplied.
ea VF (viewfinder) connector (D-sub 25-pin)
Connect to the viewfinder CAMERA connector.
es INTERCOM 1 and 2 connectors (XLR 5-pin)
• Connects to an XLR 5-pin headset. The INTERCOM
1 connector may be used for communications even
when the power to the camera is turned off by the
HDCU-900 Camera Control Unit. Installing the BKP-
7913 RTS Intercom System Kit (option) allows the
INTERCOM 2 connector to work with an RTS
intercom system, and be connected to up to two
channel devices.
t Memory Stick media card section
Insert a Memory Stick media card into the slot. The
lamp lights while writing or reading data to/from a
Memory Stick media card.
u RETURN SELECT knob 1
• These connectors may also be used for monitoring a
VTR playback audio signal when the HDC-900 is
used as a stand-alone unit.
This knob selects from the four return signals from the
CCU. By pressing in the RET 1 button, you can view
the selected return video signal in the viewfinder.
ed INTERCOM PROD/ENG (intercom producer/
engineer line select) switch
v RETURN SELECT knob 2
This knob selects from the four return signals from the
CCU. By pressing in the RET 2 button, you can view
the selected return video signal in the viewfinder.
Used to switch intercom channel 1 or 2 between
producer and engineer lines.
PROD: Use the producer line.
ENG: Use the engineer line.
w RET 1 button
By pressing in this button, you can view the return
video signal selected by the RETURN SELECT knob 1,
in the viewfinder. Pressing this button again will switch
the viewfinder screen display and MONITOR output
back to the camera’s video signal.
ef INTERCOM volume control
Adjust the intercom output level.
eg PGM 1/2 (program audio select) switch
Used to switch between program audio 1 and 2.
x RET 2 button
eh PGM (program) volume control
By pressing in this button, you can view the return
video signal selected by the RETURN SELECT knob 2,
in the viewfinder. Pressing this button again will switch
the viewfinder screen display and MONITOR output
back to the camera’s video signal.
Note
Adjust the program audio output level.
ej MIC (microphone) ON/OFF switch
Turn the headset microphone on or off.
If both the RET 1 and RET 2 buttons are pressed, RET
1 will be displayed.
y CURSOR STORE button
Press this button to store the size and position of the
box cursor in memory.
Note
If the CURSOR ON button is not lit, box cursor
information will not be stored.
z CURSOR ON button
When this button is pressed, the button will light up and
the box cursor will be displayed on the viewfinder
screen. When the button is pressed again, the light will
go off and the box cursor will disappear.
wj HEIGHT control
Adjust the height of the box cursor displayed on the
viewfinder screen within the effective resolution area.
wk V-POSI (vertical position) control
Adjust the vertical position of the box cursor displayed
on the viewfinder screen within the effective resolution
area.
wl WIDTH control
Adjust the width of the box cursor displayed on the
viewfinder screen within the effective resolution area.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 81
7-2. HDC-950/930, HD Color Video Camera
7
7-2-1 Front Right Side
1 INCOM button
2 RET 1 button
3 Y/RGB switch
4 R/G/B switch
5 ASSINABLE switch
6 FILTER control
8 CAMERA/VTR switch
9 GAIN switch
q; OUTPUT/AUTO
KNEE switch
qa WHITE BAL switch
7 AUTO W/B BAL switch
qs DISPLAY switch
qd CANCEL/STATUS switch
qf MENU SEL knob/
ENTER button
a INCOM (intercom 1) button
The intercom 1 microphone is turned ON while this
button is pressed.
Color temperature
conversion filter
ND filter
1
2
3
4
5
Clear
A
B
C
D
E
Cross filter
3200K
b RET 1 (return video 1) button
1/4ND
1/8ND
1/16ND
1/64ND
The return video 1 signal from the camera control unit
is monitored on the viewfinder screen while this button
is pressed. It is the same function as with the RET 1
buttons on the sides.
4200K
6300K
8400K
g AUTO W/B BAL (white and black balance
automatic adjustment) switch1)
Used to automatically adjust white and black balance.
WHT: Automatically adjust white balance.
BLK: Automatically adjust black balance.
c Y/RGB switch
Select the video signal output for the VF and TEST OUT
connectors.
Y: Output is the Y signal (this is the power-on default).
RGB: Output is the component video signal(s)
selected by the R/G/B switch.
h CAMERA/VTR (switch1)
Used to select control signals sent to a VTR connected
to the camera. The operation of the VTR at the start of
recording for each setting is shown in the table below.
d R/G/B (red/green/blue) switch
When the Y/RGB switch is set to RGB, select the
component video signal(s) to be provided as output to
the VF and TEST OUT connectors.
CAMERA
VTR
SAVE
Function
e ASSINABLE switch
OFF
Turn off the camera power.
You can assign a function using the OPERATION
menu.
Camera power is on. When
the VTR START button is
pressed, recording will begin
after a few seconds.
ON
ON
SAVE
STBY
f FILTER (internal filter selection) control
Used to select an internal filter appropriate for the light
source illuminating the subject.
Turn on the camera power.
When the VTR START button
is pressed, recording will
begin immediately.
i GAIN (switch1)
Used to select the gain of the video amplifier based on
lighting conditions. The gain values for the L, M, and H
settings may be set using the menus. When shipped
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 82
from the factory, the values set are L = 0 dB, M = 6 dB,
and H = 12 dB.
A or B: Selects memory A or B. When the AUTO W/B
BAL switch is set to WHT, the white balance will be
automatically adjusted according to the setting of
the FILTER control. The adjusted value will be stored
in the selected memory. Each memory can store up
to four adjusted values, for a total of 8.
When the MESSAGE setting on the VF DISPLAY page
of the OPERATION menu is set to ON, the new setting
will be displayed in the setting change/adjustment
progress message display area of the viewfinder
screen for three seconds when the setting is changed
using this switch. Example: “WHITE: Ach” or “WHITE:
PRESET”
7
When the MESSAGE setting on the VF DISPLAY page
of the OPERATION menu is set to ON, the newly
selected gain value will be displayed in the setting
change/adjustment progress message display area of
the viewfinder screen for three seconds when the gain
setting is changed using this switch.
Example
“GAIN: 12 dB”
j OUTPUT (output signal selection)/AUTO KNEE
switch1)
Used to select the signal (color bar signal or camera’s
video signal) to be used as output to a VTR, the
viewfinder, or a video monitor. When the camera’s
video signal is being used as output, the auto knee
function may be used. The relationship between the
switch setting and the output signal and auto knee
function is shown in the table below.
l DISPLAY switch
You can turn on or off the displays (safety zone marker,
center marker, text displays) and menu screens on the
viewfinder screen.
ON: Text describing the camera’s operation status will
be displayed on the viewfinder screen.
OFF: All viewfinder screen displays will be turned off.
MENU: Setup menus will be displayed on the
viewfinder screen.
AUTO
OUTPUT
Function
KNEE
BARS
OFF
Output is a color bar signal.
m CANCEL/STATUS switch
Output is the camera’s video
signal. The auto knee circuit
is disabled.
When a menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen,
pressing this button will cancel any changed setting
and return the display to the previous menu. When
menus are not displayed on the viewfinder screen,
pressing this button will display the ‘!’IND item.
CAM
CAM
OFF
ON
Output is the camea’s video
signl. The auto knee circuit is
enable.
n MENU SEL (menu select) knob/ENTER button
(rotary encoder)
Used to select settings from menus displayed on the
viewfinder screen (by rotating the knob) and to confirm
settings (by pushing the button).
k WHITE BAL (white balance memory selection)
switch1)
Used to select the white balance adjustment method,
or the memory used to store the adjusted value.
PRST (preset): White balance is adjusted to a preset
value corresponding to a color temperature of
3200K.
7-2-2 Front Left Side
5 VF connector
6 SHUTTER switch
1 TEST OUT connector
For future use
2 MIC 1 IN connector
3 RET 1 button
7 INCOM/EAR LEVEL control
8 VTR START button
4 MIC IN switch
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 83
a TEST OUT (test output) connector (BNC type)
Connect to a monitor as necessary. The output will be
the signal selected with the Y/RGB and R/G/B/
switches.
with the exclusive microphone power switch of the
AUDIO IN CH-1 connector.
7
e VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin)
Connect the viewfinder cable.
b MIC 1 IN (microphone 1 input) connector (XLR 3-
pin, female)
Connect a microphone. This connector and the AUDIO
IN CH-1 connector on the back are alternately
activated with the MIC IN switch.
f SHUTTER switch1)
OFF: An electronic shutter does not function.
ON: An electronic shutter is activated.
SEL: The shutter speed and shutter mode change
each time the switch is set to this position.
c RET 1 (return video 1) button
The return video 1 signal from the camera control unit
is monitored on the viewfinder screen while this button
is pressed. It is the same function as with the RET 1
buttons on the grip and right side.
g INCOM/EAR (intercom/earphone) LEVEL
control
To adjust the intercom/earphone volume level. The
intercom level adjustment is enabled when the INCOM
1/2 LEVEL switches on the right back panel are set to
“F.”
d MIC IN (microphone input) switch
Select either the microphone connected to the MIC 1
IN connector or that connected to the AUDIO IN CH-1
connector on the back.
+48V/FRONT: To use the microphone connected to
the MIC1 IN connector and supply a power of +48 V
to the microphone.
h VTR START (recording start/stop) button
When a VTR is connected, recording begins when this
button is pressed, and stops when it is pressed again.
This button functions the same as the VTR button on
the lens.
OFF/FRONT: To use the microphone connected to the
MIC1 IN connector without supplying a power.
REAR: To use the microphone connected to the
AUDIO IN CH-1 connector on the back. Whether or
not to supply a power to the microphone can be set
When a camera control unit is connected, the function
of this button can be changed to the RET2/INCOM1
MIC/INCOM2 MIC ON/OFF function on using the
OPERATION menu.
7-2-3 Back Left Side
1 TALLY lamp and TALLY switch
2 CCU connector
3 INCOM1 and 2
connectors
8 RET CONT
connector
9 EXT I/O connector
4 EARPHONE jack
5 TRACKER connector
q; REMOTE connector
6 GENLOCK IN/RET IN/
PROMPTER OUT
qa DC OUT connector
connector and switch
qs DC IN connector
qd HD SERIAL OUT connector
7 AUDIO IN connectors
and switches
qf VTR connector
a TALLY lamp and TALLY switch
ON: The tally lamp lights when a tally signal or a call
signal generated by pressing a CALL button is
received.
c INCOM1 and 2 (intercom 1 and 2) connectors
(XLR 5-pin)
Used for input and output of intercom audio signals.
OFF: The tally lamp is prevented from lighting.
d EARPHONE jack (minijack)
Connect an earphone or headset for output of the VTR
playback audio signal.
b CCU (Camera Control Unit) connector (optical
multi connector)
Connects to a camera control unit via an optical
electro-composite cable.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 84
e TRACKER connector (20-pin)
l DC IN (DC power supply input) connector (XLR
4-pin)
Used for connection to the AC-550/550CE AC
Adaptor, a battery etc. to supply power to the camera.
7
Used for communication between the camera operator
and tracker and for intercom 1 and 2 connection. This
also supplied the up tally and program audio signals.
The TRUNK LINE input/output signals are also
assigned.
m HD SERIAL OUT connector (BNC type)
Used for output of HD SDI serial data.
f GENLOCK IN/RET IN/PROMPTER OUT (external
gen-lock signal input/return video signal input/
prompter signal output) connector (BNC type)
and switch
n VTR connector (26-pin)
Used for connection to a VTR (such as the HDW-250)
or HDCD-50 HD Signal Distributor.
Set the switch according to the signal at the connector.
GENLOCK IN: For input of an external gen-lock signal
(valid in stand-alone use only)
RET IN: For input of the return video signal (valid in
stand-alone use only)
PROMPTER OUT: Used for output of a prompter
signal (valid only when a camera control unit is
connected)
g AUDIO IN (audio input 1, 2) connectors (BNC
type) and switches
Connect audio signals. An input select switch and
microphone power switch are provided for each
channel.
1 Input select switches
2 Microphone power switches
LINE MIC
OFF+48V LINE MIC
OFF+48V
AUDIO
IN
CH-1
CH-1
A Input select switch: Set to the appropriate
position according to the connected equipment.
LINE: When a line-level signal source is
connected
MIC: When a microphone is connected
B Microphone power switch:
When a microphone is connected, set whether
or not to supply power to the microphone.
+48V: To supply a power of +48 V
OFF: Not to supply a power
Note
To supply a power of +12 V, modification of the camera
is required. For details, refer to the Installation &
Maintenance Manual. Note that the modification must
be performed by service personnel only.
h RET CONT (return control) connector (6-pin)
Used for connection to a CAC-6 Return Video Selector.
i EXT I/O (external input and output) connector
(20-pin)
Used to supply signals, such as Y/Pb/Pr signals, to
external equipment.
j REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Used for connection to an RM-B150 Remote Control
Unit, RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel or MSU-
700A/750 Master Setup Unit.
k DC OUT (DC power supply output) connector (4-
pin)
Used to supply power to devices such as a wireless
receiver (optional).
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 85
7-2-4 Back Right Side
7
Shoulder strap fitting
3 RET 1 button
4 RET button and
select switch
5 INCOM1/2 contro
and switches
6 CALL button
1 Memory stick section
2 POWER switch
a Memory Stick media card section
A slot to accommodate a Memory Stick media card
and an eject button to remove the stick are provided
behind the panel. The eject button lights in red while
writing or reading data to/from a Memory Stick media
card.
c RET 1 (return video 1) button
The return video 1 signal from the camera control unit
is monitored on the viewfinder screen while this button
is pressed.
d RET (return video) button and select switch
When other return video systems are used in addition
to return video 1, you can monitor the signal (return
video 2, 3, or 4) selected using the selector on the
viewfinder screen while pressing the button.
Note
Note
Do not insert/remove the memory stick when the eject
button lights.
b POWER switch
CCU: Power supply will be received from the camera
control unit.
The RET 1 button has priority over the RET button if
both buttons are pressed.
EXT: Power supply will be received through the DC IN
or VTR connector.
e INCOM1 and 2 controls and switches
There are a PGM control incorporated with a select
switch, a line select switch, a LEVEL/TALK switch, and
INCOM control each for intercom lines 1 and 2.
INCOM 1
INCOM 2 (same
components as
those of INCOM 1)
PGM
PGM
PGM
PGM
1
2
1
2
1 PGM control and
select switch
PROD
ENG
PROD
2 Line select switch
INCOM INCOM
ENG
LEVEL
R
LEVEL
R
TALK
TALK
ON
ON
3 LEVEL/TALK switch
1
2
INCOM
INCOM
F
OFF
F
OFF
4 INCOM control
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 86
A PGM (program) control and switch: Adjust the
program audio reception level. Select program
1 or 2 with the switch.
B Line select switch: Select the intercom line.
PROD: Producer line
F/OFF: The intercom headset microphone is
turned off. The intercom audio reception level
is adjusted with the INCOM/EAR LEVEL
control on the front of the camera.
7
D INCOM (intercom) control: Adjusts the
intercom audio reception level.
ENG: Engineer line
C LEVEL/TALK switch:
R/ON: The intercom headset microphone is
turned on. The intercom audio reception level
is adjusted with the INCOM control.
R/OFF: The intercom headset microphone is
turned off. The intercom audio reception level
is adjusted with the INCOM control.
f CALL button
When you press this button, the red tally lamp of the
RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel or the MSU-
700A/750 Master Setup Unit, will light. Use to call the
operator of the RCP or MSU.
7-3. HDCU-900, HD Camera Control Unit
7-3-1 Front Panel
1 Red tally lamp
2 Green tally lamp
3 MIC switch
4 INTERCOM control
8 INTERCOM connector
7 CAMERA POWER switch and indicator
6 MAIN POWER switch and indicator
5 CABLE ALARM indicators
a Red tally lamp
d INTERCOM (intercom volume adjustment)
Lights when a red tally signal is received. When the
CALL button on the video camera, MSU-700A/750
Master Setup Unit, RCP-700 series Remote Control
Panel, etc. is pressed, this lamp will go out if previously
lit, and light up if previously off. A supplied number
plate may be mounted here.
control
Adjusts the intercom input level.
Note
The program audio mix volume is adjusted using the
internal AT board.
e CABLE ALARM indicators
b Green tally lamp
Lights when a green tally signal is received. A supplied
number plate may be mounted here.
SHORT (red): This indicator lights when there is a
short circuit between a power supply line and the
sheath of the optical fiber cable, or when the two
power supply lines are shorted. When this indicator
lights, the power supply is shut off.
OPEN (red): Lights when there is not a camera
connected via an optical fiber cable to the CAMERA
connector on the rear panel. It flashes to warn about
insufficient optical reception status of the optical
fiber cable.
c MIC (microphone selection) switch
Used to select the type of headphone microphone
being used, or to turn the microphone input off.
DYNAMIC: for a dynamic microphone
OFF: to turn the microphone input off
CARBON: for a carbon microphone
Note
The intercom line is selected via a switch on the
internal AT board.
f MAIN POWER switch and indicator
Turns on or off the power to the entire system,
consisting of the HDCU-900, a video camera, an RCP-
700 series Remote Control Panel connected via the
REMOTE connector, etc. Setting the switch to the " "
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 87
position turns the power on, and setting it to " " turns it
off. The indicator lights when the power supply is on.
on the remote control panel, this switch alone cannot
turn on the video camera power.
7
g CAMERA POWER switch and indicator
h INTERCOM connector (XLR 5-pin)
Connects to a headset.
Note
To use a headset with a plug other than an XLR 5-pin
plug, consult a Sony service or sales representative.
Turns on or off the power to the camera when the MAIN
POWER switch is on. Setting the switch to the " I"
position turns the power on, and setting it to "O " turns
it off. When a remote control panel is connected and
the power supply is turned off with the CAM PW button
7-3-2 Rear Panel
1 CAMERA connector
HD signal input/output block
SD signal input/output block
8 Expansion slot
2 AC IN
connector
3 Remote control connectors
4 CHARACTER OUTPUT connector
5 DIGITAL AUDIO connector
6 MIC OUTPUT connectors
7 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM connector
a CAMERA connector (optical fiber connector)
Used to connect a video camera, using an optical fiber
cable such as the FC2-PD50/PD250. All video camera
signals, including power supply, control, video, and
audio, are sent and received over one optical fiber
cable.
c Remote control connectors
1 RCP/CNU REMOTE connector
2 WF REMOTE connector
3 TRUNK LINE connector
Note
Dust on the connection surface of the optical fiber
cable may result in transmission errors. When not
connected, always cover the end with the supplied
cap.
REMOTE
TRUNK LINE
WF
RCP/CNU
I/O PORT
MIC
b AC IN (AC power supply input) connector
Use the supplied power cord to connect to an AC
power supply. The power cord may be secured to the
HDCU-900 body using the supplied plug holder.
5 I/O PORT connector
4 MIC REMOTE connector
A RCP/CNU REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Used to connect to an MSU-700A/750 Master
Setup Unit, CNU-500/700 Camera Command
Network Unit, or RCP-700 series Remote Control
Panel via a CCA-5 Connection Cable. Control
signals are sent and received via this connector.
When using an RCP-700 series unit, power is
also supplied.
B WF MODE REMOTE (waveform monitor remote)
connector (D-sub 15-pin)
Used to attach to the appropriate connector on
a waveform monitor when operating the
waveform monitor display using an MSU-700A/
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 88
750 Master Setup Unit or RCP-700 series
Remote Control Panel. Either a recall-type
monitor, or the 1730HD/1735HD Waveform
Monitor, may be connected. When using a
recall-type monitor, preset a display mode on
the waveform monitor, and then recall the mode
externally. Switches on the AT board are used to
select either recall type or 1730HD/1735HD type
operation.
Note
7
Use of a case wider than 42 mm can cause
interference at connectors 2, 4, 5. It is
recommended to use JAE-made DA-C1-J10.
d CHARACTER OUTPUT connector (BNC type)
Used to output the results of the HDCU-900 diagnostic
self-test in SD black and white analog video format.
C TRUNK LINE connector (D-sub 9-pin, RS- 232C)
Used to connect the HDCU-900 to the
TRACKER connector on an HDC-900 HD Color
Video Camera via an RS-232C interface. Used
mainly for communication with equipment on the
camera side. The RXD, TXD, RTS, and CTS
signals can be transferred at up to 19.2 kbps
using this connector.
e DIGITAL AUDIO connector (BNC type)
Used to output a digital audio signal input to the
camera.
f MIC OUTPUT (microphone output) connectors
(XLR 3-pin)
Used for output of the microphone input to the video
camera.
D MIC REMOTE (microphone remote) connector
(D-sub 15-pin)
g INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (program audio)
connector (D-sub 25-pin)
Used for input and output of intercom, tally, and
program audio signals. Connect to the intercom/tally/
program audio connector of the intercom system.
Using this connector, the video camera’s
microphone input level may be set by external
equipment such as an audio mixer, in five steps
(–60, –50, –40, –30, and –20 dB). When taping,
set the volume to a level appropriate for the
audio conditions.
h Expansion slot
E I/O PORT connector (D-sub 15-pin)
Used for remote control using an external
control device.
For installation of the optional HKCU-901 SD Analog
Interface Unit, HKCU-902 HD Analog Interface Unit,
HKCU-903 Frame Rate Converter Unit, or HKCU-904
Line Converter Unit.
7-3-3 HD Signal Input/Output Block
1 SERIAL RET INPUT 1-4 connectors
2 REFERENCE IN connectors
3 PROMPTER IN connectors
4 SERIAL OUTPUT 1-3 connectors
5 SERIAL OUTPUT MONI
connector
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
MONI
SERIAL RET INPUT
REFERENCE IN
PROMPTER IN
SERIAL OUTPUT
a SERIAL RET INPUT 1-4 (HD-SDI return video 1,
2, 3, and 4 input) connectors (BNC type)
c PROMPTER IN connectors (BNC type)
Used for prompter signal input. If loop-through output
is not used, terminate the unused connector with 75
ohms. If the signal used is a 1.0 Vp-p, 75-ohm signal,
it may be output from the video camera PROMPTER
OUT connector with a frequency bandwidth of 8 MHz,
regardless of signal format.
Four different HD-SDI return video input signals may
be received independently. The selection of RET 1, 2,
3, or 4 is made by the camera’s return switch. The type
of input signal on RET 1, 2, 3, and 4 may be set
individually using switches on the internal AT board, or
using the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit.
d SERIAL OUTPUT 1-3 (HD-SDI 1, 2, and 3 output)
connectors (BNC type)
The signal from the video camera may be output as
three HD-SDI signals.
b REFERENCE IN connectors (BNC type)
Used to input an HD tri-level reference sync signal or
SD reference sync signal (black burst signal). If loop-
through output is not used, terminate the unused
connector with 75 ohms.
e SERIAL OUTPUT MONI (HD-SDI monitor output)
connector (BNC type)
Note
To use the VBS signal of the HKCU-901 (when SC
phase lock is required), use an SD reference sync
signal (black burst signal).
The signal from the video camera may be mixed with
skin tone gate signals and some aspect marker signal
and output in HD-SDI format.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 89
7-3-4 SD Signal Input/Output Block
These connectors can be replaced with the optional
HKCU-902/903/904.
7
1 SERIAL RET INPUT 1-4 connectors
2 SYNC OUT connector
3 PIX OUT connector
4 WF OUT connector
5 WF MODE connector
6 SERIAL OUTPUT 1-4 connectors
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT
WF MODE
SERIAL RET INPUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
a SERIAL RET INPUT 1-4 (SD-SDI return video 1, 2,
3, and 4 input) connectors (BNC type)
e WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector
(4-pin)
Four different SD-SDI return video input signals may
be received independently when the system is
operating with the field frequency of 59.94/50 Hz. The
selection of RET 1, 2, 3, or 4 is made by the camera’s
return switch. The type of input signal on RET 1, 2, 3,
and 4 may be set individually using switches on the
internal AT board, or using the MSU-700A/750 Master
Setup Unit. The aspect ratio may also be selected for
SD signals.
Connect to the appropriate connector on a waveform
monitor when monitoring a signal in sequential mode.
A sequence signal will be output when the SEQ button
on the RCP-700 series Remote Control Panel is
pressed, allowing simultaneous monitoring of the R, G,
and B signals in sequential mode. (When both the RCP
and MSU are in use, this connector functions as the
output connector for RCP control.)
f SERIAL OUTPUT 1-4 (SD-SDI 1, 2, 3, and 4
output) connectors (BNC type)
When the system is operating with the field frequency
of 59.94/50 Hz, the signal from the video camera may
be down converted and output as four SD component
SDI signals.
b SYNC OUT (HD/SD sync signal output)
connector (BNC type)
Used for output of an HD tri-level sync or SD composite
sync signal from the internal sync signal generator.
(Factory setting: HD tri-level sync)
c PIX OUT (picture monitor output) connector
(BNC type)
Used for output of the picture monitor video signal
selected using the RCP-700 series Remote Control
Panel MONITOR SELECT button, or the MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit PICTURE MONITOR button.
(When both the RCP and MSU are in use, this
connector functions as the output connector for RCP
control.)
d WF OUT (waveform monitor output) connector
(BNC type)
Used for output of the waveform monitor video signal
selected using the RCP-700-series Remote Control
Panel MONITOR SELECT button, or the MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit WF MONITOR button. (When
both the RCP and MSU are in use, this connector
functions as the output connector for RCP control.)
Note
The SC phase of the VBS signal output from
connectors 3 and 4 is not locked to the black burst
signal supplied to the REFERENCE IN connector. Use
the monitor in Internal sync mode.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 90
7-3-5 HKCU-901 SD Analog Interface Unit
The optional HKCU-901 is - installed in the HDCU-900
expansion slot.
7
Note
All input and output connectors function when the
system is operated at a 59.94/50 Hz field frequency,
but do not operate when the system field frequency is
60 Hz.
1 RET INPUT 1-4 connectors
2 SYNC OUT connector
3 PIX OUT connector
4 WF OUT connector
5 Y/G, B-Y/B, and R-Y/R OUTPUT connectors
6 VBS OUT 1 and 2 connectors
1
2
3
4
1
2
Y/G
B-Y/B
R-Y/R
RET INPUT
OUTPUT
VBS OUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
WF OUT
a RET INPUT 1-4 (return video 1, 2, 3, and 4 input)
connectors (BNC type)
is selected using switches on the AT board. (Factory
setting: G, B, R)
Four different SD analog return video input signals may
be received independently. The selection of RET
1, 2, 3, or 4 is made by the camera’s return switch. The
type of input signal on RET 1, 2, 3, and 4 may be set
individually using switches on the AT board in the
HDCU-900, or using the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup
Unit. The aspect ratio may also be selected for SD
signals.
f VBS OUT 1 and 2 (composite video output 1 and
2) connectors (BNC type)
The two connectors are for output of the video camera
signal in analog composite video format.
Note
If a signal asynchronous with the HDCU-900 is
supplied, the picture quality may be degraded.
b SYNC OUT (SD sync signal output) connector
(BNC type)
Used for output of an SD composite sync signal from
the internal sync signal generator.
c PIX OUT (picture monitor output) connector
(BNC type)
Used for output of the picture monitor video signal
selected using the RCP-700 series Remote Control
Panel MONITOR SELECT button, or the MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit PICTURE MONITOR button.
(When both the RCP and MSU are in use, this
connector can be assigned to the output connector for
MSU control.) Signal selection can be made using
switches on the AT board.
d WF OUT (waveform monitor output) connector
(BNC type)
Used for output of the waveform monitor video signal
selected using the RCP-700 series Remote Control
Panel MONITOR SELECT button, or the MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit WF MONITOR button.
(When both the RCP and MSU are in use, this
connector can be assigned to the output connector for
MSU control.) Signal selection can be made using
switches on the AT board.
e Y/G, B-Y/B, and R-Y/R OUTPUT (component
video signal output) connectors (BNC type)
Used for output of either Y, B-Y, R-Y component video
or G, B, R component video signals. The type of signal
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 91
7-3-6 HKCU-902 HD Analog Interface Unit
The optional HKCU-902 is designed to be installed in
the HDCU-900 expansion slot or in place of the SD
signal input/output block.
7
1 RET INPUT 1-4 connectors
2 SYNC OUT connector
3 PIX OUT connector
4 OUTPUT 1, 2 connectors
1
2
3
4
Y/G
PB/B
PR/R
Y/G
PB/B
PR/R
RET INPUT
SYNC OUT
PIX OUT
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
a RET INPUT 1-4 (return video 1, 2, 3, and 4 input)
connectors (BNC type)
c PIX OUT (HD picture monitor output) connector
(BNC type)
Four different HD analog return video input signals
may be received independently. The selection of RET
1, 2, 3, or 4 is made by the camera’s return switch. The
type of input signal on RET 1, 2, 3, and 4 may be set
individually using switches on the AT board in the
HDCU-900, or using the MSU-700A/750 Master
Setup Unit.
Used for output of the picture monitor video signal
selected using the RCP-700 series Remote Control
Panel MONITOR SELECT button, or the MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit PICTURE MONITOR button.
Either the Remote Control Panel or Master Setup Unit
may control the output, depending on which button
was pressed most recently.
b SYNC OUT (HD sync signal output) connector
(BNC type)
d OUTPUT 1, 2 (HD analog component video 1 and
2 output) connectors (BNC type)
Used for output of an HD tri-level sync signal from the
internal sync signal generator.
HD analog component video signals are output in
either Y, PB, PR or G, B, R format. The selection of Y,
PB, PR or G, B, R format may be made independently
for OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 2, using switches on the
AT board. (Factory setting: G, B, R)
7-3-7 HKCU-903 Frame Rate Converter Unit
The optional HKCU-903 is to be installed in the HDCU-
900 expansion slot or in place of the SD signal input/
output block.
1 SERIAL RET INPUT 1-4 connectors
2 SYNC OUT connectors
3 FRAME REFERENCE IN/OUT connectors
4 SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3 and MONI connectors
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
MONI
IN
OUT
SERIAL RET INPUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
SYNC OUT SYNC OUT
FRAME REFERENCE
a SERIAL RET INPUT 1-4 (HD-SDI return video 1,
2, 3, and 4 input) connectors (BNC type)
Four different HD-SDI return video input signals may
be received independently. The selection of RET 1, 2,
3, or 4 is made by the camera’s return switch. The type
of input signal on RET 1, 2, 3, and 4 may be set
individually using switches on the AT board in the
HDCU-900, or using the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup
Unit.
b SYNC OUT (HD/SD sync signal output)
connectors (BNC type)
The left connector outputs a sync signal of the same
format as that of the input/output block in the above
slot. The right connector outputs the HD tri-level sync
signal of the same format as that of the SERIAL
OUTPUT 1 to 3 connectors.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 92
c FRAME REFERECE IN/OUT connectors (BNC
type)
output connectors for pull down. Switching is made
using the switches on the internal FC board.
7
The IN connector is used to receive an HD tri-level
reference sync signal or SD reference sync signal
(black burst signal) for frame sequence lock between
camera control units. In this case, the signal supplied
to the IN signal is output from the OUT connector as-is.
When this unit is used as the master unit, these
connectors can be used as the frame sync pulse
d SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3 and MONI (monitor)
connectors (BNC type)
The 1 to 3 connectors output the signal from the
camera as three HD-SDI signals. The MONI connector
outputs the signal from the video camera mixed with
skin tone gate signals and some aspect marker signal
in HD-SDI format.
7-3-8 HKCU-904 Line Converter Unit
The optional HKCU-904 is to be installed in the HDCU- Note
900 expansion slot or in place of the SD signal input/
output block.
When used in combination with the HKCU-903, mount
the HKCU-903 into the second slot from the top, and
the HKCU-904 into the third slot.
1 SERIAL RET INPUT 1-4 connectors
2 SYNC OUT connectors
3 SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3 connectors
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
SERIAL RET INPUT
SERIAL OUTPUT
SYNC OUT SYNC OUT
a SERIAL RET INPUT 1-4 (HD-SDI return video 1,
2, 3, and 4 input) connectors (BNC type)
b SYNC OUT (HD/SD sync signal output)
connectors (BNC type)
Four different HD-SDI analog return video input signals
(720/60P) may be received independently. The
selection of RET 1, 2, 3, or 4 is made by the camera’s
return switch. The type of input signal on RET 1, 2, 3,
and 4 may be set individually using switches on the AT
board in the HDCU-900, or using the MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit.
The left connector outputs a sync signal of the same
format as that of the input/output block in the above
slot. The right connector outputs the HD tri-level sync
signal of the same format as that of the SERIAL
OUTPUT 1 to 3 connectors.
c SERIAL OUTPUT 1 to 3 connectors (BNC type)
The 1 to 3 connectors output the signal from the
camera as three HD-SDI signals (720/60P).
7-3-9 Internal Boards – DPR board
AUDIO PHASE control
Adjusts the delay of the audio signal with respect to the
video signal output from this unit. (1 step=5 ms, 1-
frame delay: 30 frames/s=7, 25 frames/s=8)
AUDIO PHASE control
MAIN OUTPUT
AUDIO PHASE
OPTICAL
CONDITION
SYSTEM
POWER
DPR
CHU LOCK
POWER
/1.001
60
50
PsF
540P
1035
30
25
24
CCU
CHU
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 93
7-3-10 Internal Boards – AT board
7
1 INCOM SELECT switch
2 PGM MIX control
3 SIDE TONE control
4 TALK LEVEL control
REFERENCE H PHASE
LOCK REMOTE LOCAL HD BB
MIC LEVEL
NORM NORM
CCU
TALK
2 WIRE
REF GEN
IN
INCOM
SELECT
MIN
LEVEL CANCEL
AT
POWER
/1.001
MIN
CH-1
CH-2
FINE
ENG PROD
PRIVATE
PGM SIDE
MIX TONE
PROD ENG
5 MIC LEVEL CH1/CH2 controls
a INCOM SELECT (intercom select) switch
Selects the intercom line to which the intercom signal
d TALK LEVEL control
Controls the volume of your voice to be sent to the
to be connected via the intercom connector of this unit. producer line, engineer line, and headset of the
PROD: producer line
PRIVATE: private line
ENG: engineer line
camera.
e MIC LEVEL CH1/CH2 (CH1/CH2 microphone
level) controls
b PGM MIX (program mix) control
Controls the volume of program audio to be mixed to
the intercom signal at the headset.
Control the input level according to the sensitivity of the
microphone connected to the MIC connector of the
camera so that an appropriate sound volume is
obtained.
c SIDE TONE control
Controls the volume of your voice to be supplied to the
receiver of the headset.
7-4. HDCU-950, HD Camera Control Unit
7-4-1 Front Panel
1 Tally lamp
1
2 CABLE ALARM indicators
POWER
CAM
CABLE
ALARM
OPEN
MAIN
3 POWER switch and indicators
SHORT
4 MIC/PGM switch
INCOM MIC ON
PROD
PRIV
OFF
5 Intercom volume control
PGM
ENG
6 Intercom line selector
7 Intercom connector
HD CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
a Tally lamp
The lamp lights in red when a red tally signal is
insufficient optical reception status of the optical
fiber cable.
received. When the CALL button on the camera, MSU- SHORT (red): The LED lights when there is a short
700A/750 Master Setup Unit, RCP-700-series Remote
Control Panel, etc. is pressed, this lamp will go dark if
previously lit, and light up if previously off. It lights in
green when a green tally signal is received. A supplied
number plate can be mounted here.
circuit between a power supply line and the sheath
of the optical fiber cable, or when the two power
supply lines are shorted. When this indicator lights,
the power supply to the camera is shut off.
c POWER switch and indicators
b CABLE ALARM indicators
The switch turns on or off the power to the entire
system, consisting of the HDCU-950, a video camera,
an RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel connected
via the REMOTE connector, etc. The MAIN and CAM
(camera) indicators light when the power is turned on.
OPEN (red): The LED lights when there is no camera
connected via an optical fiber cable to the CAMERA
connector on the rear panel. It flashes to warn about
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 94
If the CAM PW button on the Remote Control Panel or
Master Setup Unit is pressed, only power to the
camera is turned off, and the CAM indicator alone
goes dark.
e Intercom volume control
To adjust the intercom input level
7
f Intercom line selector
Select the intercom line to which the intercom signal is
to be connected:
PROD (producer): Producer line
PRIV (private): The producer line and engineer line
are disconnected, and communication is possible
only between the HDCU-950 and the connected
camera.
Note
Standby power is kept supplied even when the
POWER switch is set to off. The main power switch is
provided on the power unit behind the front cover. If
you open the front cover and set the main power switch
to off, power cannot be turned on with the POWER
switch on the front panel.
ENG (engineer): Engineer line
d MIC/PGM (microphone/program audio) switch
ON: To turn on the headset microphone
OFF: To turn off the headset microphone
PGM (program): To output the program audio to the
intercom connector
g Intercom connector (XLR 5-pin)
Connect a headset.
Note
To use a headset with a plug other than an XLR 5-pin
plug, consult a Sony service or sales representative.
7-4-2 Rear Panel
1 HD SDI OUT 1 and HD SDI OUT 2 connectors
2 REFERENCE connectors
3 SYNC OUT connector
4 PROMPTER connectors (RET4)
5 MIC1 and MIC2 connectors
6 CAMERA connector
SD output block (DIF board)
CAMERA
REFERENCE
PROMPTER
MIC1
RC
SD SDI
OUT 1
SD SDI
OUT 2
HD SDI
OUT 1
RET1
MIC2
SYNC OUT
PIX
HD SDI
OUT 2
RET2
RET3
OUT
WF
OUT
MONI
RCP/CNU
WF MODE
INCOM/TALLY/PGM
MIC REMOTE
qf AC IN connector
7 Expansion slot
qd WF MODE connector
qs RCP/CNU connector
qa MIC REMOTE connector (WF REMOTE)
q; RET1, RET2, and RET3 connectors
9 MONI connector
8 INCOM/TALLY/PGM connector
a HD SDI OUT 1 and HD SDI OUT 2 (HD serial
digital interface output 1 and 2) connectors
(BNC type)
The signal from the video camera may be output as
HD-SDI signals.
other connector as-is (loop-through output). If loop-
through output is not used, terminate the unused
connector with 75 ohms. The type of reference signal
is selected using the switch on the internal AT board,
or using the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit.
Note
To use the VBS signal of the HKCU-951 SD Encoder
Unit (SC phase lock is required), use an SD reference
sync signal (black burst signal).
b REFERENCE connectors (BNC type)
Input an HD tri-level reference sync signal or SD
reference sync signal (black burst signal) to either of
the two connectors. The input signal is output from the
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 95
c SYNC OUT (sync signal output) connector (BNC
type)
Used for output of an SD composite sync signal or HD
tri-level sync from the internal sync signal generator.
(Factory setting: SD composite sync)
k MIC REMOTE (microphone remote) connector
(D-sub 15-pin)
7
Using this connector, the video camera’s microphone
amplifier gain can be set using external equipment
such as an audio mixer, in five steps (60, 50, 40, 30,
and 20 dB). When taping, set the volume to a level
appropriate for the audio conditions.
d PROMPTER connectors (BNC type)
Note
Input a teleprompter signal to either of the two
connectors. The input signal is output from the other
connector as-is (loop-through output). If loop-through
output is not used, terminate the unused connector
with 75 ohms. If the signal used is a 1.0-Vp-p, 75-ohm
analog signal, it may be output from the video
camera’s PROMPTER OUT connector with a frequency
bandwidth of 8 MHz, regardless of signal format.
RET4 (return video input 4) connector
The microphone amplifier gain can also be set using
switches on the internal AVP board.
WF REMOTE (waveform monitor remote) connector
With the internal switch setting, the MIC REMOTE
connector can be assigned for the WF REMOTE
connector. In this case, the connector can be
connected to the appropriate connector on a
waveform monitor when operating the waveform
monitor using an MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit or
RCP-700- series Remote Control Panel. A recall-type
monitor can be connected. For the recall-type monitor,
preset a display mode on the waveform monitor, and
then recall the mode externally.
When required, either of the PROMPTER connectors
can be assigned for the fourth return video input
exclusively for analog VBS signals.
e MIC1 and MIC2 (microphone output 1 and 2)
connectors (XLR 3-pin)
l RCP/CNU connector (8-pin)
Used to output microphone signals from the video
camera
Used to connect to an MSU-700A/750 Master Setup
Unit, CNU-500/700 Camera Command Network Unit,
or RCP-700-series Remote Control Panel via a CCA-5
Connection Cable. Control signals are sent and
received via this connector. When using an RCP-700-
series unit, power is also supplied.
f CAMERA connector (optical fiber connector)
Used to connect a video camera, using an optical fiber
cable. All video camera signals, including power
supply, control, video, and audio, are sent and
received over one optical fiber cable.
Note
Dust on the connection surface of the optical fiber
cable may result in transmission errors. When not
connected, always keep the end covered with the
supplied cap.
m WF MODE (waveform monitor mode output)
connector (4-pin)
Connect to the appropriate connector on a waveform
monitor when monitoring a signal in Sequential mode.
A sequence signal will be output when the SEQ button
on the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit or RCP-700
Series Remote Control Panel is pressed, allowing
simultaneous monitoring of the R, G, and B signals in
Sequential mode. (When both the RCP and MSU are in
use, this connector functions as the output connector
for RCP control.)
g Expansion slot
For installation of the optional HKCU-951 SD Encoder
Unit. When using the HKCU-953 HD Frame Rate
Converter Unit, move the DIF board and internal RC
board to this slot and install the HKCU-953 in the
original DIF/RC board position.
n AC IN (AC power supply input) connector
Use the specified power cord to connect to an AC
power supply. The power cord can be secured to the
HDCU-950 body using an optional plug holder.
h INCOM/TALLY/PGM (intercom/tally/program
audio) connector (D-sub 25-pin)
Used for input and output of intercom, tally, and
program audio signals. Connect to the intercom/tally/
program audio connector of the intercom system.
7-4-3 Output Block - DIF Board
i MONI (HD-SDI monitor output) connector (BNC
type)
The signal from the video camera can be mixed with
skin tone gate signals and some aspect marker signal
and output in HD-SDI format.
RC
SD SDI
OUT 1
Note
Mixing is set to ON or OFF using switches on the
internal AT board or the MSU-700A/750 Master Setup
Unit.
1 SD SDI OUT 1 and SD SDI OUT 2
connectors
SD SDI
OUT 2
j RET1, RET2, and RET3 (return video input 1, 2,
and 3) connectors (BNC type)
PIX
OUT
Return video input signals can be received from three
different systems. The selection among from RET 1, 2
and 3 is made using the camera’s return video switch.
The type of input signal can be any of HD-SDI, SD-
component SDI, or analog VBS, and can be set using
the switch on the internal DTX board, or using the
MSU-700A/750 Master Setup Unit. Signals of different
types cannot be connected simultaneously.
Note
2 PIX OUT connector
WF
OUT
3 WF OUT connector
If a signal asynchronous with the HDCU-950 is
supplied, it may affect the picture quality of return
video.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 96
a SD output block (DIF board) 1 SD SDI OUT 1 and
SD SDI OUT 2 (SD-SDI output 1 and 2)
b Y/G, B-Y/B, and R-Y/R (component video signal
output) connectors (BNC type)
Used for output of either Y, B-Y, R-Y component video
signals or G, B, R component video signals. The type
of signal is selected using switches on the EN board.
(Factory setting: G, B, R)
7
connectors (BNC type)
When the system is operating with the field frequency
of 59.94/50 Hz, the signals from the video camera may
be down-converted to SD-component SDI signals and
output from these connectors. The OUT 2 connector
can be assigned for a digital monitor output that
includes character and marker information.
7-4-5 HKCU-953 HD Frame Rate
Converter Unit
The optional HKCU-953 is to be installed in the slot for
the DIF board (SD output block)/internal RC board
after moving them to the expansion slot.
Connector panel (SDI board)
b PIX OUT (picture monitor output) connector
(BNC type)
Used for output of the picture monitor video signal
selected using the RCP-700-series Remote Control
Panel MONITOR SELECT button or the MSU-700A/
750 Master Setup Unit PICTURE MONITOR button.
(When both the RCP and MSU are in use, this
connector functions as the output connector for RCP
control.)
FC
HD SDI
OUT 1
c WF OUT (waveform monitor output) connector
(BNC type)
1 HD SDI OUT 1 and HD SDI OUT 2
connectors
HD SDI
OUT 2
Used for output of the video signal for waveform
monitoring selected using the RCP-700-series Remote
Control Panel’s MONITOR SELECT button or the MSU-
700A/750 Master Setup Unit’s WF MONITOR button.
(When both the RCP and MSU are in use, this
connector functions as the output connector for RCP
control.)
FRAME
REF IN
2 FRAME REF IN and OUT connectors
OUT
Note
The SC phase of the VBS signal output from
connectors 2 and 3 is not locked to the black burst
signal supplied to the REFERENCE connector. Use the
vector monitor in Internal Sync mode.
a HD SDI OUT 1 and HD SDI OUT 2 (HD SDI output
1 and 2) connectors (BNC type)
7-4-4 HKCU-951 SD Encoder Unit
The optional HKCU-951 is to be installed in the HDCU-
950 expansion slot.
These connectors output the signals from the camera
as HD-SDI signals. When the camera is operating in
24PsF mode, frame conversion can be applied to input
signals to provide 60i/50i signals from these
connectors.
Connector panel (VDA board)
EN
VBS
OUT
b FRAME REF IN and OUT (frame reference input
and output) connectors (BNC type)
1 VBS OUT connector
The IN connector is used to receive an HD tri-level
reference sync signal or SD reference sync signal
(black burst signal) for frame sequence lock between
camera control units. The signal supplied to the IN
connector is output from the OUT connector as-is.
When this unit is used as the master unit, the OUT
connector can be used as the frame sync pulse output
connector for pull down.
Y/G
B-Y/B
2 Y/G, B-Y/B, and R-Y/R connectors
R-Y/R
Note
All the connectors function when the system is
operated at a 59.94-/50-Hz field frequency, but do not
operate when the system field frequency is 60 Hz.
a VBS OUT (composite video signal output)
connector (BNC type)
Used for output of the video camera signal in analog
composite video format. An internal setting enables
the SD SDI OUT1 and OUT2 connectors on the DIF
board also to be used as analog VBS outputs.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 97
7-4-6 Internal Switches and Internal
7-4-7 Internal Switches and Internal
7
Boards – Internal switches
The following switches are located inside the unit
behind the front panel:
Boards – AT Board
1 Internal main power switch
AT
POWER
1 POWER indicator
/1.001
2 /1.001 indicator
90H
3 90H indicator
1
REFERENCE
REF IN
POWER
CAM
CABLE
ALARM
UN
LOCK
4 REFERENCE indicators and switch
OPEN
HD
MAIN
REM
BB
SHORT
H PHASE
STEP
INCOM MIC ON
PROD
PRIV
5 H PHASE switches
OFF
CARBON
ECM
DYNAMIC
COARSE
ADV
S4
PGM
ENG
DELAY
GND
S5
OPEN
a POWER indicator
The LED is lit when the power voltage inside the board
is normal.
2 Headset microphone setting switch 2 (S5)
b /1.001 (frame frequency) indicator
The LED is lit when the frame frequency of the system
is set to 1/1.001.
3 Headset microphone setting switch 1 (S4)
c 90H (phase difference) indicator
The LED is lit when the phase difference between the
HD output and SD output is set to 90H (HD).
a Internal main power switch
When an abnormality has occurred, and power cannot
be cut off with the POWER switch on the front panel,
you may turn off the unit using the internal main power
switch.
d REFERENCE indicators and switch
The switch is to select the type of sync signal to be
connected to either of the REFERENCE connectors on
the rear panel.
HD: HD tri-level reference sync signal (local setting)
REM (remote): Signal selected on the MSU-700A/ 750
Master Setup Unit
BB: SD reference sync signal (black burst signal)
(local setting)
When a signal is supplied to the REFERENCE
connector, the REF IN indicator lights. If the type of the
input sync signal does not match the setting on this
unit, the UNLOCK indicator will light.
b Headset microphone setting switch 1 (S4)
Set the switch according to the microphone of the
headset connected to the intercom connector on the
front panel of this unit:
CARBON: Carbon microphone (power supply, 20- dB
gain)
ECM: Electret condenser microphone (power supply,
40-dB gain)
DYNAMIC: Dynamic microphone (no power supply,
60-dB gain)
c Headset microphone setting switch 2 (S5)
When you set setting switch 1 (S4) to ECM or
DYNAMIC, also set this switch accordingly:
GND: Unbalanced type
e H PHASE switches
Used to adjust the H phase. First set the phase by
steps with the STEP switch, then adjust it with the
COARSE switch. The COARSE switch will return to its
original position when you release it. Press and hold it
toward ADV to advance the phase or toward DELAY for
phase delay.
OPEN: Balanced type
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 98
7-4-8 Internal Switches and Internal
7-4-9 Internal Switches and Internal
7
Boards – AVP Board
Boards – DTX Board
AVP
DTX
POWER
POWER
1 POWER indicator
1 POWER indicator
INTERCOM
PGM1
OPTICAL
CONDITION
MIX
2 PGM1/MIX/PGM2 selector
CCU
PGM2
2 OPTICAL CONDITION indicators
PGM1
3 PGM1 LEVEL control
LEVEL
PGM2
LEVEL
4 PGM2 LEVEL control
CHU
CHU
SIDE
5 SIDE TONE control
TONE
2WIRE CANCEL
PROD
6 2WIRE CANCEL controls
ENG
3 CHU LOCK indicator
LOCK
MIC AMP GAIN
NORM
MIC1
MIN
RETURN SET
HD
7 MIC AMP GAIN controls
NORM
MIC2
REM
4 RETURN SET switch
MIN
SD
a POWER indicator
a POWER indicator
The LED is lit when the power voltage inside the board
is normal.
The LED is lit when the power voltage inside the board
is normal.
b PGM1/MIX/PGM2 (program audio) selector
To select the program audio to be sent to the headset
connected to the intercom connector on the front
panel:
b OPTICAL CONDITION indicators
The corresponding LEDs light to show the condition of
optical signal reception at this unit (CCU) and the
camera (CHU):
PGM1: Program audio 1
Green: Good
MIX: Program audio 1 + Program audio 2
PGM2: Program audio 2
Yellow: Low optical level
Red: Extremely low optical level, or disconnection
If communication with the connected camera is not
established, all the three CHU green, yellow and red
indicators go dark.
c PGM1 LEVEL (program 1 audio level) control
To adjust the mixing volume of the PGM1 audio signal
at the headset connected to the intercom connector on
the front panel
c CHU LOCK indicator
The LED is lit when communication with the connected
camera is being properly made.
d PGM2 LEVEL (program 2 audio level) control
To adjust the mixing volume of the PGM2 audio signal
at the headset connected to the intercom connector on
the front panel
d RETURN SET switch
Select the type of the return video signal to be
connected to the RET1, RET2 and RET3 connectors of
this unit:
e SIDE TONE control
HD: HD-SDI signal (local setting)
REM (remote): Signal selected on the MSU-700A/ 750
Master Setup Unit
To adjust the volume of your voice to be supplied to the
headset connected to the intercom connector on the
front panel
SD: SD signal (local setting). Switching between SD
SDI and VBS is made with an internal switch.
f 2WIRE CANCEL controls
When using the 2-wire intercom system, adjust the
controls to minimize the side tone level on the producer
line (PROD) and engineer line (ENG).
g MIC AMP GAIN (microphone amplifier gain)
controls
These controls permit you to adjust the amplifier gain
of the camera so that the proper audio levels can be
obtained appropriate to the sensitivities of the
microphones (MIC1 and MIC2) connected to the
camera.
The adjustment is valid when no connection is made to
the MIC REMOTE connector on the rear panel of this
unit or, if the connection is made, when the internal
setting is selected for the connector (pins 8 and 15 are
set to a high level). The adjustment range is from
NORM (60 dB) to MIN (20 dB) in 10-dB steps. This
switch changes the gain of a microphone amplifier in
the camera.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 99
a POWER indicator
The LED is lit when the power voltage inside the board
is normal.
7-4-10 Internal Switches and Internal
7
Boards – DRX Board
b SD signal format indicators
Either of the indicators lights to show the selected SD
signal format:
525: 525-59.94i (NTSC) format
625: 625-50i (PAL) format
DRX
POWER
1 POWER indicator
60
50
c Down-converter remote/local switch
To specify whether the down converter is remotely set
or locally set.
2 Camera status indicators
48
REM (remote): To set from the MSU-700A/750 Master
Setup Unit
PsF
540P
LOCAL: To set on this unit
The switches d, e, and f become valid with the
LOCAL setting.
d Down-converter mode switch
To select the operating mode of the down converter:
SQ: Squeeze mode
CHARACTER
REW
3 CHARACTER switch
FF
LB: Letterbox mode
EC: Edge-Crop mode
The switches e and f become valid with the EC
setting.
a POWER indicator
The LED is lit when the power voltage inside the board
is normal.
e Edge-crop mode setting switch
b Camera status indicators
The LEDs will light to show the status of the connected
camera:
To set the Edge-crop mode of the down converter:
CENT: To fix the picture frame at the center when
performing edge crop
60/50/48: One of these LEDs that corresponds to the
field frequency setting on the camera lights.
PsF: The LED is lit when the camera is operating in
Progressive mode.
VAR: The edge crop position can be varied with the
edge-crop position-setting switch f.
f Edge-crop position setting switch
540P: The LED is lit when the camera is operating in
540-60P mode (not used at present).
Operation mode of the camera is set from the camera
control unit.
To set the edge crop position. This switch will return to
its original position when you release it. Press and hold
the switch toward RIGHT to move the position to the
right ( ) and toward LEFT to move it to the left ( ).
c CHARACTER switch
7-4-12 Internal Switches and Internal
Boards – EN Board (Internal
board of the optional HKCU-
951)
To page the character displays being imposed to the
monitor output. This switch will return to its original
position when you release it. Press it toward FF to go to
the next page or toward REW to return to the previous
page. When you hold the button pressed, the display
changes continuously.
7-4-11 Internal Switches and Internal
Boards – RC Board
EN
POWER
1 POWER indicator
VBS
LEVEL
2 VBS controls
SYNC
RC
POWER
CHROMA
1 POWER indicator
COMPONENT
525
R/R-Y
2 SD signal format indicators
3 COMPONENT controls
625
G/Y
B/B-Y
REM
3 Down-converter remote/local switch
SC PHASE
ADV
LOCAL
4 SC PHASE switch
SQ
DELAY
LB
4 Down-converter mode switch
EC
CENT
5 Edge-crop mode setting switch
VAR
a POWER indicator
The LED is lit when the power voltage inside the board
is normal.
RIGHT
6 Edge-crop position setting switch
LEFT
b VBS controls
To adjust VBS signal:
LEVEL: To adjust the video level
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 100
SYNC: To adjust the sync level
CHROMA: To adjust the chroma level
7
c COMPONENT controls
Each is for adjusting the corresponding component
video output (R/R-Y, G/Y, or B/B-Y).
d SC PHASE switch
Used to adjust the SC phase with respect to the
reference signal (BB).
This switch will return to its original position when you
release it. Press and hold the switch toward ADV to
advance the phase or toward DELAY for delay.
7-4-13 Internal Switches and Internal
Boards – FC Board (Internal
board of the optional HKCU-
953)
FC
POWER
1 POWER indicator
2 CONVERT indicator
CONVERT
FRAME
REF IN
3 FRAME indicators
UN
LOCK
a POWER indicator
The LED is lit when the power voltage inside the board
is normal.
b CONVERT indicator
The LED is lit when the camera is operating in 24PsF
mode and the HKCU-953 is supplying 60i/50i signals
after frame conversion. It goes dark when the HKCU-
953 is supplying the input 24PsF signals as-is or when
the camera is operating in 60i, 50i, 30PsF, or 25PsF
mode.
c FRAME indicators
REF IN: The LED is lit when a subsidiary reference
signal for frame lock is being supplied.
UNLOCK: The LED lights if correct lock to the
subsidiary reference signal being supplied cannot
be achieved.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 101
7-5. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit
7
7-5-1 Front and Rear Panels
1 POWER switch and indicator
CAMERACOMMAND NETWORK UNIT
POWER
Front panel
4 MSU connector
5 VCS connector
3 RCP 1 through 6 connectors
2 CCU 1 through 6 connectors
6 AUX1 and AUX2 connectors
RCP
CCU
MSU
VCS
AUX1
AUX2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
MSC
VCS
AUX3
AUX4
~AC IN
7
8
9
10
11
12
7
8
9
10
11
12
CCU
Rear panel
qa Optional board
insertion section
q; -AC IN connector
9 RS-232C 1 through 3 connectors
8 REFERENCE connectors
7 CHARACTER 1 and 2 connectors
a POWER switch and indicator
Press to turn the power ON or OFF. The indicator
illuminates when power is switched on.
g CHARACTER 1and 2 connectors (BNC type)
Supply character data as a 525 or 625-line, black-and-
white video signal. The signal output is automatically
selected according to the reference signal input to the
REFERENCE connector. If no reference signal is input,
the CNU-700 for the USA and Canada supplies a 525-
line video signal, the CNU-700 for other countries
supplies a 625-line video signal. You can select
whether to add a sync signal to the output signal with
switch S7 (SYNC ON/OFF) on the AT board. Refer to
the system manual for details on the board switch
settings.
b CCU (camera control unit) 1 through 6
connectors (8-pin)
Connect to the RCP/CNU REMOTE connector on a
CCU-700A/700AP Camera Control Unit using a CCA-5
cable.
c RCP (remote control panel) 1 through 6
connectors (8-pin)
Connect to the CCU/CNU REMOTE connectors on an
RCP-700 Series Remote Control Panel using a CCA-5
cable.
h REFERENCE (reference signal input) loop
connectors (BNC type)
Accepts a reference signal (VS, BS, etc.). The signal
output from the CHARACTER connector is
synchronized with the input signal.
d MSU (Master Set-up Unit) connector (8-pin)
Connect to the CCU/CNU REMOTE connector on an
MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit using a CCA-5 cable.
i RS-232C 1 through 3 connectors (D-sub 9-pin)
Used for RS-232C interfaces. The function of these
connectors depends on whether or not an optional
BKP-7930 System Expansion Board is installed in the
CNU-700 as shown below.
e VCS (video selector) connector (8-pin)
Connect to the REMOTE connector of a VCS-700
Video Selector using a CCA-5 cable.
f AUX1 and AUX2 (auxiliary 1 and 2) connectors
(8-pin)
Connect to the AUX1 or AUX2 connector of another
CNU-700 using a CCA-5 cable when controlling
multiple cameras with two or more CNU-700 units. You
can connect up to eight CNU-700 units.
Connector No BKP-7930
With BKP-7930
installed
No
installed
1
2
Reserved for ISR system
Reserved for RS-232C interface
Reserved for RS-232C
3
Not used
system
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 102
j ~AC IN (AC power input) connector
Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC
power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the CNU- BKP-7930/7933. When you attach the BKP-7930 to the
700 using the supplied plug holder.
k Optional board insertion section
Used for attaching the connector panel of an optional
7
CNU-700, up to 12 cameras and remote control panels
can be controlled. BKP-7933 enables the S-bus
functionality.
7-6. CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit
7-6-1 Front and Rear Panels
Front panel
1 POWER switch and indicator
2 CNU number indicator
POWER
CAMERA COMMAND NETWORK UNIT
Rear panel
4 MSU connector
5 CHARACTER connector
3 CCU 1 through 6 connectors
6 RS-232C connector
RS232C
MSU
CHARACTER
CCU1
CCU2
CCU3
CCU4
CCU5
CCU6
~AC IN
qa RCP 1 through 6 connectors
7 -AC IN connector
8 REFERENCE
connectors
q; VCS connector
9 AUX connctor
a POWER switch and indicator
Press to turn the power ON or OFF. The indicator
illuminates when power is switched on.
h REFERENCE (reference signal input) connector
(BNC type)
Accept a reference signal (VS, BS, etc.). The signal
output from the CHARACTER connector is
synchronized with the input signal.
b CNU number indicator
Attach the number plate.
i AUX (auxiliary) connector (8-pin)
Not used.
c CCU (camera control unit) 1 through 6
connectors (8-pin)
Connect to the RCP/CNU/ REMOTE connector of a
CCU-700A/700AP Camera Control Unit using a CCA-5
cable.
j VCS (video selector) connector (8-pin)
Connect to the REMOTE connector of a VCS-700
Video Selector using a CCA-5 cable.
d MSU (Master Set-up Unit) connector (8-pin)
Connect to the CCU/CNU REMOTE connector on an
MSU-700 Master Set-up Unit using a CCA-5 cable.
k RCP (remote control panel) 1through 6
connectors (8-pin)
Connect to the CNU/CCU REMOTE connector on RCP-
700 Series Remote Control Panels using a CCA-5
cable.
e CHARACTER connector (BNC type)
Supplies character data as a 525 or 625-line, black-
and-white video signal. The signal output is
automatically selected according to the reference
signal input to the REFERENCE connector. If no signal
is input to the REFERENCE connector, the CNU-500
for the USA and Canada supplies a 525-line video
signal, and the CNU-500 for other countries supplies a
625-line video signal.
f RS-232C connector (D-sub 9-pin)
Used for the RS-232C interface. This connector is
reserved for the ISR system.
g ~AC IN (AC power input) connector
Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC
power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the CNU-
500 using the supplied plug holder.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 103
7-6-2 Internal Board
7
MODE
UP DOWN SET CANCEL
OPERATION
NORMAL EMERGENCY
SYNC
CHARACTER
PHUSE OFF ON
+5
6 SYNC ON/OFF
switch
1 +5 V indicator
2 OPERATION switch
3 MODE switch
4 UP/DOWN switch
7 CHARACTER
PHASE control
5 SET/CANCEL switch
a +5 V indicator
g CHARACTER PHASE control
Lights when +5 V power to the board.
Adjusts the horizontal phase of the signal output from
the CHARACTER connector, referring to the reference
signal. Adjust the phase by monitoring the signal on
the monitor screen.
b OPERATION switch
NORMAL: Set to this position for normal operation.
EMERGENCY: Set to this position when the CNU-500
or MSU-700 cannot function normally. The RCP-700
Series Remote Control Panels are directly
connected to their respective camera control units.
The switch is set to NORMAL at the factory.
c MODE switch
0: Factory setting
1: When the switch is set to this position, the UP/DOWN
switch is activated, and the switch changes the
character page displayed on a monitor connected
to the CHARACTER connector.
2 through F: Not used.
d UP/DOWN switch
Changes the page displayed on the monitor screen.
This switch functions only when the MODE switch is set
to 1. The contents of each page are shown in the
following table.
Page
Contents
Nothing appears when power is turned on.
Shows a warning if a problem is detected by
the self-diagnosis of the camera.
1
2
3
4
Connection status of Cameras 1 through 6.
Not used.
Not used.
Shows the results of auto set-up of Camera 1
through 6.
5
6
Cannot be used.
DIAGNOSIS OF ALL CAMERAS displays,
which shows the results of the self-diagnosis
of all the cameras.
7
8
9
Not used.
DIAGNOSIS OF ONE CAMERA display, which
shows the results of the self-diagnosis of the
selected camera.
DATA OF ALL CAMERAS display, which
shows the setting status of each camera.
10
11
DATA OF ONE CAMERA display, which shows
the setting status of the selected camera.
e SET/CANCEL switch
Selects the displayed item or camera (CAM) when
display page 9, 10 or 11 appears on the monitor
screen.
f SYNC ON/OFF switch
Selects whether the sync signal is to be added to the
video signal output from the CHARACTER connector.
At the factory, the switch is set to ON (added).
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 104
7-7. VCS-700, Video Selector
7
7-7-1 Front and Rear Panels
1 POWER switch and indicator
Front panel
POWER
VIDEO SELECTOR
4 PIX A INPUT connector
5 PIX A OUTPUT connector
6 PIX B OUTPUT connector
3 CHARACTER INPUT connectors
7 SYNC OUT connector
2 PIX 1 through PIX 6 INPUT connectors
Rear Panel
8 WF 1 through WF 6 INPUT connectors
9 WF A INPUT connector
qg -AC IN connector
qf I/O PORT connector
qd REMOTE connector
q; WF A OUTPUT connector
qa WF B OUTPUT connector
qs WF MODE connector
a POWER switch and indicator
This switch turns the power ON and OFF. The indicator
illuminates when power is switched on.
f PIX B OUTPUT (picture monitor B output)
connector (BNC type)
Supplies the same video signal for a picture monitor as
the PIX A OUTPUT connector. The signal loss of a
connecting cable up to about 100 meters (330 feet)
long can be compensated for with the switch on the
internal board. When you connect a picture monitor
using a long connecting cable, connect it to this
connector. When using two or more VCS-700 units
connected in series, connect a picture monitor to the
PIX B OUTPUT loop connector on the VCS-700 whose
PIX A OUTPUT connector is not used for series
connection. For details on cable compensation, refer
to the system manual.
b PIX1 through PIX6 INPUT (picture monitor 1
through 6 inputs) connectors (BNC type)
Accept video signals for a picture monitor. Connect
each of these connectors to the PIX2 OUTPUT
connector on the CCU-700A/700AP Camera Control
Unit. The signal loss of a connecting cable up to about
30 meters (99 feet) long can be compensated for with
the switch on the internal board. For details, refer to the
system manual.
c CHARACTER INPUT connectors (BNC type)
Accept character signals. The input signal is mixed
with the signal output from the PIX OUTPUT connector.
Connect to the CHARACTER connector on the CNU-
700 Camera Command Network Unit. When using two
VCS-700 units, connect either of these connectors to
the CHARACTER INPUT connector on a second VCS-
700. When a bridge connection is not made, be sure to
terminate with 75 ohms.
g SYNC OUT (sync signal output) connector (BNC
type)
Supplies the sync signal for a picture monitor.
h WF1 through WF6 INPUT (waveform monitor 1
through 6 input) connectors (BNC type)
Accept video signals for a waveform monitor. Connect
these connectors as required to the WF2 OUTPUT
connector on CCU-700A/700AP Camera Control Units.
The signal loss of a connecting cable up to about 30
meters (99 feet) long can be compensated for with the
switch on the internal board. For details, refer to the
system manual.
d PIX A INPUT (picture monitor A input) connector
(BNC type)
Connect to the PIX A OUTPUT connector on a second
VCS-700 when using two or more VCS-700 selectors.
i WF A INPUT (waveform monitor A input)
connector (BNC type)
e PIX A OUTPUT (picture monitor A output)
connector (BNC type)
Connect to the WF A OUTPUT connector on a second
VCS-700 when using two of these units.
Supplies a video signal for a picture monitor. Select the
output signal with the camera select buttons on an
MSU-700 or by command from the I/O PORT
connector on the VCS-700 Video Selector. When using
two or more VCS-700 units, connect this connector to
j WF A OUTPUT (waveform monitor A output)
connector (BNC type)
the PIX A INPUT connector on each subsequent VCS- Supplies the video signal for a waveform monitor.
700, and a picture monitor to the PIX A OUTPUT
connector on the final VCS-700 in the series
connection.
Select the output signal with the camera select buttons
on an MSU-700 or by command from the I/O PORT
connector on a VCS-700. When using two or more
VCS-700 units, connect this connector to the WF A
INPUT connector on each subsequent VCS-700, and a
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 105
waveform monitor to the WF A OUTPUT loop connector
on the VCS-700 which is the last unit in the series
connection.
connector supplies a staircase signal and sequential
ON/OFF control signal.
7
m REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect a CNU-700 Camera Command Network Unit
using a CCA-5 cable.
k WF B OUTPUT (waveform monitor B output)
connector (BNC type)
Supplies the same video signal for a waveform monitor
as the WF A OUTPUT connector. The signal loss of a
connecting cable up to 100 meters (330 feet) long can
be compensated for with the switch on the internal
board. When you connect a waveform monitor using a
long connecting cable, connect it to this connector.
When using two or more VCS-700 units connected in
series, connect a waveform monitor to the PIX B
OUTPUT connector on the VCS-700 whose WF A
OUTPUT loop connector is not used for series
connection. For details on cable compensation, refer
to the system manual.
n I/O PORT (remote control) connector (D-sub 37-
pin)
Accepts and supplies external control signals. You
can select the signals output to a picture monitor and
a waveform monitor with an external video selector
connected to this connector. The selected input
connector number is supplied from this connector.
o ~AC IN (AC power input) connector
Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC
power cord. The power cord can be fixed to the VCS-
700 using the supplied plug holder.
l WF MODE (waveform monitor mode) connector
(4-pin)
Connect to a corresponding connector on a waveform
monitor to view the signals in sequential mode. This
7-8. MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit
7-8-1 Operation Panel
5 CLOSE button
6 STANDARD button
7 AUTO SETUP block
4 Signal output select buttons
3 VF PW button
8 Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
2 CAM PW button
9 Scene file control block
q; Menu operation block
1 ALL button
AUTO SETUP
MODE
SKIN DTL
AUTO HUE
START/
BREAK
LEVEL
ALL
CAM PW
VF PW
TEST1
TEST2
BARS
CLOSE STANDARD
WHITE BLACK
KNEE DETAIL LVLDEP GAMMA CHROMA MATRIX
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
MULTI
CARD
KNEE KNEE
APARTURE SAT
MONO COLOR
COLOR CORRECT
5600K
1
AUTO
SKIN
DETAIL SATURATION CONTRAST BLACK
GAMMA
CHARACTER
KNEE DETAIL GATE
CONFIGURATION
MAINTENANCE
FILE
2
3
4
5
SCENE FILES
STORE
ECS
ON
ACCESS
B
ECS/SHUTTER
FILTER CTRL
GAMMA
2
MASTER GAIN
PAINT
R
R
G
ENC
1
3
4
5
PICTURE MONITOR
ND
MASTER BLACK
IRIS
A
B
C
D
E
G
B
SEQ
ENC
EXT
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
WAVEFORM MONITOR
CC
AUTO
PARA
MULTI
TALLY
CAL
PANEL
ACTIVE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
EXPAND
wa Iris control block
qa IC card insertion block
w; Camera number/
tally indication window
qs PICTURE MONITOR buttons
qd WAVEFORM MONITOR buttons
ql CALL button
qf Camera select block
qk MASTER BLACK control block
qg Filter control block
qj IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
qh ECS/Shutter control block (left)
Gamma control block (center)
Master gain control block (right)
a ALL button
b CAM PW (camera power) button
Press the button so it starts flashing to activate the 13
buttons located at the right (from CAM PW to AUTO
SETUP) for all the connected cameras of the same
group.
Press and light up this button to turn the power supply
to the video camera ON. (The button promptly flashes
until the camera becomes ready for transmission.)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 106
When you press this button again, it starts flashing and
the power supply to the camera is turned off.
adjustment is canceled and the button flashes.
To stop the flashing, press the button again.
7
c VF PW (viewfinder power) button
Notes
Press and light up this button to turn the power supply
to the viewfinder ON. When you press the button again,
it goes dark and the power supply is turned off.
• If an error occurs during adjustment, the pressed
button flashes.
• The leftmost button is for future use and has no
function at present.
d Signal output select buttons
Press and light up one of these buttons to activate the
test signal generator of the video camera and send the
respective signals.
TEST 1: To send a gamma signal to test the video
circuits
TEST 2: To send a staircase signal
BARS: To send a color bar signal
Note
h Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
Various functions of the video camera or the CCU can
be turned on and off from this unit. The following
switching functions are assigned to 18 of the buttons
at the factory and the other nine buttons are reserved
for future use.
The BARS button takes priority to the other two
buttons. If the BARS button is lit, press the button to
turn it dark before pressing the TEST 1 or TEST 2
button.
KNEE DETAIL LVLDEP GAMMA CHROMA MATRIX
SD MATRIX
OFF
SD
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
DETAIL
KNEE
KNEE
LOW KEY
SAT
MONO COLOR
COLOR CORRECT
APERTURE SAT
5600K
AUTO
SKIN DETAIL SATURATION CONTRAST BLACK
GAMMA
CHARACTER
e CLOSE (iris close) button
KNEE DETAIL GATE
Press and light the button to close the iris. Press again
to release the close mode.
Upper row (OFF when the button is lit)
KNEE OFF: Knee compensation function
DETAIL OFF: Detail compensation function
LVL DEP OFF: Level dependent function which
controls the details in the dark part of a picture
GAMMA OFF: Gamma function
f STANDARD button
When you press this button, the video camera is
initialized to its standard state and the button lights for
several seconds. If you press the button while it lights,
the video camera returns to the state before the button
was lit.
CHROMA OFF: Chroma function
MATRIX OFF: Linear matrix function to enhance
color fidelity
For details, refer to the System Manual.
g AUTO SETUP block
For automatic adjustments of cameras.
Middle row (ON when the button is lit)
KNEE APERTURE: Knee aperture function
KNEE SAT: Knee saturation function
MONO COLOR: Mono color function which mixes
the chroma signals of a single hue to the luminance
signal. The chroma level is modulated according to
the luminance signal.
1
2
3
4
AUTO SETUP
SKIN DTL
AUTO HUE
START/
BREAK
LEVEL
WHITE BLACK
COLOR CORRECT: Color correction function for a
certain hue range.
A Auto adjustment item select buttons
Press and light up these buttons to select the
items to be automatically adjusted.
SKIN DTL AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail
automatic hue
LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master
black level, etc.
B START/BREAK button
Lower row (ON when the button is lit)
5600K: 5600K electronic color temperature
conversion function
AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button
is lit (ON), the knee point is automatically adjusted
according to the light content of the picture.
SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function
DETAIL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. When
this button is lit (ON), the adjustment range of the
skin tone detail is displayed in white on the monitor
screen.
Press to start automatic adjustment of the
selected items. The button lights during
adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is
completed. If you press the button when lit, the
automatic adjustment is canceled and the
button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the
button again.
SATURATION: Saturation function
CONTRAST: Contrast function
BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function
CHARACTER: System information display function.
When this button is lit (ON), the various information
on the entire system is displayed on the monitor
connected to the CHARACTER connector of the
CNU-700. The display contents can be changed
through a menu operation.
C WHITE (white balance) button
Press to automatically adjust the white balance.
The button lights during adjustment and goes
dark when adjustment is completed. If you press
this button when lit or the START/ BREAK button,
the automatic adjustment is canceled and the
button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the
button again.
D BLACK (black balance) button
Press to automatically adjust the black balance
and black set. The button lights during
adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is
completed. If you press this button when lit or
the START/ BREAK button, the automatic
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 107
i Scene file control block
C EL display/touch panel
7
Displays the menu selected with the MODE
buttons and permits the displayed items to be
adjusted.
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
k IC card insertion block
STORE
SCENE FILES
A SCENE FILES buttons
While the STORE button is flashing: When you
press one of these buttons, the current setting
data is stored as a file of the corresponding
number.
When the STORE button is dark: The stored data
can be retrieved by pressing and lighting up the
button of the desired number. Press the lit
button to turn it dark and resume the previous
status.
2
1
B STORE button
ACCESS
To store a scene file, first press this button so
that the button starts flashing, then press the
SCENE FILES button of the desired number.
When file registration is completed, the STORE
button goes dark. To cancel the registration,
press the flashing button again before pressing
the SCENE FILES button. The STORE button
goes dark.
3
A IC card slot
Insert an IC card (which conforms to PCMCIA)
to store reference files and scene files of the
video camera or CCU (SRAM CARD ONLY).
To insert a card
[1] Slide the cover to open the IC card insertion
block.
[2] Insert the card into the slot. When the card
is correctly set, the ACCESS indicator lights
in green.
j Menu operation block
MODE
Note
The data in the memory card is maintained by
the battery built into the card. If the battery is
exhausted, the data in the card will be lost. You
can check the battery condition by the ACCESS
indicator. If the battery becomes weak, replace
the battery with a new one as soon as possible.
B Eject button
3
MULTI
CARD
1
CONFIG
MAINTENANCE
FILE
Press to eject the inserted IC card.
Note
Do not eject a card when the ACCESS indicator
is lit in red (it means that the data is being read
from or written to the card). This may erase data
stored in the card.
PAINT
2
C ACCESS indicator
Shows the status of the IC memory card.
A MODE (mode select) buttons
Select the menu mode. If you press and light
one of these buttons, the menu for the selected
mode appears on the EL display. When the lit
button is pressed again, it goes dark and the
menu on the display also disappears.
MULTI: Selects Multi-Control menu to set the
requirements for Master/Slave mode to set up
multiple cameras in synchronization.
CARD: Selects IC memory card menu to
initialize IC cards.
CONFIG: Selects Configuration menu to
configure this unit and the entire camera
system.
MAINTENANCE: Maintenance mode to set
various camera maintenance items and the H
and SC phases of CCU, etc.
Indication
Meaning or Measures
No card is inserted.
Off
Lit in
green
There is a card in the slot. (The battery
condition is good.)
The battery of the card in the slot begins
losing its charge. Although the data are
still maintained, replace the battery at the
earliest opportunity..
Lit in
orange
The battery of the card in the slot is
almost exhausted. While the card stays
in the MSU-700A, the MSU-700A sup-
plies the power to the card. However
when the card is ejected, the data can-
not be maintained. Replace the battery
before using.
Flashes in
orange
FILE: Selects File operation menu to retrieve
and transfer reference files, lens files and
scene files in the video camera or on IC
cards.
Data are being read/written. If you eject
Lit in red the disc in this condition, the data is not
guaranteed. All the data may be lost
PAINT: Selects Paint control menu to adjust
various paint items, such as white, black and
flare.
For battery replacement, refer to the instructions for the IC
card.
B Control knobs (rotary encoders)
Adjust the selected items on the touch panel.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 108
l PICTURE MONITOR buttons
Press to select the output signal from the PIX2
OUTPUT connector of CCU.
The signal corresponding to the lit button is output.
R/G/B: Select the R signal, G signal, or B signal. The
signals can be selected either independently or in
combination. When any of these buttons is pressed,
the SEQ and ENC circuits are turned off.
SEQ (sequence): When this button is pressed, the R/
G/B circuits are turned off, and the SEQ signal is
output. You can monitor the waveforms of the three
R, G, and B signals in sequence on a waveform
monitor.
7
The signal corresponding to the lit button is output.
R/G/B: Select the R signal, G signal, or B signal. The
signals can be selected either independently or in
combination. When any of these buttons is pressed,
the ENC circuit is turned off.
ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/G/
B circuits are turned off, and the ENC signal is
output.
ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the R/G/
B and SEQ circuits are turned off, and the ENC
signal is output.
m WAVEFORM MONITOR buttons
Press to select the output signal from the WF2 OUTPUT
connector of CCU.
n Camera select block
1
2
PARA
MULTI
TALLY
3
4
5
PANEL
ACTIVE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
EXPAND
7
6
A PANEL ACTIVE button
camera control unit) is not connected does not
light. An indicator lights in red when an error is
detected and the self-diagnostic functions are
activated in the corresponding camera or
camera control unit.
Press and light up this button to permit the
cameras selected with the camera select
buttons to be controlled from this unit. The IRIS/
MB ACTIVE button also lights up. If you press
the button when lit, it goes dark and the
operation panel of this unit is locked.
B PARA (parallel mode) button
F Camera select buttons
Select the cameras to be controlled from this
unit. Press and light up the button
corresponding to each desired camera.
Cameras 1 through 12 are selected when the
EXPAND button is not lit, and cameras 13
through 24 are selected when the EXPAND
button is lit.
Press and light up this button to activate Parallel
mode, which enables concurrent operation with
another control panel. If you press the button
when lit, it goes dark and Parallel mode is
canceled.
C MULTI indicators
G EXPAND button
Show the Master/Slave status of the
Press to select the group to be selected with the
camera select buttons. Cameras 1 through 12
can be selected when this button is not lit, and
cameras 13 through 24 can be selected when
this button is lit.
corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the
EXPAND button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when
the EXPAND button is lit).
The indicator for the camera which is specified
as the master for Master/Slave mode lights in
green. The indicators for the slave cameras light
in orange. They light in red during the auto setup
of the corresponding cameras. If an error occurs
during the auto setup and the operation is
interrupted, they will flash in red.
Note
An appropriate camera command network unit
(CNU- 700, etc.) is required to control multiple
cameras using the camera select function.
o Filter control block
D TALLY indicators
2
1
Show the tally status of the corresponding
cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND
button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the
EXPAND button is lit). The corresponding
indicator lights in red when a red tally is sent to
a camera, and it lights in green when a green
tally is sent. When both red and green tally are
sent, it lights in orange. When a call signal is
sent to the camera, the indicator rapidly flashes
in red.
1
2
3
4
5
ND
FILTER CTRL
A
B
C
D
E
CC
3
E Active indicators
A FILTER CTRL (filter control) button
Show the control status of the corresponding
cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND
button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the
EXPAND button is lit). The indicators for the
cameras under control of this unit light in green
and the indicators for the cameras under control
of another control panel light in orange. An
indicator whose corresponding camera (or
Press and light up the button to enable filter
selection with the CC and ND filter select
buttons of this unit.
B ND (ND filter select) buttons
While the FILTER CTRL button is lit, press and
light up one of these buttons to select the
corresponding ND filter.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 109
Examples
1: Clear
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/8 ND
4: 1/16 ND
5: 1/64 ND
Note
7
The higher the gamma effect, the lower the
value.
E MASTER GAIN selects buttons and display
window
Select the appropriate video gain according to
the illumination of the subject to be shot. The
selected value (dB) is displayed in the window.
The gain value increases when the v (up) button
is pressed and decreases when the V (down)
button is pressed. It continuously changes when
either button is kept pressed.
When the FILTER CTRL button is not lit, the
button corresponding to the filter selected at the
video camera lights.
C CC (color temperature conversion filter select)
buttons
While the FILTER CTRL button is lit, press and
light up one of these buttons to select the
corresponding CC filter.
Examples
q IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active)
button
A: Cross filter
B: 3200K (clear)
C: 4300K
D: 6300K
Press and light up this button to enable the iris and
master black adjustment functions of the unit.
When the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this
button automatically lights. To disable only the iris/
master black control block of the panel, press this
button so that it goes dark.
E: 8000K
When the FILTER CTRL button is not lit, the
button corresponding to the filter selected at the
video camera lights.
r MASTER BLACK control block
Turn the control to adjust the master black level. The
adjustment value is displayed in the display window.
p ECS/Shutter control block (left)
Gamma control block (center)
Master gain control block (right)
s CALL button
Press to send a call signal to the video camera, on
which the CALL button lights. The tally lamps on the
camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU light when
not lit, or go dark when lit.
When the CALL button on the video camera is
pressed, the CALL button on this unit lights and a
buzzer sounds.
1
ECS
ON
ECS/SHUTTER
GAMMA
MASTER GAIN
t Camera number/tally indication window
The number of the camera being controlled from this
unit is displayed in orange.
When a red tally signal is sent to the camera, the
number is displayed in black and the background of
the number lights in red.
When a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the
number is displayed in black and the background of
the number lights in green.
When both the red and green tally signals are
simultaneously sent, the left half of the background
lights in red and the right half lights in green.
2
3
4
5
A ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button
Press and light up the button to set the video
camera to ECS mode. Press again and turn off
the button to set the video camera to Shutter
mode.
B ON button
Turns on and off the ECS function (when the
ECS button is lit) or the shutter function (when
the ECS button is not lit). The function is ON
when this button is lit.
C ECS frequency/Shutter speed select buttons
and display window
u Iris control block
In ECS mode (when the ECS button is lit):
The selected ECS frequency is displayed in the
window. Press to select the desired scan
frequency.
The frequency increases when the v (up) button
is pressed and decreases when the V (down)
button is pressed. It continuously changes when
either button is kept pressed.
IRIS
EXT
1
2
3
AUTO
In Shutter mode (when the ECS button is not
lit):
The denominator of the selected step shutter
speed is displayed in the window. Press to
select the desired shutter speed. The speed
increases when the v (up) button is pressed
and decreases when the V (down) button is
pressed. It continuously changes when either
button is kept pressed.
A EXT (lens extender) indicator
Lights when the lens extender is used.
B IRIS control and display window
When the AUTO button is not lit, you can adjust
the iris manually by turning the control. The
adjustment value is displayed in f numbers on
the display.
D GAMMA select buttons and display window
Select the step gamma. The selected value is
displayed in the window. The gamma value
decreases when the v (up) button is pressed
and increases when the V (down) button is
pressed. It continuously changes when either
button is kept pressed.
When the AUTO button is lit, the reference value
for automatic iris adjustment can be set in a
range of 2f with this control.
When the iris is closed, “CL” is displayed in the
window.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 110
C AUTO button
Right two buttons in the upper row (OFF when the
button is lit)
SD MATRIX OFF: To turn on/off the linear matrix in
down converting
SD DETAIL OFF: To turn on/off the SD contour
compensation function in down converting
7
Press and light the button to automatically adjust
the iris according to the amount of input light
(Auto Iris). If you press the button when lit, it
goes dark and manual iris adjustment is
enabled.
Note
If the subject being used as the reference for
automatic adjustment is lost while operating a
camera having the skin tone auto iris function,
the skin tone auto iris stops functioning, and the
iris value at that time is maintained. The AUTO
button then flashes. In this condition, not only is
the iris not automatically adjusted but also it
cannot be changed manually. When you wish to
change the iris, turn Auto Iris off. If Auto Iris is
kept ON, the skin tone auto iris will start
functioning when the subject for reference is
resumed.
Fourth button from the left in the middle row (ON
when the button is lit)
LOW KEY SAT: To turn on/off the low key saturation
function (linear matrix for dark areas)
Menu operation block/1 MODE (mode select)
buttons
The uppermost MODE button in the menu operation
block functions as the FUNCTION button both in HD
and SD camera systems. Use the unit with the supplied
label attached as shown below.
MODE
7-8-2 Operation Panel in use with HD
FUNCTION buttons:
FUNCTION
Selects Function menu to control
various camera and CCU functions.
Equipment
Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
When this unit is used in an HD camera system (HDC-
700/750/700A/750A/900/950/930, HDW-700/F900,
HDCU-700/900/950), another three camera/CCU
function ON/OFF buttons become effective. Use the
unit with the labels for an HD system (supplied)
attached to the appropriate positions.
MULTI
CARD
CONFIG
MAINTENANCE
KNEE DETAIL LVLDEP GAMMA CHROMA MATRIX
SD MATRIX SD DETAIL
OFF OFF
FILE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
KNEE
KNEE
MONO COLOR
COLOR CORRECT
LOW KEY
SAT
APERTURE SAT
PAINT
5600K
AUTO
SKIN DETAIL SATURATION CONTRAST BLACK
GAMMA
CHARACTER
KNEE DETAIL GATE
7-8-3 Connector Panel
1 POWER switch
3 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector
2 AC IN connector
4 AUX REMOTE connector
REMOTE
CCU/CNU
AUX
POWER
I
AC IN
I/O PORT
O
5 I/O PORT connector
a POWER switch
d AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8-
Turns on and off the power of this unit.
pin)
b AC IN (AC power input) connector
e I/O PORT connector (50-pin)
Connect to an AC power source using an optional AC
power cord. The power cord can be fixed to this unit
using an optional plug retainer.
c CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/
camera command network unit remote)
connector (8-pin)
Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of CCU or the
MSU connector of CNU.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 111
7-9. MSU-750, Master Setup Unit
7
7-9-1 Operation Panel
1 ALL button
2 CAM PW button
3 VF PW button
4 Signal output select buttons
5 CLOSE button
6 STANDARD button
7 AUTO SETUP block
AUTO SETUP
AUTO LEVEL START/
WHITE BLACK
BREAK
ALL
CAM PW VF PW TEST
BARS CLOSE STANDARD
CHARACTER
HUE
qs Display window block
8 Camera/CCU function ON/OFF
buttons
5600K AUTO SKIN
KNEE DETAIL
MASTER
GAIN
ND CC
FILTER
ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA
ACCESS
1
2
3
4
5
9 Scene file control block
SCENE FILES
STORE
PIX
qd IC card insertion block
IC MEMORY CARD
SEQ
ENC
R
G
B
q; Monitor output select buttons
WF
MONITOR
MODE
MULTI
CARD
CONFIG
MAINTENANCE
FILE
qf Menu operation block
PAINT FUNCTION
CALL
qg CALL button
PANEL PARA EXPAND
ACTIVE
MULTI
TALLY
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
qh IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 1 1 1 2
qa Camera select block
EXT
AUTO
MULTI
TALLY
qj Iris control block
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6
MASTER BLACK
IRIS
MASTER SETUP UNIT
ql Camera number/tally indication window
qk MASTER BLACK control block
a ALL button
d Signal output select buttons
Press the button so it starts flashing to activate the 11
buttons located at the right (from CAM PW to AUTO
SETUP) for all the connected cameras of the same
group.
Press and light up one of these buttons to activate the
test signal generator of the video camera and send the
respective signals.
TEST: To send a signal to test the video circuits
BARS: To send a color bar signal
Note
b CAM PW (camera power) button
The BARS button takes priority to the TEST button. If
the BARS button is lit, press the button to turn it dark
before pressing the TEST button.
Press and light up this button to turn the power supply
to the video camera ON. (The button promptly flashes
until the camera becomes ready for transmission.)
When you press this button again, it starts flashing and
the power supply to the camera is turned off.
e CLOSE (iris close) button
Press and light the button to close the iris. Press again
to release the close mode.
c VF PW (viewfinder power) button
Press and light up this button to turn the power supply
to the viewfinder ON. When you press the button again,
it goes dark and the power supply is turned off.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 112
f STANDARD button
display contents can be changed through a menu
operation.
7
When you press this button, the video camera is
initialized to its standard state and the button lights for
several seconds. If you press the button while it lights,
the video camera returns to the state before the button
was lit.
i Scene file control block
1 SCENE FILES button
2 STORE button
g AUTO SETUP block
For automatic adjustments of cameras.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
SCENE FILES
STORE
AUTO SETUP
A SCENE FILES buttons
While the STORE button is flashing: When
you press one of these buttons, the current
setting data is stored as a file of the
corresponding number.
When the STORE button is dark: The stored
data can be retrieved by pressing and
lighting up the button of the desired number.
Press the lit button to turn it dark and resume
the previous status.
AUTO LEVEL
HUE
START/
BREAK
WHITE BLACK
A Auto adjustment item select buttons
Press and light up these buttons to select the
items to be automatically adjusted.
AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail automatic hue
LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master
black level, etc.
B STORE button
B START/BREAK button
To store a scene file, first press this button so
that the button starts flashing, then press the
SCENE FILES button of the desired number.
When file registration is completed, the STORE
button goes dark. To cancel the registration,
press the flashing button again before pressing
the SCENE FILES button. The STORE button
goes dark.
Press to start automatic adjustment of the
selected items. The button lights during
adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is
completed. If you press the button when lit, the
automatic adjustment is canceled and the
button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the
button again.
C WHITE (white balance) button
Press to automatically adjust the white balance.
The button lights during adjustment and goes
dark when adjustment is completed. If you press
this button when lit or the START/ BREAK button,
the automatic adjustment is canceled and the
button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the
button again.
j Monitor output select buttons
Press to select the output signal from the WF2 and
PIX2 OUTPUT connectors of CCU.
2
1
D BLACK (black balance) button
SEQ
ENC
R
G
B
Press to automatically adjust the black balance
and black set. The button lights during
adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is
completed. If you press this button when lit or
the START/ BREAK button, the automatic
adjustment is canceled and the button flashes.
To stop the flashing, press the button again.
Note
WF
PIX
MONITOR
A Output signal select buttons
After selecting the output connector of the CCU
by pressing either the WF or PIX button, press to
light the button for the signal to be output. The
signal corresponding to the lit button is output.
R/G/B: Select the R signal, G signal, or B signal.
The signals can be selected either
If an error occurs during adjustment, the
pressed button flashes.
independently or in combination. When any of
these buttons is pressed, the SEQ (for WF
only) and ENC circuits are turned off.
SEQ (sequence): Effective only for the WF2
OUTPUT connector. When this button is
pressed, the R/G/B circuits are turned off, and
the SEQ signal is output. You can monitor the
waveforms of the three R, G, and B signals in
sequence on a waveform monitor.
h Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
Various functions of the video camera or the CCU can
be turned on and off from this unit (ON when the button
is lit).
The following switching functions are assigned to four
of the buttons at the factory and the other three buttons
are reserved for future use.
ENC (encode): When this button is pressed, the
R/G/B and SEQ circuits are turned off, and the
ENC signal is output.
AUTO SKIN
KNEE DETAIL
CHARACTER
5600K
B Output connector select buttons
5600K: 5600K -electronic color temperature
conversion function
AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button is
lit (ON), the knee point is automatically adjusted
according to the light content of the picture.
SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function
CHARACTER: System information display function.
The various information on the entire system is
displayed on the monitor connected to the
CHARACTER connector of the CNU-700. The
WF: Press to light the button when switching the
output signal from the WF2 OUTPUT
connector with the output signal select
buttons. Press the button again to make it go
dark.
PIX: Press and light the button when switching
the output signal from the PIX2 OUTPUT
connector with the output signal select
buttons. Press the button again to make it go
dark.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 113
When one of these buttons is lit, pressing the
output signal select buttons has effect only on
the connector that corresponds to the lit
button. The output signal from the other
connector does not change. By lighting both
the buttons, you can simultaneously select the
output signal.
signals selected for either of the connectors
flash. Press the button for the signal to be output
to select it again.
For example, when you light both the WF and
PIX buttons with R + B selected for PIX2
OUTPUT and B + G selected for WF2 OUTPUT,
the R and G buttons will start flashing, while the
B button will remain lit. To output R and G, press
the R and G buttons. Each pressed button stops
flashing and lights.
7
Note
If you light both the WF and PIX buttons when
different signals are selected for the WF2
OUTPUT and PIX2 OUTPUT connectors, the
output select buttons corresponding to the
k Camera select block
1
2
3
PANEL PARA EXPAND
ACTIVE
4
MULTI
TALLY
5
6
0 7 0 8 0 9 1 0 1 1 1 2
7
4
MULTI
TALLY
5
6
0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6
7
A PANEL ACTIVE button
E TALLY indicators
Press and light up this button to permit the
cameras selected with the camera select
buttons to be controlled from this unit. The IRIS/
MB ACTIVE button also lights up. If you press
the button when lit, it goes dark and the
operation panel of this unit is locked.
B PARA (parallel mode) button
Show the tally status of the corresponding
cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND
button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the
EXPAND button is lit). The corresponding
indicator lights in red when a red tally is sent to
a camera, and it lights in green when a green
tally is sent. When both red and green tally are
sent, it lights in orange. When a call signal is
sent to the camera, the indicator rapidly flashes
in red.
Press and light up this button to activate Parallel
mode, which enables concurrent operation with
another control panel. If you press the button
when lit, it goes dark and the Parallel mode is
canceled.
F Active indicators
Show the control status of the corresponding
cameras 1 through 12 (when the EXPAND
button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when the
EXPAND button is lit). The indicators for the
cameras under control of this unit light in green
and the indicators for the cameras under control
of another control panel light in orange.
An indicator whose corresponding camera (or
camera control unit) is not connected does not
light.
C EXPAND button
Press to select the group to be selected with the
camera select buttons. Cameras 1 through 12
can be selected when this button is not lit, and
cameras 13 through 24 can be selected when
this button is lit.
Note
An appropriate camera command network unit
(CNU- 700, etc.) is required to control multiple
cameras using the camera select function.
D MULTI indicators
An indicator lights in red when an error is
detected and the self-diagnostic functions are
activated in the corresponding camera or
camera control unit.
Show the Master/Slave status of the
corresponding cameras 1 through 12 (when the
EXPAND button is not lit) or 13 through 24 (when
the EXPAND button is lit).
G Camera select buttons and camera number
indicators
The indicator for the camera which is specified
as the master for Master/Slave mode lights in
green. The indicators for the slave cameras light
in orange. They light in red during the auto setup
of the corresponding cameras. If an error occurs
during the auto setup and the operation is
interrupted, they will flash in red.
Select the cameras to be controlled from this
unit. Press and light up the button
corresponding to each desired camera. When
the EXPAND button is not lit, numbers 1 through
12 are displayed and cameras 1 through 12 are
selected. When the EXPAND button is lit,
numbers 13 through 24 are displayed and
cameras 13 through 24 are selected.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 114
l Display window block
m IC card insertion block
7
1
2
3
4
ACCESS
IC MEMORY CARD
MASTER
GAIN
ND
CC
ECS/SHUTTER GAMMA
FILTER
A ECS frequency/Shutter speed display window
The currently selected ECS frequency or step
shutter speed is displayed in the window.
Switching between the ECS mode and shutter
mode is made using the Function menu. When
both ECS and Shutter are off, “OFF” is
displayed.
B GAMMA display window
The currently selected step gamma value is
displayed in the window. The setting is made
using the Function menu. The higher the gamma
effect, the lower the value.
C MASTER GAIN display window
The selected gain value (dB) of the camera is
displayed in the window. The setting is made
using the Function menu.
1
2
3
A ACCESS indicator
Shows the status of the IC memory card.
Indication
Meaning or Measures
No card is inserted.
Off
Lit in
green
There is a card in the slot. (The battery
condition is good.)
The battery of the card in the slot begins
losing its charge. Although the data are
still maintained, replace the battery at the
earliest opportunity.
Lit in
orange
The battery of the card in the slot is
almost exhausted. While the card stays
D Filter display window
Flashes in in the MSU-750, the MSU-750 supplies
orange
The currently selected ND and CC filters are
displayed. Filter selection is made using the
Function menu.
the power to the card. However when the
card is ejected, the data cannot be main-
tained. Replace the battery before using.
ND filter (Examples)
Data are being read/written. If you eject
1: Clear
Lit in red the disc in this condition, the data is not
guaranteed. All the data may be lost.
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/8 ND
4: 1/16 ND
5: 1/64 ND
CC filter (Examples)
For battery replacement, refer to the instructions for the IC
card.
A: Cross filter
B: 3200K (clear)
B IC card slot
Insert an IC card (which conforms to PCMCIA)
to store reference files and scene files of the
video camera or CCU (SRAM CARD ONLY).
When the card is correctly set, the ACCESS
indicator lights in green.
C: 4300K
D: 6300K
E: 8000K
Note
The data in the memory card is maintained by
the battery built into the card. If the battery is
exhausted, the data in the card will be lost. You
can check the battery condition by the ACCESS
indicator. If the battery becomes weak, replace
the battery with a new one as soon as possible.
C Eject button
Press to eject the inserted IC card.
Note
Do not eject a card when the ACCESS indicator
is lit in red (it means that the data is being read
from or written to the card). This may erase data
stored in the card.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 115
n Menu operation block
7
1
2
MODE
MULTI
CARD
CONFIG
MAINTENANCE
FILE
PAINT FUNCTION
3
A MODE (mode select) buttons
q Iris control block
Select the menu mode. If you press and light
one of these buttons, the menu for the selected
mode appears on the EL display. When the lit
button is pressed again, it goes dark and the
menu on the display also disappears.
MULTI: Selects Multi-Control menu to set the
requirements for Master/Slave mode to set up
multiple cameras in synchronization.
CARD: Selects IC memory card menu to
initialize IC cards.
1
2
3
EXT
AUTO
CONFIG: Selects Configuration menu to
configure this unit and the entire camera
system.
MAINTENANCE: Maintenance mode to set
various camera maintenance items and the H
and SC phases of CCU, etc.
IRIS
FILE: Selects File operation menu to retrieve
and transfer reference files, lens files and
scene files in the video camera or on IC
cards.
PAINT: Selects Paint control menu to adjust
various paint items, such as white, black and
flare.
4
A EXT (lens extender) indicator
Lights when the lens extender is used.
B Iris display window
The iris value is displayed in f numbers. When
the iris is closed, “CL” is displayed in the
window.
FUNCTION: Selects Function menu to control
various camera and CCU functions.
B EL display/touch panel
C AUTO button
Press and light the button to automatically adjust
the iris according to the amount of input light
(Auto Iris).
When this button is lit, the reference value for
automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range
of 2f with the iris control. If you press the button
when lit, it goes dark and manual iris adjustment
is enabled.
Displays the menu selected with the MODE
buttons and permits the displayed items to be
adjusted.
C Control knobs (rotary encoders)
Adjust the selected items on the touch panel.
o CALL button
Press to send a call signal to the video camera, on
which the CALL button lights. The tally lamps on the
camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU light when
not lit, or go dark when lit. When the CALL button on
the video camera is pressed, the CALL button on this
unit lights and a buzzer sounds.
Note
If the subject being used as the reference for
automatic adjustment is lost while operating a
camera having the skin tone auto iris function,
the skin tone auto iris stops functioning, and the
iris value at that time is maintained. The AUTO
button then flashes. In this condition, not only is
the iris not automatically adjusted but also it
cannot be changed manually. When you wish to
change the iris, turn Auto Iris off.
p IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active)
button
Press and light up this button to enable the iris and
master black adjustment functions of the unit. When
the PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button
automatically lights. To disable only the iris/ master
black control block of the panel, press this button so
that it goes dark.
If Auto Iris is kept ON, the skin tone auto iris will
start functioning when the subject for reference
is resumed.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 116
For the skin tone auto iris, refer to the system
manual.
D Iris control
7
When the AUTO button is not lit, you can adjust
the iris manually by turning the control. The
adjustment value is displayed in f numbers on
the display. When the AUTO button is lit, the
reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be set in a range of 2f with this control.
r MASTER BLACK control block
Turn the control to adjust the master black level. The
adjustment value is displayed in the display window.
s Camera number/tally indication window
The number of the camera being controlled from this
unit is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is
sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black
and the background of the number lights in red. When
a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the number
is displayed in black and the background of the
number lights in green. When both the red and green
tally signals are simultaneously sent, the left half of the
background lights in red and the right half lights in
green.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 117
7-10. RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panel
7
7-10-1 Operation Panel
RCP-750
1 Control select block
q; Power and output signal select
PARA MASTER SLAVE
CAM PW TEST
AUTO SETUP
BARS
CLOSE
BLACK
2 STANDARD button
qa AUTO SETUP block
CHAR SKIN DTL LEVEL START/
STANDARD
5600K
WHITE
ACTER AUTO HUE
BREAK
3 Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
AUTO
KNEE
SKIN
DETAIL
DTL
BLACK
GATE GAMMA
PAINT 1 PAINT 2 PAINT 3 SCENE MAINTE
NANCE
FUNCTION
qs Menu operation block
qd DETAIL knob
4 WHITE knobs
DETAIL
WHITE
5 BLACK/FLARE knobs and indicator
qf MEMORY STICK slot and access
BLACK/FLARE
a
lamp
EXT
6 Camera number/tally indication window
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
MASTER
BLACK
SENS
AUTO
Iris/master black control block
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
CLOSE
OPEN
COARSE
7 ALARM indicator
ALARM
CALL
8 CALL button
PANEL
ACTIVE
9 PANEL ACTIVE button
IRIS
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
RCP-751
6 Camera number/tally indication window
EXT
MASTER
BLACK
RELATIVE
SENS
OPEN
CLOSE
COARSE
AUTO
Iris/master black control block
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
7 ALARM indicator
ALARM
CALL
8 CALL button
PANEL
ACTIVE
9 PANEL ACTIVE button
IRIS
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 118
a Control select block
d WHITE (white balance manual adjustment)
knobs
Used to manually adjust the white balance. From the
left, the knobs are for R, G, and B signal adjustment.
7
1
2
e BLACK/FLARE (black balance/flare balance
manual adjustment) knobs and indicator
Used to manually adjust the black balance (when the
indicator is not lit) or the flare balance (when the
indicator is lit). From the left, the knobs are for R, G,
and B signal adjustment. Selection between black
balance and flare balance is made using the
Maintenance menu.
PARA MASTER SLAVE
A PARA (parallel mode) button
This button lights when Parallel mode is active,
in which concurrent operation with another
control panel is possible. When this button is lit,
all the buttons and controls on this panel except
for the iris/master black control block are active,
even if the PANEL ACTIVE button is not lit. If you
press the button when lit, it goes dark and
Parallel mode is cancelled.
f Camera number/tally indication window
The number of the camera being controlled from this
panel is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is
sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black
and the background of the number lights in red.
When a green tally signal is sent to the camera, the
number is displayed in black and the background of
the number lights in green. When both the red and
green tally signals are simultaneously sent, the left half
of the background lights in red and the right half lights
in green.
B MASTER and SLAVE buttons
When adjusting the white balance of multiple
cameras in Master/Slave mode, designate the
master camera or the slave cameras. Press and
light up the MASTER button to specify the
connected camera for the master. Press and
light up the SLAVE button to specify the
connected camera for the slave. The slave
cameras follow the master camera settings. If
you press a button when lit, it goes dark.
g ALARM indicator
Lights when trouble occurs in the camera system and
the self-diagnostic function activates at the video
camera or the CCU/HDCU-series.
b STANDARD button
When you press this button, the video camera is
initialized to its standard state and the button lights for
several seconds. If you press the button while it lights,
the video camera reverts to the state before the button
was lit.
h CALL button
Press to send a call signal to the video camera, on
which the CALL button lights. The tally lamps on the
camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU/HDCU
Series light when not lit, or go dark when lit. When the
CALL button on the video camera is pressed, the CALL
button on this panel lights and a buzzer sounds.
c Camera/CCU function ON/OFF buttons
Various functions of the video camera or the CCU/
HDCU-series can be turned on and off from this panel.
i PANEL ACTIVE button
Press and light up the button to permit this panel to
control the camera system (Panel active status). The
IRIS/MB ACTIVE button also lights. If you press this
button so that it goes dark, the panel will be locked,
preventing accidental misoperation.
CHAR
ACTER
5600K
AUTO
KNEE
SKIN
DETAIL
DTL
BLACK
GATE GAMMA
j Power and output signal select block
5600K: 5600K -electronic color temperature
conversion function
AUTO KNEE: Auto knee function. When this button is
lit (ON), the knee point is automatically adjusted
according to the light content of the picture.
SKIN DETAIL: Skin tone detail function
1
2
3
DTL GATE: Skin tone detail gate function. When this
button is lit (ON), the adjustment range of the skin
tone detail is displayed in white on the PIX (picture)
monitor screen.
CAM PW TEST
BARS
CLOSE
A CAM PW (camera power) button
Press and light up this button to turn the power
supply to the video camera ON. (The button
promptly flashes until the camera becomes
ready for transmission.) When you press this
button again, it starts flashing and the power
supply is turned off.
BLACK GAMMA: Black gamma function
CHARACTER: Self-diagnostic display function. When
this button is lit (ON), the contents of the self-
diagnosis of the CCU/HDCU-series are displayed
on the monitor connected to the CHARACTER
OUTPUT connector of the CCU/HDCU-series. The
contents are also mixed to the video signal to be
output from the PIX1 OUTPUT connector. Each time
you press this button, the status changes as follows.
OFF t ON (page 1) t ON (page 2) . . .
t ON (page n) t OFF
B Signal output select buttons
Press and light up one of these buttons to
activate the test signal generator of the video
camera and send the respective signals.
TEST: To send a signal to test the video circuits
BARS: To send a color bar signal
The contents of the self-diagnosis may be displayed
when required even if this button is not lit. The right two
buttons are for future use and do not function at
present.
Note
The BARS button takes priority to the TEST
button. If the BARS button is lit, press the button
to turn it dark before pressing the TEST button.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 119
C CLOSE button
completed. If you press the button when lit, the
automatic adjustment is canceled and the
button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the
button again.
7
Press and light the button to close the iris. To
release the close mode, press the button again
so that it goes dark.
C WHITE (white balance) button
Press to automatically adjust the white balance.
The button lights during adjustment and goes
dark when adjustment is completed. If you press
this button when lit or the START/BREAK button,
the automatic adjustment is canceled and the
button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the
button again.
k AUTO SETUP block
1
2
3
4
AUTO SETUP
D BLACK (black balance) button
SKIN DTL LEVEL START/
AUTO HUE BREAK
WHITE
BLACK
Press to automatically adjust the black balance
and black set. The button lights during
adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is
completed. If you press this button when lit or
the START/BREAK button, the automatic
adjustment is canceled and the button flashes.
To stop the flashing, press the button again.
Note
A Auto adjustment item select buttons
Press and light up these buttons to select the
items to be automatically adjusted.
SKIN DTL AUTO HUE: Skin tone detail
automatic hue.
LEVEL: Gamma balance, knee point, master
black level, etc.
If an error occurs during adjustment, the
pressed button flashes.
B START/BREAK button
Press to start automatic adjustment of the
selected items. The button lights during
adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is
l Menu operation block
1
PAINT 1 PAINT 2 PAINT 3 SCENE MAINTE
NANCE
FUNCTION
2
3
A MODE (mode select) buttons
C Control knobs (rotary encoders)
Select the menu mode. If you press and light
one of these buttons, the menu for the selected
mode appears on the LCD.
Adjust the selected items on the touch panel.
m DETAIL knob
PAINT 1/2/3: Each selects the Paint menu to
adjust various paint items, such as white,
black, and flare.
Used to adjust the detail level. You may select HD
detail or SD detail using the Maintenance menu.
SCENE: Selects the File operation menu to
register and retrieve scene files.
n MEMORY STICK media card slot and access
lamp
MAINTENANCE: Selects the Maintenance
menu to set the H and SC phases of CCU/
HDCU and operational conditions of this
control panel.
Insert a Memory Stick media card to store setting
data, such as reference files and scene files of the
video camera or CCU/HDCU.
The access lamp shows the status of the Memory
FUNCTION: Selects the Function menu to
control various camera and CCU/HDCU
functions. When none of the buttons are lit, the
status display is obtained.
Stick media card.
Off: No Memory Stick media card is inserted.
Lit in green: There is a Memory Stick media card in
the slot. In this condition, you can safely eject the
Memory Stick media card.
B LCD/touch panel
Normally displays the statuses. When you press
a MODE button, the corresponding menu is
displayed to permit you to adjust the displayed
items.
Lit in red: Data are being read/written. If you eject the
Memory Stick media card in this condition, the data
are not guaranteed. All the data may be lost.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 120
7-10-2 Iris/master black control block (RCP-750)
7
3 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
4 AUTO button
5 f-number display
6 EXT indicator
EXT
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
1 MASTER BLACK display
7 SENS control knob
MASTER
BLACK
SENS
AUTO
2 MASTER BLACK RELATIVE
8 COARSE control knob
button
RELATIVE
RELATIVE
CLOSE
OPEN
COARSE
9 Master black control ring
q; IRIS control lever
IRIS
qa IRIS RELATIVE button
a MASTER BLACK display
Displays the current master black setting in the range
from -99 to +99.
g SENS (sensitivity) control knob
Used for manual iris adjustment in Absolute mode.
This control is not operative when Relative mode is
selected.
b MASTER BLACK RELATIVE button
When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is lit, the master
black adjustment mode can be selected with this
button.
h COARSE control knob
Used for manual iris adjustment.
Press and light up the button for Relative mode, or
press and turn it dark for Absolute mode. When the
IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not lit, Relative mode is
automatically selected and this button is not operative.
i Master black control ring
Turn to manually adjust the master black level.
j IRIS control lever
When the AUTO button is not lit, you can adjust the iris
manually by moving the lever. When the AUTO button
is lit, the reference value for automatic iris adjustment
can be set in a range of 1f with this lever.
See the following table “Iris adjustment functions.”
c IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active)
button
Press and light up this button to enable the iris/master
black control block of the panel. When the PANEL
ACTIVE button is pressed, this button also lights. If you
press this button so that it goes dark, the panel will be
locked, preventing accidental misoperation.
d AUTO button
Press and light the button to automatically adjust the
iris according to the amount of input light. When this
button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris
adjustment can be set in a range of 1f with the iris
control. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark
and manual iris adjustment is enabled.
e f-number display
Displays the f-number of the current iris setting. When
the iris is closed, “CL” is displayed.
f EXT (lens extender) indicator
Lights when the lens extender is used.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 121
k IRIS RELATIVE (iris relative) button
Iris adjustment functions
7
When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is lit, the iris
adjustment mode can be selected with this button.
Press and light up the button for Relative mode or
press so that it goes dark for Absolute mode. When the
IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not lit, Relative mode is
automatically selected and this button is not operative.
Relative mode
Absolute mode
(RELATIVE button (RELATIVE button
lit)
not lit)
Adjusts the iris with Adjusts the iris
IRIS lever
relative values
within 1/4 of the
total range from
within the variable
range set by the
SENS and
(RCP-750)/
IRIScontrol
(RCP-751)
OPEN to CLOSED. COARSE
Adjusts the total
COARSE
control
range from OPEN Sets the lower limit
to CLOSED in rela- for CLOSED.
tive values.
Sets the upper limit
for OPEN accord-
Does not function. ing to CLOSED
value set by the
SENS
control
COARSE control.
7-10-3 Iris/master black control block (RCP-751)
4 IRIS RELATIVE button
1 MASTER BLACK display
5 f-number display
EXT
6 EXT indicator
2 MASTER BLACK control
7 SENS control knob
8 COARSE control knob
MASTER
BLACK
SENS
RELATIVE
AUTO
OPEN
COARSE
CLOSE
3 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
9 IRIS control
q; Iris gauge
IRIS
qa AUTO button
a MASTER BLACK display
e f-number display
Displays the current master black setting in the range
from –99 to +99.
Displays the f number of the current iris setting. When
the iris is closed, “CL” is displayed.
b MASTER BLACK control
f EXT (lens extender) indicator
Manually adjust the master black level. The setting is
displayed in the MASTER BLACK display.
Lights when the lens extender is used.
g SENS (sensitivity) control knob
Used for manual iris adjustment in Absolute mode.
This control is not operative when Relative mode is
selected.
c IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active)
button
Press and light up this button to enable the iris/master
black control block of the panel. When the PANEL
ACTIVE button is pressed, this button also lights. If you
press this button so that it goes dark, the panel will be
locked, preventing accidental misoperation.
h COARSE control knob
Used for manual iris adjustment.
i IRIS control
d IRIS RELATIVE (iris relative) button
When the AUTO button is not lit, you can adjust the iris
manually by turning the control. When the AUTO
button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris
adjustment can be set in a range of 1f with this
control.
When the IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is lit, the iris
adjustment mode can be selected with this button.
Press and light up the button for Relative mode or
press so that it goes dark for Absolute mode. When the
IRIS/MB ACTIVE button is not lit, Relative mode is
automatically selected and this button is not operative.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 122
j Iris gauge
k AUTO button
7
The white line on the gauge provides a click position
for the IRIS control. Turn the gauge to set the line to the
most frequently used iris position, and it can be used
as the reference for manual iris adjustment. The gauge
rotates infinitely in either direction. When no click
position is required, set the line outside the rotation
range of the IRIS control.
Press and light the button to automatically adjust the
iris according to the amount of input light. When this
button is lit, the reference value for automatic iris
adjustment can be set in a range of 1f with the iris
control. If you press the button when lit, it goes dark
and manual iris adjustment is enabled.
7-10-4 Connector Panel
1 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector
2 AUX REMOTE connector
3 EXT I/O connector
REMOTE
CCU/CNU
AUX
EXT I/O
a CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera
command network unit remote) connector (8-
pin)
Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of a camera
control unit or the RCP connector of a camera
command network unit.
b AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8-
pin)
Connect to the RCP-700/701.
c EXT I/O (external input/output) connector (9-pin)
With expansion functions added, this connector
permits you to control an external device.
Caution
When installing this panel, provide a gap of 7 cm (3
inches) or more behind the connector panel to prevent
damage to cables.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 123
7-11. RCP-700/701, Remote Control Panel
7
7-11-1 Operation Panel
1 PANEL ACTIVE button
2 WHITE button
3 BLACK button
RCP-700
PANEL
ACTIVE
CALL
4 CALL button
WHITE BLACK
WHITE
5 WHITE knobs
BLACK
6 BLACK knobs
7 EXT indicator
MASTER
AUTO
SLAVE
XT
qs AUTO button
8 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
9 SENS control knob
q; COARSE control knob
qa ALARM indicator
qd Camera number/tally indication window
SENS
CLOSE OPEN
COARSE
qf Master black control ring
ALARM
qg IRIS control lever/preview switch
IRIS
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
1 PANEL ACTIVE button
2 WHITE button
3 BLACK button
RCP-701
PANEL
ACTIVE
CALL
4 CALL button
WHITE BLACK
WHITE
5 WHITE knobs
6 BLACK knobs
BLACK
7 EXT indicator
MASTER
AUTO
SLAVE
XT
qs AUTO button
8 IRIS/MB ACTIVE button
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
qd Camera number/tally indication window
9 SENS control knob
q; COARSE control knob
qa ALARM indicator
SENS
qf MASTER BLACK control
MASTER BLACK
CLOSE OPEN
COARSE
ALARM
qg IRIS control
qh Iris gauge
PREVIEW
IRIS
REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
qj PREVIEW button
Parts common to the RCP-700/701
b WHITE (white balance) button
Items a through m are common to the RCP-700 and
RCP-701.
Press to automatically adjust the white balance. The
button is illuminated during adjustment and remains
illuminated until the adjustments are completed. If you
press this button while it is illuminated, or press the
START/BREAK button, the automatic adjustment is
canceled and the button flashes. To stop it flashing,
press the button again.
a PANEL ACTIVE button
Press and illuminate the button to permit this panel to
control the camera system (Panel active status). The
IRIS/MB ACTIVE button also illuminates.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 124
Note
background is illuminated red and the right half
illuminated green. In Master/Slave mode, to adjust the
white balance of multiple cameras the upper-left
(MASTER) corner is illuminated orange when the
camera being controlled from this panel is designated
as the master unit, and the upper-right (SLAVE) corner
is illuminated orange when designated as a slave unit.
7
If an error occurs during adjustment, the selected
button flashes.
c BLACK (black balance) button
Press to automatically adjust the black balance and
black set. The button is illuminated during adjustment
and remains illuminated until the adjustments are
completed. If you press this button while it is
illuminated, or press the START/BREAK button, the
automatic adjustment is canceled and the button
flashes. To stop it flashing, press the button again.
Note
RCP-700-exclusive features
n Master black control ring
Turn to manually adjust the master black.
If an error occurs during adjustment, the pressed
button flashes.
o IRIS control lever/preview switch
When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can
adjust the iris manually by moving this lever. When the
AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for
automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-1f
stop with this lever. Push it axially to connect the key
signal for preview at the PREVIEW connector. See the
table “Iris adjustment functions.”
d CALL button
Press to send a call signal to the camera, on which the
CALL button is illuminated. The tally lamps on the
camera and the red tally lamp on the CCU-700/
A700AP are illuminated if they were not lit, or are
turned off if they were already illuminated. When the
CALL button on the camera is pressed, the CALL
button on this panel illuminates and a buzzer sounds.
Iris adjustment functions
IRIS lever
(RCP-700)
IRIS control
(RCP-701)
Adjust the iris within the variable con-
trols.
e WHITE (white balance manual adjustment)
knobs
Used to manually adjust the white balance. Adjust the
R and B signals, respectively.
COARSE
control
Sets the lower limit for CLOSED.
Sets the upper limit for OPEN
f BLACK (black balance manual adjustment)
knobs
Used to manually adjust the black balance. Adjust the
R and B signals, respectively.
SENS control according to the CLOSED value set
by the COARSE control.
RCP-701-exclusive features
g EXT (lens extender) indicator
Lights when the lens extender is in use.
n MASTER BLACK control
Turn to manually adjust the master black.
h IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active)
button
o IRIS control
Press and illuminate this button to enable the iris/
master black control block of the panel. When the
PANEL ACTIVE button is pressed, this button also
illuminates.
When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you can
adjust the iris manually by turning the control. When
the AUTO button is illuminated, the reference value for
automatic iris adjustment can be set in a range of +/-1f
stop with this control. See the table ‘Iris adjustment
functions’.
i SENS (sensitivity) control knob
Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table ‘Iris
adjustment functions’.
p Iris gauge
The white line on the gauge provides a click position
for the IRIS control. Turn the gauge to set the line to the
most frequently used iris position, and it can be used
as the reference for manual iris adjustment. The gauge
rotates infinitely in either direction. When no click
position is required, set the line outside the rotation
range of the IRIS control.
j COARSE control knob
Used for manual iris adjustment. See the table ‘Iris
adjustment functions’.
k ALARM indicator
Lights when a problem occurs in the camera system
and the self-diagnostic function is activated at the
camera or the CCU-700A/700AP.
l AUTO button
Press and illuminate the button and the iris
automatically adjusts to the amount of input light. If you
press the button when it is illuminated, the illumination
is turned off and manual iris adjustment is enabled.
m Camera number/tally indication window
(incorporated with MASTER/SLAVE indications)
The number of the camera being controlled from this
panel is displayed in orange. When a red tally signal is
sent to the camera, its number is displayed in black
against a red background. When a green tally signal is
sent to the camera, the number is displayed in black
against a green background. When the red and green
tally signals are sent simultaneously, the left half of the
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 125
q PREVIEW button
Connects the preview signal to the PREVIEW
connector.
7
Connector Panel
PREVIEW
REMOTE
2 REMOTE connector
1 PREVIEW connector
A PREVIEW connector (6-pin)
Supplies preview in. The RCP-701 receives the
power from an external source, such as a video
switcher, to illuminate the PREVIEW button
through this connector.
B REMOTE connector (8-pin)
Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of a CCU-
700A/700AP, the RCP connector of a CNU-700
or the AUX connector of another RCP Series
Remote Control Panel.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 126
7-12. RM-B150, Hand-held Remote Control Unit
7
7-12-1 Operation Panel
VTR START/STOP
REW F FWD
9 VTR control block
1 Shutter control block
SHUTTER
ECS
S-EVS
STOP PLAY REC REVIEW
1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E
q; OUTPUT selector
CAM
BARS
TEST
LOW
MID
HIGH
2 Filter control block
ND
CC
qa GAIN selector
OUTPUT
GAIN
FILTER
3 Paint control block
AUTO
KNEE
KNEE
M GAMMA
DETAIL
AWB
PRE
A
4 White balance control block
B
R
R
B
WHITE
BLACK
ABB
5 Black balance control block
B
6 ACTIVE button
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
AUTO
EXT
ACTIVE STANDARD
7 STANDARD button
8
Iris/master black control block
MASTER
BLACK
IRIS
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-B150
MENU
SELECT
DISPLAY
ON
qs MENU operation block
OFF
MENU
CANCEL ENTER
a Shutter control block
B ECS (Extended Clear Scan) button (amber
illumination)
1
2
3
Press and illuminate the button to set the
camera to ECS mode. The current ECS
frequency is shown on the display of the menu
operation block for a few seconds. In ECS
mode, the ECS frequency is adjusted with the
menu select knob (rotary encoder).
SHUTTER
ECS
S-EVS
C S-EVS (Super EVS) button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to set the
camera to S-EVS mode. The current S-EVS
value is shown on the display of the menu
operation block for a few seconds. In S-EVS
mode, the S-EVS value is adjusted with the
menu select knob (rotary encoder).
A SHUTTER button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to set the
camera to Shutter mode. The current shutter
speed is shown on the display of the menu
operation block for a few seconds. In Shutter
mode, the shutter speed is adjusted with the
menu select knob (rotary encoder).
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 127
Notes
B KNEE control
7
• When you change the shutter speed, ECS
frequency or S-EVS value in the corresponding
mode, the menu block display shows it for a
few seconds.
• When this unit is in RM Configuration Menu
mode, the shutter speed, ECS frequency and
S-EVS value cannot be adjusted.
The control is specified at the factory to adjust
the master knee point. However, you can use
the RM Configuration menu to change the
function that is adjusted with this control.
C M GAMMA (master gamma) control
The control is specified at the factory to adjust
the master gamma. However, you can use the
RM Configuration menu to change the function
that is adjusted with this control.
b Filter control block
D DETAIL control
The control is specified at the factory to adjust
the detail level. However, you can use the RM
Configuration menu to change the function that
is adjusted with this control.
1 2 3 4 5
A B C D E
CC
1
2
3
4
ND
Note
FILTER
The adjustment mode of the above three
controls is specified at the factory as Relative
mode, which can be changed to Absolute mode
using the RM Configuration menu. The center
click position of each control is the reference
position in Relative mode. The adjustment range
in Relative mode is also selected using the
menu.
A ND (ND filter) indicators
The indicator corresponding to the currently
selected ND filter illuminates.
B ND (ND filter select) button
Press and illuminate the button when it is not lit
(Filter camera control mode) to enable filter
selection from this unit. When this button is
illuminated, the ND filter cyclically changes in
the sequence of 1 t 2 t 3 t 4 t 5 t 1 t
... each time it is pressed.
d White balance control block
1
2
3
4
5
C CC (color temperature conversion filter)
indicators
The indicator that corresponds to the currently
selected CC filter is illuminated.
D CC (color temperature conversion filter select)
AWB
PRE
A
B
button
R
B
WHITE
Press and illuminate the button when it is not lit
(Filter camera control mode) to enable filter
selection from this unit. When this button is
illuminated, the CC filter cyclically changes in
the sequence of A t B t C t D t E t A t
... each time it is pressed.
A WHITE (white balance) controls
Adjusts the R/B white balance. The adjustment
mode of these controls is specified at the factory
as Relative mode, which can be changed to
Absolute mode using the RM Configuration
menu. See ‘Settings on the RM Configuration
Menu’.
Notes
• Once you press any of the filter select buttons,
both buttons illuminate. The illumination is
switched off when filter selection is made on
the camera.
• The choice of filters that can be selected
depends on the camera being used. For
available filters, refer to the Operation Manual
of the camera.
• For a camera with four filters, you can change
the function of this button to skip 5 or E and
switch from 4 to1 or from D to A using the RM
Configuration menu. However, when the
connected camera has an automatic filter-
detection facility, setting with the RM
Configuration menu is not required.
B A (memory A) button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to obtain the
white balance setting stored in memory A of the
camera (Memory A mode). When this button is
illuminated, adjustments made to the white
balance are stored in memory A. Press the
button again to release Memory A mode.
C B (memory B) button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to obtain the
white balance setting stored in memory B of the
camera (Memory B mode). When this button is
illuminated, adjustments made to the white
balance are stored in memory B. Press the
button again to release Memory B mode.
D AWB (auto white balance) button (red
illumination)
c Paint control block
Press to start automatic adjustment of the
selected items. The button is illuminated during
adjustment and this is turned off when
adjustment is complete. If you press the button
while it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment
is canceled and the button flashes. To stop it
flashing, press the button again.
1
2
3
4
AUTO
KNEE
KNEE
M GAMMA
DETAIL
E PRE (preset) button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to fix the white
balance to 3200K (Preset mode). Press the
button again to release Preset mode.
A AUTO KNEE button (amber illumination)
This button is specified at the factory to turn the
auto knee function on and off. Press and
illuminate the button to turn the auto knee
function on. However, you can use the RM
Configuration menu to change the function that
is turned on/off with this button
Note
In Preset mode, manual adjustment with the
WHITE controls and automatic adjustment with
the AWB button are both disabled. When the
adjustment mode of the WHITE controls is
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 128
specified as Absolute mode, the Memory A, B
and AWB buttons are disabled.
h Iris/master black control block
7
1
2
3
4
e Black balance control block
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
AUTO
EXT
1
2
ABB
5
6
R
B
BLACK
MASTER
BLACK
A BLACK (black balance) controls
IRIS
These controls are specified at the factory to
adjust the R/B black balance. Using the RM
Configuration menu, you can change the
function of these controls to adjust the R/B flare
balance. The adjustment mode of these controls
is specified at the factory as Relative mode,
which can also be changed to Absolute mode
using the menu. See ‘Settings on the RM
Configuration Menu’.
A MASTER BLACK control
Manually adjusts the master black level. The
adjustment mode of this control is specified at
the factory as Absolute mode, which can be
changed to Relative mode using the RM
Configuration menu. See ‘Settings on the RM
Configuration Menu’.
B ABB (auto black balance) button (red
illumination)
B EXT (lens extender) indicator (amber
illumination)
Press to automatically adjust the black balance
and black set. The button is illuminated during
adjustment and this is turned off when the
adjustment is completed. If you press this button
when it is illuminated, the automatic adjustment
is canceled, and the button flashes. To stop the
flashing, press the button again.
Lights when the lens extender is in use.
C AUTO button (amber illumination)
Press and illuminate the button to automatically
adjust the iris according to the amount of input
light. If you press the button when it is
illuminated, this is turned off and manual iris
adjustment is enabled.
Note
D IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active)
indicator (green illumination)
When the adjustment mode of the BLACK
controls is specified as Absolute mode,
automatic black balance adjustment with the
ABB button is disabled.
Illuminated when the control mode is set as
FULL or PART mode with the ACTIVE button.
When this indicator is illuminated, iris/master
black controls from this unit are enabled.
E IRIS control
f ACTIVE button (green illumination)
Press to select the control mode for the connected
camera system. Each time you press the button with
the factory setting, the control mode cyclically
switches between FULL, PART, and LOCK modes.
FULL mode: All controls from this unit are enabled
(panel active status). Both this button and the IRIS/
MB ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control
block are illuminated.
PART mode: Controls only from the iris/master black
control block are enabled (iris/master black active
status). This button is not illuminated, but the IRIS/
MB ACTIVE indicator stays lit.
When the AUTO button is not illuminated, you
can adjust the iris manually by turning this
control. When the AUTO button is illuminated
you can fine-adjust the reference value for the
automatic iris adjustment in a range of +/-2 f
stops with this control. The adjustment mode of
this control is specified at the factory as
Absolute mode, which can also be changed to
Relative mode using the RM Configuration
menu. See ‘Settings on the RM Configuration
Menu’.
F Iris gauge
LOCK mode: All controls from this unit are disabled
(lock status). Neither this button nor the IRIS/MB
ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control are
illuminated.
Turn the gauge to set the white line to the most -
frequently used iris position, and it can be used
as the reference for the manual iris adjustment.
Using the RM Configuration menu, the function of this
button can be changed to switch only between FULL
and LOCK modes. The RM Configuration menu
operation is possible in any mode. See ‘Settings on the
RM Configuration Menu’.
i VTR control block
Controls VTR operations.
1
2
3
VTR START/STOP
g STANDARD button (green illumination)
When this button is pressed, it remains illuminated for
several seconds while the camera is initialized to its
standard state. If the button is pressed while
illuminated, the camera reverts to the state before the
button was illuminated.
REW F FWD
STOP PLAY REC REVIEW
4
5
6
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 129
A
B
REW (rewind) button (amber illumination):
Press this button to start a rewind operation. The
button is illuminated.
F FWD (fast forward) button (amber
illumination): Press this button to start a fast-
forward operation. The button is illuminated.
When this switch is pushed in the V direction,
while holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch at
ENTER, the ‘Detail menu’ is selected. The RM
Configuration menu is switched off by pushing
this switch in the v direction.
7
C DISPLAY switch
C START/STOP button (red illumination): Press this
button to start a recording operation. The button
is illuminated. Pressing this button when it is
illuminated stops the VTR recording.
For control of the camera’s menu.
ON: Shows the character display function of the
camera.
OFF: Shows the character display function of
the camera.
D
STOP button: Press to stop a rewind, fast-
forward or playback operation.
PLAY button (amber illumination): Press this
button to start a playback operation. The button
is illuminated.
MENU: Sets the camera into the camera menu
mode.
E
D CANCEL/ENTER switch
To register or cancel a menu item or value
F
REC REVIEW (recording review) button
(amber illumination): Press this button to
execute a recording review operation. The
button is illuminated.
selection.
E Menu select knob (rotary encoder)
In normal operation, the shutter speed, ECS
frequency or S-EVS value can be adjusted with
this knob. In the camera’s menu mode the knob
is used for camera menu operations. On the RM
Configuration menu, turn the knob to select
menu categories, subcategories, set items, set
values and other information on the menu
display.
Notes
• When the START/STOP button is illuminated,
the other buttons in the VTR control block are
deactivated. To activate the other buttons, first
press the START/STOP button to cancel the
Recording mode.
• Some of the VTR control functions of this unit
may be disabled depending on the
combination of camera and VTR. For details,
ask your official Sony representative.
For operations on the RM Configuration menu,
see ‘Settings on the RM Configuration Menu’.
For operations on the camera’s menu, refer to
the Operation Manual of the camera or the
System Manual.
j OUTPUT selector
Selects the output signal from the connected camera.
CAM: Picture output
BARS: Color bar signal
7-12-2 Connector Panel
TEST: Test signals for a video circuit check (the signal
is selected using the RM Configuration Menu). See
‘Settings on the RM Configuration Menu’.
1 CAMERA connector
2 MONITOR connector
k GAIN (master gain) selector
Selects the video gain from three values (LOW, MID,
HIGH) according to the illumination of the subject to be
shot. Normally, these three gain settings are those
chosen in the camera set-up. Alternative gain settings
may be defined by using the configuration menu of the
RM-B150 Operation Panel. See ‘Settings on the RM
Configuration Menu’.
l MENU operation block
1
2
CAMERA MONITOR
MENU
SELECT
DISPLAY
ON
OFF
MENU
CANCEL ENTER
3
4
5
A Menu display (8 columns)
In normal operation mode, the display
illuminates to show the shutter speed, ECS
frequency or S-EVS value only when the shutter
control block is operated. When you select the
RM Configuration menu, the display shows
menu items, set values, and various information
depending on operations.
a CAMERA connector (8-pin)
Connect to the camera using the supplied remote
cable.
B RM Configuration switch
b MONITOR connector (BNC)
Connect to a color monitor to observe the signal from
the camera.
Selects the RM Configuration menu. When this
switch is pushed in the V direction, the ‘Basic
menu’ is selected.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 130
Settings on the RM Configuration Menu
The RM-B150 is provided with an RM Configuration
Menu mode. This enables you to select and adjust the
function of the buttons and controls on the panel and
to check various information. At the beginning of an
RM Configuration menu operation, select ‘Basic menu’
or ‘Detail menu’ and proceed with operations as
desired.
• Values set on the RM Configuration menu are stored
in memory when you exit the menu operation. Be sure
to exit the operation before turning the power off.
7
Basic Menu (An underlined item under ‘Setting’
indicates the factory setting.)
Cate-
gory
Subcategory Item Setting
Contents
Operation
For menu operations, use the menu operation block of
the unit to start the menu operation.
To select the Basic menu
Push the RM Configuration switch in the V direction.
The menu display shows ‘Cbl Comp’ (the first category
of the Basic menu).
Sets the cable
length for the
cable compen-
sation circuit
10m,
50m,
100m
Cbl
–
–
Len
Comp
B r ig h t
Sets the bright-
10 to ness of the
99 (50) LEDs on the
control panel
LED
To select the Detail menu
Push the RM Configuration switch in the V direction
while holding the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward
ENTER. The menu display shows ‘Mode Set’ (the first
category of the Detail menu).
Sets the bright-
10 to
–
–
–
Disp
Lvl
ness of the
99 (50)
menu display
Note
Sets the sound
10 to
The RM Diag category of the Detail menu is used to
display various information, to check operations and
reset the menu. For items for which the operation
procedure differs, the procedure is discussed in the
corresponding ‘Contents’ column.
volume of the
99 (50)
buzzer
Buzzer
Turns buzzer
Out On, Off output on and
off
To make settings on the menu
1. Turn the menu select knob until the required
category appears on the display.
Example: Mode Set t ... t VR Setup
2. Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER to
register your selection made in step 1. The first
subcategory of the selected category appears.
Example: Knee
If there is no subcategory belonging to the selected
category, the first setting (or display) item of that
category appears on the display (proceed to step
5).
3. Turn the menu select knob until the desired
subcategory appears on the display.
Example: Knee t ... t Iris
4. Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER to
register your selection made in step 3. (Pushing
toward CANCEL reverses the operation.) The first
setting item of the selected subcategory and its
current setting appear.
Example: Ctrl: Abs
5. Turn the menu select knob until the desired setting
(or display) item appears on the display.
Example: Ctrl: Abs t ... t Min : Cls
For a setting item, make your setting.
6. Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER to
register your setting made in step 5.
7. Turn the menu select knob until the desired
category appears on the display.
Example: Min : Cls t ... t Min : 22
8. Push the CANCEL/ENTER switch toward ENTER to
register your setting made in step 7. (Pushing
toward CANCEL cancels the setting in step 7.) To
continue setting items, repeat steps 5 to 8.
To end the menu operation
Push the RM Configuration switch in the v direction.
Notes
• If an operation has not been made in Menu mode
after one minute, the menu automatically exits.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 131
7-13. RM-B750, Hand-held Remote Control Unit
7
7-13-1 Operation Panel
3 PANEL ACTIVE button
4 STANDARD button
5 Spare button
6 Test signal output select buttons
7 CLOSE button
8 VTR START/STOP button
9 VTR playback
2 MEMORY STICK lamp
1 Memory Stick slot
Rubber cap
control buttons
PANEL STANDARD
ACTIVE
TEST
BARS
CLOSE
VTR
START/STOP
MEMORY
STICK
ABB
AWB
WHITE
BLACK
MONITOR
FUNCTION
VF DISP
MAINTENANCE
VF MENU
SCENE
CANCEL
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
AUTO
IRIS
MASTER
BLACK
PAINT
ENTER
EXT
IRIS
ALARM
MENU SELECT
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT RM-B750
qa Menu operation block
qd White balance/black
balance control block
q; ALARM indicator
qs Iris/master black control block
a Memory Stick slot
ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control
block go dark.
Using the RM Configuration menu under the
Maintenance menu, the function of this button can be
changed to switch only between FULL and LOCK
modes. The RM Configuration menu operation is
possible in any mode.
Insert a Memory Stick to store setting data, such as
reference files and scene files of the video camera or
camera control unit.
b MEMORY STICK (Memory Stick access) lamp
The lamp shows the status of the Memory Stick.
Off: No Memory Stick is inserted.
Lit in green: There is a Memory Stick in the slot. In this
condition, you can safely eject the Memory Stick.
Lit in red: Data are being read/written. If you eject the
Memory Stick in this condition, the data are not
guaranteed. All the data may be lost.
d STANDARD button
When you press this button, the video camera is
initialized to its standard state, and the button lights for
several seconds. If you press the button while lit, the
video camera retrieves the state before the button was
lit.
c PANEL ACTIVE button
Press to select the control mode for the connected
camera system. Each time you press the button with
the factory setting, the control mode cyclically
switches among FULL, PART, and LOCK modes.
FULL mode: All controls from this unit are enabled
(panel active status). Both this button and the IRIS/
MB ACTIVE indicator in the iris/master black control
block light.
PART mode: Controls only from the iris/master black
control block are enabled (iris/master black active
status). This button goes dark, but the IRIS/MB
ACTIVE indicator stays lit.
e Spare button
For future use.
f Test signal output select buttons
Press and light up one of these buttons to activate the
test signal generator of the video camera and send the
respective signals.
TEST: To send a signal to test the video circuits. You
can select the kind of the test signal to be output
using the RM Configuration menu under the
Maintenance menu.
BARS: To send a color bar signal
LOCK mode: All controls from this unit are disabled
(lock status). Both this button and the IRIS/MB
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 132
Note
k Menu operation block
7
The BARS button takes priority to the TEST button. If
the BARS button is lit, press the button to turn it dark
before pressing the TEST button.
1 RM menu select/camera menu set buttons
2 LCD/touch panel
g CLOSE button
Press and light the button to close the iris. To release
the close mode, press the button again so that it goes
dark.
MONITOR
FUNCTION
VF DISP
h VTR START/STOP button
Press and light up this button to start a recording
operation. When you press the button when lit, it goes
dark, and recording stops. Using the RM Configuration
menu under the Maintenance menu, you can assign
the CALL button function to this button. In this case,
press to send a call signal to the video camera, on
which the CALL button lights. The tally lamps on the
camera and the red tally lamp on the camera control
unit light when not lit, or go dark when lit. When the
CALL button on the video camera is pressed, the
button on this unit lights and a buzzer sounds.
MAINTENANCE
VF MENU
SCENE
CANCEL
PAINT
ENTER
MENU SELECT
i VTR playback control buttons
Controls VTR playback operations.
s (stop) button
Press to stop a rewind, fast-forward or playback
operation.
j (rewind) button
Press and light this button to start a rewind operation.
G (play) button
Press and light this button to start a playback
operation.
J (fast forward) button
Press and light this button to start a fast-forward
operation.
7 (recording review) button
Press and light this button to execute a recording
review operation.
3Control knobs
A RM menu select/camera menu set buttons
MONITOR: When this button is unlit, you can
select the menus of this unit using the other
buttons (RM Menu mode in which the
functions indicated with white letters for the
buttons are valid). Press and light this button
to display the video signal (SDTV signal only)
from the connected camera on the LCD. This
also permits the menus of the camera to be
operated from this unit (the functions
indicated with blue letters for the buttons and
the leftmost control knob are valid).
FUNCTION/VF DISP (viewfinder display):
With the MONITOR button unlit, the Function
menu of this unit appears on the LCD when
you press and light this button. With the
MONITOR button lit, the character display of
the camera is turned on when you press and
light this button.
Notes
• When the VTR START/STOP button is lit, these
buttons are deactivated. To activate the buttons, first
press the VTR START/STOP button to cancel
Recording mode.
• A part of the VTR control functions of this unit may be
disabled depending on the combination of camera
and VTR. For details, ask your Sony dealer.
MAINTENANCE/VF MENU (viewfinder menu):
With the MONITOR button unlit, the
Maintenance menu of this unit appears on the
LCD when you press and light this button.
With the MONITOR button lit, the unit enters
Camera Menu mode when you press and light
this button. The main menu of the camera
appears on the LCD.
SCENE/CANCEL: With the MONITOR button
unlit, the Scene File menu of this unit appears
on the LCD when you press and light this
button. With the MONITOR button lit, you can
cancel the setting of the camera menu item
selected on the LCD by pressing this button.
PAINT/ENTER: With the MONITOR button unlit,
the Paint menu of this unit appears on the
LCD when you press and light this button.
With the MONITOR button lit, you can register
the setting of the camera menu item selected
on the LCD by pressing this button. When
none of the buttons are lit, the status display
is obtained.
j ALARM indicator
Flashes or lights in red when trouble occurs in the
camera system and the self-diagnostic function
activates at the video camera or the camera control
unit.
B LCD/touch panel
Normally displays the statuses. When you press
and light the MONITOR button, it displays the
video signal from the connected camera (SDTV
signal only. HDTV signal will not be displayed.).
In RM Menu or Camera Menu mode, the
selected menu is displayed to permit you to
operate the menu.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 133
C Control knobs (rotary encoders)
In RM Menu mode, adjust the selected items on
the touch panel. In Camera Menu mode, select
and adjust the menu items using the leftmost
knob.
dark when adjustment is completed. If you press
this button when lit, the automatic adjustment is
canceled, and the button flashes. To stop the
flashing, press the button again.
7
B ABB (auto black balance) button
Press to automatically adjust the black balance
and black set. The button lights during
adjustment and goes dark when adjustment is
completed. If you press this button when lit, the
automatic adjustment is canceled, and the
button flashes. To stop the flashing, press the
button again.
l Iris/master black control block
4 IRIS/MB ACTIVE
indicator
5 MASTER BLACK
control
1 AUTO IRIS
button
IRIS/MB
ACTIVE
AUTO
IRIS
MASTER
BLACK
Note
When the adjustment mode of the BLACK
controls is specified as Absolute mode,
automatic black balance adjustment with ABB
button is disabled.
2 EXT lens extender
EXT
IRIS
3 IRIS control
C WHITE (white balance) controls
Adjust the R/B white balance. The adjustment
mode of these controls is specified at the factory
as Relative mode, which can be changed to
Absolute mode using the RM Configuration
menu under the Maintenance menu.
D BLACK (black balance) controls
A AUTO IRIS button
Press and light the button to automatically adjust
the iris according to the amount of input light. If
you press the button when lit, it goes dark, and
manual iris adjustment is enabled.
Adjust the R/B black balance. The adjustment
mode of these controls is specified at the factory
as Relative mode, which can be changed to
Absolute mode using the RM Configuration
menu under the Maintenance menu.
B EXT (lens extender) indicator
Lights when the lens extender is used on the
connected camera.
C IRIS control
When the AUTO IRIS button is not lit, you can
adjust the iris manually by turning the control.
When the AUTO IRIS button is lit, you can fine-
adjust the reference value for automatic iris
adjustment in a range of 2f with this control.
The adjustment mode of this control is specified
at the factory as Absolute mode, which can also
be changed to Relative mode using the RM
Configuration menu under the Maintenance
menu.
7-13-2 Connector Panel
1 CAMERA connector
2 MONITOR connector
D IRIS/MB ACTIVE (iris/master black active)
indicator
Lights when the control mode is set as FULL or
PART mode with the PANEL ACTIVE button.
When this indicator is lit, iris/master black
controls from this unit are enabled.
E MASTER BLACK control
Cover fixing screw
Manually adjusts the master black level. The
adjustment mode of this control is specified at
the factory as Relative mode, which can be
changed to Absolute mode using the RM
Configuration menu under the Maintenance
menu.
a CAMERA connector (8-pin)
Connect to the camera using the supplied remote
control cable.
m White balance/black balance control block
b MONITOR connector (BNC)
Connect to a color monitor to observe the signal from
the camera.
1 AWB button
2 ABB button
ABB
AWB
WHITE
3 WHITE controls
BLACK
4 BLACK controls
A AWB (auto white balance) button
Press to automatically adjust the white balance.
The button lights during adjustment and goes
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 134
7-14. HDVF-20A, HD Electronic Viewfinder
7
7-14-1 Appearance
1 Plug
Viewfinder cable
2 Stopper
3 Tally indicator (rear)
Microphone holder
Eyecup
4 Diopter
adjustment
ring
5 Tally indicator (front)
6 PEAKING control
7 CONTRAST control
PEAKING
CONTRAST
BRIGHT
8 BRIGHT control
DISPLAY
ASPECT
ZEBRA
ON
OFF
TALLY
HIGH
OFF
9 TALLY switch
MOMENT
LOW
q; ZEBRA switch
qa DISPLAY/ASPECT switch
a Plug
e Tally indicator (front)
Connect to the VF connector on the camera.
Lights up when the camera receives a tally control
signal. Set the TALLY switch i to OFF when not in use.
The brightness can also be adjusted with the TALLY
switch i.
b Stopper
Prevents the viewfinder from coming off the camera
when it is slid from side to side.
f PEAKING control
Turning this control clockwise adjusts the picture
sharpness, and makes focusing easier. This control
has no effect on the output signals of the camera.
c Tally indicator (rear)
Lights up when the camera receives a tally control
signal. This indicator can be covered when not in use.
g CONTRAST control
d Diopter adjustment ring
Adjusts the contrast of the screen. This control has no
effect on the output signals of the camera.
Allows for optimal focus adjustment.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 135
h BRIGHT control
Adjusts the brightness of the screen. This control has
no effect on the output signals of the camera.
OFF: The zebra pattern disappears.
MOMENT: A zebra pattern appears and stays for
about 5 seconds.
7
i TALLY switch
Controls the tally indicator e located on the front of the
viewfinder.
HIGH: The tally indicator brightness is set to high.
OFF: The tally indicator is disabled.
LOW: The tally indicator brightness is set to low.
k DISPLAY/ASPECT switch
Turns the marker indication on and off, and switches
between 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios for viewfinder
screen display.
DISPLAY: When the marker indication is enabled with
the camera, the marker indication on the viewfinder
screen turns on and off every time you push the
switch up to this position.
j ZEBRA (zebra pattern) switch
Controls the zebra pattern display on the viewfinder
screen as follows:
ASPECT: Each push of the switch down to this position
toggles the mask display on and off.
ON: A zebra pattern appears and stays.
7-15. HDVF-700A, HD Electronic Viewfinder
7-15-1 Appearance
7 Green tally lamps
8 BRIGHT control
1 PEAKING control
9 Lock lever
2 PEAKING switch
3 Friction adjustment knob
q; CONTRAST control
qa TALLY ON/OFF switch
qs BATT indicator
4 Lift-lock release knob
qd Red tally lamps
5 POWER switch
6
indicator
Front
Rear
qf External tally lamp
qg External tally dimmer control
Bottom
qh CAMERA connector
qj Mounting wedge
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 136
*1
a PEAKING control
n External tally lamp
7
When the PEAKING switch b is set to ON, this control
can be used to sharpen the edges in the picture.
Turning the control clockwise will increase the
sharpness. The peaking can be adjusted from 0 to 18
dB.
Lights up red in response to a red tally signal. Can be
used to display the camera number by attaching one
of the supplied number plates (0 through 9).
o External tally dimmer control
Used to adjust the brightness of the external tally lamp.
Use a screwdriver to turn the control clockwise to
increase the brightness, or counterclockwise to dim
the lamp.
b PEAKING switch
When this switch is set to ON, peaking can be adjusted
using the PEAKING control a. When the switch is set
to OFF, the PEAKING control a is disabled, and the
peaking value will be 0 dB.
p CAMERA connector (D-sub 25-pin)
Used to connect to the camera’s viewfinder connector.
c Friction adjustment knob
Used to adjust the amount of friction in the tilting
mechanism.
q Mounting wedge
To attach the viewfinder to a camera, the mounting
wedge is inserted into the V-shaped groove on the top
of the camera.
d Lift-lock release knob
The viewfinder height can be adjusted while pulling
this knob. By releasing the knob after adjusting the
height to the standard (low), middle position, or top
position, the viewfinder will remain fixed at that height.
*1 These controls have no effect on the camera’s video output
signals.
*2 The brightness of these lamps can be adjusted using
controls inside the viewfinder body.
e POWER switch
Turns the power supply from the camera to the
viewfinder on and off.
f
(attention) indicator
This indicator lights when the camera detects certain
conditions. The particular conditions which cause the
indicator to light up are set by the camera.
For information on how to set up and verify the
conditions under which the ! indicator will light, refer to
the manual for the camera being used.
*2
g Green tally lamps
Light up when the camera receives a green tally signal.
*1
h BRIGHT (brightness) control
Used to adjust the picture brightness.
i Lock lever
This lever is used to lock the viewfinder into a desired
angle. The angle is locked when the lever is pushed
toward the camera lens. When the lever is pulled
toward the back of the camera, the angle can be
adjusted. The tilt mechanism will resist movement with
the amount of friction set by the friction adjustment
knob c.
*1
j CONTRAST control
Used to adjust the picture contrast.
k TALLY ON/OFF switch
Controls the external tally lamp n. When set to ON, the
external tally lamp will operate. When set to OFF, the
lamp will not operate (will not light in response to a tally
signal).
l BATT (battery) indicator
This indicator blinks when the voltage output of the
camera battery drops. When the battery reaches a
point that it may no longer be used, the indicator will
light up. To prevent camera shutdown due to the
battery running down, change the battery as soon as
possible after this indicator begins blinking.
The threshold battery voltage value to make this
indicator begin blinking is set by the camera. For
details, refer to the manual for the camera.
*2
m Red tally lamps
Light up when the camera receives a red tally signal.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 137
7-16. HDVF-C700W/C750W, HD Electronic Viewfinder
7
7-16-1 Appearance
The figure illustrates the HDVF-C750W. The parts of
the HDVF-C750W and the HDVF-C700W have
basically the same functions.
1 POWER switch
(attention) indicator
2
3 Red tally lamps
4 BRIGHT control
5 Friction adjustment/lock lever
6 CONTRAST control
7 PEAKING control
8 BATT indicator
9 Green tally lamps
q; Lift-lock release knob 1
Front
Rear
qa External tally lamp
qs External tally dimmer control
qd TALLY ON/OFF switch
qf Blanking marker ON/OFF switch
qg Tally dimmer switch
qh Lift-lock release knob 2
qj CAMERA connector
qk Clamper
ql Mounting wedge
*1
a POWER switch
d BRIGHT (brightness) control
Turns the power supply from the camera to the
viewfinder on and off.
Adjusts the picture brightness.
e Friction adjustment/lock lever
b
(attention) indicator
Adjusts the amount of friction in the tilting mechanism.
Also, locks the viewfinder into a desired angle. The
angle is locked when the lever is pushed toward the
camera lens. When the lever is pulled toward the back
of the camera, the tilting mechanism can be adjusted.
This indicator lights when the camera detects certain
conditions. The particular conditions which cause the
indicator to light up are set up by the camera.
For information on how to set up and verify the
conditions under which the indicator will light, refer to
the manual for the camera being used.
*1
f CONTRAST control
Adjusts the picture contrast.
c Red tally lamps
Light up when the camera receives a red tally signal.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 138
*1
g PEAKING control
7
Sharpens the edges in the picture. Turning the control
clockwise increases the sharpness. The peaking can
be adjusted from off to 16 dB.
h BATT (battery) indicator
This indicator blinks when the voltage output of the
camera battery drops. When the battery reaches a
point that it may no longer be used, the indicator will
light up. To prevent camera shut down due to the
battery running down, change the battery as soon as
possible after this indicator begins blinking.
The threshold battery voltage value to make this
indicator begin blinking is set by the camera. For
details, refer to the manual for the camera.
i Green tally lamps
Light up when the camera receives a green tally signal.
j Lift-lock release knob 1 (HDVF-C750W only)
Adjust the viewfinder height using lift-lock release
knob 2 p together with this knob.
k External tally lamp
Lights up red in response to a red tally signal. Can be
used to display the camera number by attaching one
of the supplied number plates (0 through 9).
l External tally dimmer control
Adjusts the brightness of the external tally lamp. Use a
screwdriver to turn the control counterclockwise to
increase the brightness, or clockwise to dim the lamp.
m TALLY ON/OFF switch
Controls the external tally lamp k. When set to ON, the
external tally lamp will operate. When set to OFF, the
lamp will not operate (will not light in response to a tally
signal).
n Blanking marker ON/OFF switch
Turns the display of the blanking marker on and off.
o Tally dimmer switch
Adjusts the brightness of the red tally lamps c, the
green tally lamps i, the (attention) indicator b, and
the BATT (battery) indicator h on the front panel.
p Lift-lock release knob 2 (HDVF-C750W only)
Adjust the viewfinder height using lift-lock release
knob 1 j together with this knob.
q CAMERA connector (HDVF-C750W: Round type
20-pin, HDVF-C700W: D-sub 25-pin)
HDVF-C750W: Connect to the camera’s viewfinder
connector using the supplied connecting cable.
HDVF-C700W: The CAMERA connector is on the
bottom of the viewfinder. Connect to the camera’s
viewfinder connector.
r Clamper (HDVF-C750W only)
Clamps the supplied connecting cable.
s Mounting wedge
To attach the viewfinder to a camera, the mounting
wedge is inserted into the V-shaped groove on the top
of the camera.
*1 These controls have no effect on the camera’s video output
signals.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 139
7-17. CA-905L, Large Lens Adaptor
7
7-17-1 Lens Attachment Section
(Front) and Connectors
BKP-9057 Viewfinder
Saddle (not supplied)
qa Lens connector
q; REMOTE cable
9 CA cable
Lens mouth
8 Accessory bracket
1 Lens lock
7 Number plate holder
2 Lens lock
holding knob
3 Lens connector
4 Cable Clamp
5 Lens mode switch
6 CCU connector
a Lens lock
Secures the lens by the tongue-like protrusion at the
lens bottom.
i CA (camera adaptor) cable (fiber connector):
LEMO type
Connect to the CCU connector on the camera adaptor.
b Lens lock holding knob
Secures the lens lock. Turn clockwise to tighten, and
counterclockwise to loosen.
j REMOTE cable (8-pin)
Connect to the REMOTE connector on the camera
adaptor.
c Lens connector (36-pin)
k Lens connector (12-pin)
Connect to the connector on the lens.
Connect to the LENS connector of the camera.
d Cable clamp
Secures the camera cable. The diameter of the cable
with a diameter of 8 to 15 mm should be used with the
cable clamp.
e Lens mode switch
Selects one of the two lens communication modes.
During normal operation, set to NORMAL. During use
of a serial communication lens, set to SERIAL.
f CCU (camera control unit) fiber connector:
LEMO type
Connects through an optional fiber cable to the
CAMERA connector on the CCU.
g Number plate holder
Fit the supplied number plates.
h Accessory bracket
Attach an optional accessory, such as a BKP-7911/
7912 Script Holder.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 140
7-17-2 Camera-mounting Section (Inner Base) and the Optional BKP-9057
7
Viewfinder Saddle
1 VF (viewfinder)
connector
2 Viewfinder mount
3 Viewfinder release
button
q; Camera mount
4 Pan-lock lever
9 Camera mount
release lever
5 VF connecting cable
8 Camera mount
slide lever
7 Number plate holder
6 Saddle lock knob
a VF (viewfinder) connector
Connect to the camera connector on a viewfinder.
7-17-3 Rear control panel
CA-905L (during use with the HDC-950/930 only) with
rear-panel sticker attached
b Viewfinder mount
Attach the viewfinder.
POWER
R
2
G
B
RET RET
1
3
H-POSI
WIDTH
V-POSI
FILTER LOCAL
4
1
5
c Viewfinder release button
Push this button to disengage the viewfinder
ND
C
HEIGHT
STORE
CORSOR
B
D
A
E
1
2
3
ON
CC
VF
UP
SCREEN
SIZE
CENTER SAFETY
MARKER ZONE
ON
SCAN
16:9
TALLY
ON
DISPLAY
ON
MENU SELECT
VF DETAIL
ON
ON
MARKER
ON
d Pan-lock lever
OFF
MENU
3 Assignable
switch
OFF
OFF
4:3
OFF
OFF
CANCEL ENTER
OFF
Turn counterclockwise to tighten the viewfinder. Turn
clockwise to loosen the viewfinder.
2 SCREEN SIZE MARKER switch
1 VF SCAN switch
e VF connecting cable (supplied with the BKP-
9057) (20-pin)
Connects to the VF connector (20-pin) on the camera.
a VF SCAN (viewfinder scan) switch
Selects the aspect ratio of the viewfinder screen.
16:9: 16:9 aspect ratio
f Saddle lock knob
Locks the saddle so it does not topple down. Turn
counterclockwise to tighten the saddle, or clockwise to
loosen it.
4:3: 4:3 aspect ratio
b SCREEN SIZE MARKER switch
Selects the screen size marker on the viewfinder
screen.
g Number plate holder
Fit the supplied number plates.
ON (
): Display area is bounded by two dark
margins.
h Camera mount slide lever
Pull this lever to slide the camera mount forward and
backward.
ON(
): Display area is bounded by two white lines.
OFF: No marker is displayed.
c Assignable switch
i Camera mount release lever
A function specified by menu setting on the HDC-950/
930 can be assigned to this switch.
To remove the camera from the unit, push this lever
while pushing the safety lever (on the left) rightward.
j Camera mount
Fit the camera. Slide to the front and rear.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 7 Location and Function of Parts and Controls 141
8-1. HDC-900/950/930 and HKC-T950, HD Color Video Camera and HD
CCD Black Adaptor
8
8-1-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
HDC-900 Connector Layout
1
1
1
q;
6
43 9qk7
8
qa
qh
qa
qg
1
5 qf qs qd
1
HDC-950/930 Connector Layout
qa
1
7
9
qj
2
*4
qk
qd
ql
q;
qf
5
qh
8
36
qg
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 143
HKC-T950 Connector Layout
8
wa
ws
wf
wd
wa
w;
qg
ws
wg
wd
Input/Output Signals
g RET CONTROL (6P FEMALE)
a CCU connector
Based upon BTA S-004A/005A/006A 1.485 Gbps
serial
Output Signals
b EARPHONE OUT (HDC-950/930)
EARPHONE mini jack
(External view)
No.
Signal
INCOM 1
MIC ON/OFF
I/O
Specifications
c TEST OUT
BNC type 75 Ohms, 1.0 V p-p
1
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON : GND
d PROMPTER OUT *
BNC type 75 Ohms, 1.0 V p-p
OFF : OPEN
2
INCOM 2
MIC ON/OFF
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON : GND
e HD SERIAL DIGITAL OUT
Based upon BTA-S004A
BNC type 75 Ohms, 0.8 V p-p 1.485 Gbps
OFF: OPEN
3
4
5
GND
—
NC
—
No connection
w; VIDEO OUT (HKC-T950)
BNC type 75 Ohms, 1.0 V p-p
RET 1 ON/OFF
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON : GND
OFF : OPEN
Input Signals
6
RET 2 ON/OFF
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON : GND
4 GENLOCK IN* (HDC-950/930)
BNC type 75 Ohms, 1.0 V p-p
OFF : OPEN
h DC OUT (4P FEMALE)
4 RET IN* (HDC-950/930)
BNC type 75 Ohms, 1.0 V p-p
f Not used
1
2
4
3
* Use this connector by selecting PROMPTER OUT,
GENLOCK IN and RET IN signals with the switch on the rear
panel of the HDC-950/930.
PROMPTER OUT signal becomes effective when the camera
is connected to the CCU.
(External view)
GENLOCK IN and RET IN signals become effective when the
camera is used alone.
No.
Signal
I/O
Specifications
1
2
GND
NC
—
GND for POWER
No connection
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 144
l AC OUT (HDC-900))
No.
Signal
I/O
Specifications
8
E
3
4
NC
UNREG
No connection
OUT +12 V dc 500 mA
i REMOTE (8P FEMALE)
L
N
1
2
7
6
5
(External view)
8
3
4
No.
Signal
I/O
Specifications
E
N
L
GND
—
CHASSIS GND
(External view)
UTL (C)
UTL (H)
OUT AC 100 V, 200 V or
below
No
Signal
TX (+)
I/O
Specifications
OUT
1
2
3
4
HDC SERIAL DATA
m DC IN (4P MALE)
TX (–)
RX (+)
RX(-)
HDCU/MSU/RCP/
CNU/VCS
SERIAL DATA
5
6
7
8
TX GND
—
GND for TX
POWER (+)
POWER GND
VIDEO (X)
OUT +26 V, 200 mA (max)
—
—
GND for POWER (+)
75 Ohms, 1.0 V p-p
CHASSIS GND
(External view)
I/O
CHASSIS GND
No
Signal
Specifications
j AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 (3P FEMALE)
1
2
3
4
GND
NC
—
GND for DC (+)
No connection
No connection
NC
2
1
DC (+)
IN +10.5 to 17 V dc
3
n VTR (26P MALE) (HDC-900)
(External view)
B
6
5
A
4
11
3
10
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
17
2
7
9
1
16
21
24
8
15
20
23
22
14
19
1
2
3
AUDIO (G)
AUDIO (X)
AUDIO (Y)
—
IN
IN
–60 dBu, –50 dBu, –40
dBu, -30 dBu, –20 dBu,
selectable High imped-
ance, Balanced
13
18
12
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
(External view)
k INTERCOM CH1/CH2 (5P FEMALE)
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
A
B
1
NC
No connection
VTR CMD GND
GENLOCK
—
GND for VTR CMD
IN Sync 0.6 V p-p, 0 V
dc, Zi = 75 Ohms
2
3
4
GENLOCK GND
G/Y GND
—
—
GND for GENLOCK
GND for G/Y
(External view)
DC (+)
IN 1 Vp-p, 0 V dc, Zo =
75 Ohms
No.
Signal
I/O
Specifications
5
R/P
OUT 1 Vp-p/ 0.35 V p-p,
0 V dc, Zo = 75
Ohms
R
1
2
INCOM MIC (Y)
INCOM MIC (X)
IN –20 dBu (CAR-
BON MIC)
IN
–60 dBu
6
7
R/P GND
—
GND for R/P
R
R
(DYNAMIC MIC)
B/P
OUT 1 Vp-p/ 0.35 V p-p,
0 V dc, Zo = 75
Ohms
B
3
GND (INCOM/
PGM)
—
4
5
INCOM RECEIVE
PGM
OUT 0 dBu
OUT 0 dBu
8
9
B/P GND
—
GND for B/P
B
B
CH1 MIC (X)
OUT –20 dBu, Low
impedance, Bal-
anced
10 CH1 MIC (Y)
OUT
11 CH1/CH2 MIC
GND
—
GND for CH1/CH2
MIC
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 145
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
8
12 NC
13 NC
No connection
No connection
18 RET VIDEO
19 RET VIDEO GND
20 AUDIO
IN 1.0 V p-p, 0 V dc,
Zi = 75 Ohms
—
GND for RET
VIDEO
14 INCOM LINE
IN/ 0.5 V p-p
OUT
IN –6 dBu, 750 Ohms/
1 kHz
15 CH2 MIC (X)
16 CH2 MIC (Y)
OUT –20 dBu, Low
impedance Bal-
anced
OUT
21 RX COMMAND (X)
22 RX COMMAND (Y)
IN RS-422
IN
17 NC
No connection
18 RET VIDEO
IN 1.0 V p-p, 0 V dc, Zi
= 75 Ohms
23 TX COMMAND (X) OUT RS-422
24 TX COMMAND (Y) OUT
19 RET VIDEO GND
20 AUDIO
—
GND for RET VIDEO
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
IN –6 dBu, 750 Ohms/
1 kHz
o LENS (36P FEMALE) (HDC-900))
21 RX COMMAND (X) IN RS-422
22 RX COMMAND (X) IN
18
1
23 TX COMMAND (X) OUT RS-422
24 TX COMMAND (Y) OUT
36
19
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
(External view)
qf VTR (26P MALE) (HDC-950/930)
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
No connection
COMMON 5 V IN No connection
NC No connection
+12 V (LENS) OUT +12 V (at 2 A)
B
6
1
2
3
4
5
NC
5
A
4
11
3
10
15
20
23
17
22
2
7
9
1
16
21
24
8
14
19
13
18
12
LENS DC
GND
—
GND for +12 V (LENS)
(External view)
6
7
8
9
GND (SIG)
NC
—
GND
No connection
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
LENS EXT-1
LENS EXT-2
IN *2
IN *2
IN *2
A
B
1
VTR UNREG
UNREG GND
GENLOCK
IN +10.5 to 17 V dc
–- GND for UNREG
10 LENS EXT-3
IN Sync 0.6 V p-p, 0 V
dc, Zi = 75 Ohms
11 NC LENS AUX OUT ON : GND
OFF : High impedance
2
GENLOCK GND
—
GND for GEN-
LOCK
12 IRIS POSI
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
2 to 7 V
“3.4 0.1 V (F16)”
“6.2 0.1 V (F2.8)”
3
4
G/Y GND
G/Y
—
GND for G/Y
OUT 1 Vp-p, 0 V dc, Zo
= 75 Ohms
13 ZOOM POSI
14 RET 1 ON
15 RET 2 ON
16 FOCUS POSI
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
2 to 7 V
5
R/P
OUT 1 Vp-p/ 0.35 V p-
p, 0 V dc, Zo = 75
Ohms
R
“2 V (WIDE), 7 V (TELE)”
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON : GND
6
7
R/P GND
—
GND for R/P
R
R
OFF : High impedance
B/P
OUT 1 Vp-p/ 0.35 V p-
p, 0 V dc, Zo = 75
Ohms
B
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON : GND
OFF : High impedance
8
9
B/P GND
-
GND for B/P
B
B
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
2 to 7 V
“2 V (MIN), 7 V (∞ )
OUT 2 to 7 V,
CH1 MIC (X)
OUT –20 dBu, Low
impedance, Bal-
anced
10 CH1 MIC (Y)
OUT
17 IRIS CONT
SIG
11 CH1/CH2 MIC
GND
—
GND for CH1/CH2
MIC
“3.4 0.1 V (F16)”
“6.2 0.1 V (F2.8)”
Zo ≤1 kOhms
12 UNREG (+) SENSE
IN
18 IRIS AUTO/
MANU
OUT AUTO : GND
MANU : High imped-
ance
13 UNREG (–) SENSE
IN
Zo ≤1 kOhms
No connection
No connection
14 INCOM LINE
IN/ 0.5 V p-p
OUT
19 NC
20 NC
15 CH2 MIC (X)
16 CH2 MIC (Y)
OUT –20 dBu, Low
impedance Bal-
anced
OUT
21 LENS R TALLY OUT ON : GND
OFF : High impedance
17 NC
No connection
Zo ≤1 kOhms
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 146
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
8
22 EXP POSI-
TION
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
1 to 4 V
4
AUTO SERVO
OUT AUTO : +5 V
MANU : 0 V or
OPEN
1 V : –7.5°
4 V : +7.5°
5
IRIS CONT
OUT +3.4 V (F16) to
+6.2 V (F2.8)
23 RET 3 ON
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON : GND
6
7
UNREG
OUT +10.5 V to +17 V
OFF : High impedance
IRIS POSITION
IN +3.4 V (F16) to
+6.2 V (F2.8)
24 LENS ADRS 0
25 LENS ADRS 1
26 LENS ADRS 2
27 LENS ADRS 3
IN *1
IN *1
IN *1
IN *1
8
9
AUTO/MANU
OUT AUTO IRIS : 0 V
MANUAL IRIS : +5
V
EXTENDER
ON/OFF
IN EX 2 ON : 0 V
EX 0.8 ON : +1.8 V
OFF : +4.8 V
28 EXTENDER 1 OUT ON : GND
ON
OFF : High impedance
29 EXTENDER 2 OUT ON : GND
10 ZOOM
POSITION
IN WIDE : 2 V
TELE : 7 V
ON
OFF : High impedance
30 F DEM (FAR)
IN No connection
11 FOCUS POSI
(/LENS RX)
IN ∞: 7 V
31 INCOM 1
ENG/PRD
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ENG : GND
min. : 2 V
12 (LENS TX)
OUT
PRD : High impedance
32 INCOM 2
ENG/PROD
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ENG : GND
p VF (25P FEMALE) (HDC-900)
PRD : High impedance
33 INCOM MIC 1
ON
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON : GND
13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
OFF : High impedance
34 INCOM MIC 2
ON
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON : GND
(External view)
OFF : High impedance
35 F CONT SIG
OUT No connection
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
36 F DEM (NEAR) IN No connection
1
Y VIDEO (X)
OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75
Ohms
*1:
Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
2
3
PR VIDEO GND
PR VIDEO (X)
—
GND for PR VIDEO
1 : High impedance
OUT 0.7 V p-p, Zo = 75
Ohms
0 : 0 +0.5 V –0
LENS ADRS 0 (low-order bit)
LENS ADRS 3 (high-order bit )
4
5
PB VIDEO GND
PB VIDEO (X)
—
GND for PB VIDEO
*2:
Zi > 10 kOhms
1 : High impedance
0 : 0 0.5 V
OUT 0.7 V p-p, Zo = 75
Ohms
6
PEAKING
LEVEL
IN 0 to 5 V dc
EX1
EX2
EX3
MODE
7
8
9
+12 V
+12 V
NC
OUT +10.5 to +20 V
OUT +10.5 to +20 V
No connection
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
EXTENDER OFF
EXT-1 (x 1.5) ON
EXT-2 (x 2) ON
EXT-3 (x 2.5) ON
10 S-DATA
IN/ TTL level
OUT
11 R TALLY
OUT ON : +5 V
OFF : 0 V
qg LENS (12P FEMALE) (HDC-950/930, HKC-T950))
12 EFFECT
OUT ON : +5 V
OFF : 0 V
13 NC
No connection
14 Y VIDEO GND
15 S-CK
—
GND for Y VIDEO
OUT TTL level
(External view)
16 BATT IND
OUT ON : +5 V
OFF : 0 V
No
Signal
RET VIDEO
I/O
IN ENABLE : 0 V
DISABLE : +5 V or
Specifications
17 CHASSIS GND
18 G TALLY
—
1
OUT ON : +5 V
OFF : 0 V
ENABLE
OPEN
19 GND (+12 V)
20 GND (+12 V)
21 VF-SEL
—
—
GND for +12 V
GND for +12 V
2
3
VTR START
/STOP
IN ENABLE : 0 V
DISABLE : +5 V or
OPEN
IN BW : 0 V
COLOR : +5 V
GND
—
GND for UNREG
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 147
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
8
22 H EXPAND
OUT ON : GND
OFF : +5 V
5
Pr VIDEO (X)
OUT 0.35 V p-p, Zo =
75 Ohms
23 NC
No connection
No connection
OUT ON : GND
OFF : +5 V
6
7
Pr VIDEO (G)
Pb VIDEO (X)
—
GND for Pr VIDEO
24 NC
OUT 0.35 V p-p, Zo =
75 Ohms
25 V EXPAND
8
9
Pb VIDEO (G)
SDA VF
—
GND for Pb VIDEO
IN/ TTL level
OUT
q VF (20P FEMALE) (HDC-950/930)
10 VD
OUT Negative Pulse
3.0 V p-p, Low
impedance
11 CALL ON
IN ON : L (0 v)
OFF : H (+3 V)
12 VF POWER OFF
OUT ON : H (+5 V)
OFF : L (0 V)
(External view)
13 MAIN POWER
ON/OFF
OUT ON : +8 V
OFF : GND
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
14 SCL VF
OUT TTL level
1
S-DA TA
IN/ TTL level
OUT
15 TALLY GND
16 BACK TALLY
—
GND for TALLY
OUT ON : 5 V
OFF : GND
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NC
No connection
No connection
OUT TTL level
NC
17 PANEL DATA
18 PANEL DATA
19 VF UNREG +
IN RX SERIAL DATA
OUT TX SERIAL DATA
SCK
NC
No connection
No connection
No connection
—
+12 V (+10.5 V to
+17.0 V)
NC
20 GND
—
GND for UNREG
NC
G TALLY
OUT ON : 5 V
qk TRACKER (FEMALE)
OFF : GND
9
NC
No connection
10 NC
No connection
1
8
2
3
4
5
11 NC
No connection
6
7
9
10
12 Y VIDEO
13 VIDEO GND
OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms
11 12 13 14 15
—
GND for VIDEO
16 17 18 19
20
14 Pb VIDEO OUT 0.35 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms
15 Pr VIDEO
16 NC
OUT 0.35 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms
No connection
(External view)
17 R TALLY
OUT ON : 5 V
OFF : GND
No
Signal
TRK R (X)
I/O
Specifications
18 NC
No connection
1
OUT TRACKER
RECEIVE
0 dBu unbalanced
19 UNREG
GND
—
GND for UNREG
2
3
4
TRK R (G)
GND
—
—
GND for TRACKER
R
20 UNREG
OUT +10.5 V to +17 V
r EXT I/O (20P) (HDC-950/930)
GND for UNREG/
TALLY
(UNREG/TALLY)
R TALLY
OUT ON : 5 V (Open
Collector)
11
16
5
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
OFF : 0 V (Open
Collector)
5
6
TRK PGM (G)
UNREG
—
GND for PGM
10
OUT +12 V (+10.5 to
+17.0 V)
(External view)
7
8
9
TRK T (X)
TRK T (Y)
TRK T (G)
IN TRACKER TALK
0 dBu /_20 dBu
High impedance
balanced
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
1
Y VIDEO (X)
OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75
Ohms
IN TRACKER TALK
0 dBu /_20 dBu
High impedance
balanced
2
3
Y VIDEO (G)
—
GND for Y VIDEO
PROMPTER (X)
OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75
Ohms
—
GND for TRACKER
T
4
PROMPTER (G)
—
GND for
PROMPTER
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 148
v INCOM (HKC-T950)
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
8
(5P FEMALE)
(5P MALE)
10 TRK PGM (X)
OUT –20 dBu unbal-
anced
11 NC
No connection
1
5
5
1
12 G TALLY
OUT ON : 5 V (Open
Collector)
2
4
4
2
3
3
OFF : 0 V (Open
Collector)
13 NC
No connection
(External view)
(External view)
14 RX_DATA (0)
IN TRUNK DATA IN,
RS232-C
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
15 RX_DATA (1)
IN TRUNK DATA IN,
RS232-C
1
INCOM MIC (Y)
IN –20 dBu (CAR-
BON MIC)
16 NC
No connection
No connection
2
3
INCOM MIC (X)
IN –60 dBu
17 NC
(DYNAMIC MIC)
18 TX_DATA (0)
OUT TRUNK DATA OUT,
RS232-C
GND (INCOM/
PGM)
—
19 TX_DATA (1)
20 GND
OUT TRUNK DATA OUT,
RS232-C
4
5
INCOM RECEIVE
PGM
OUT 0 dBu
OUT 0 dBu
—
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
w HKC-T950
s FRONT MIC (3P FEMALE) (HDC-950/930)
(20P FEMALE)
2
1
3
7
2
6
1
5
8
4
9
3
12
11 10
17 16 15 14 13
20 19
18
(External view)
(External view)
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
1
CHU MIC (G)
—
–60 dBu, –50 dBu,
–40 dBu
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
1
S DATA
IN/ TTL level
OUT
2
3
CHU MIC (X)
CHU MIC (Y)
IN –30 dBu, –20 dBu,
selectable
2
3
4
NC
No connection
No connection
OUT TTL level
IN High impedance,
Balanced
NC
SCK
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
MANU : 0 V or OPEN
u MIC (HKC-T950)
5
6
7
8
NC
No connection
(3P FEMALE)
(3P MALE)
NC
No connection
NC
No connection
G TALLY
OUT ON : 5 V
OFF : GND
2
1
2
1
9
NC
No connection
3
3
10 NC
No connection
11 NC
No connection
12 Y VIDEO
13 VIDEO GND
14 NC
OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms
(External view)
No Signal
(External view)
—
GND for VIDEO
No connection
No connection
No connection
I/O
Specifications
15 NC
1
2
3
AUDIO (G)
AUDIO (X)
AUDIO (Y)
—
–60 dBu, –50 dBu,
–40 dBu
16 NC
IN –30 dBu, –20 dBu,
selectable
17 R TALLY
OUT ON : 5 V
OFF : GND
IN High impedance,
Balanced
18 NC
No connection
19 UNREG
GND
—
GND for UNREG
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
20 UNREG
OUT +10.5 V to +17 V
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 149
No
Signal
MIC (X)
I/O
Specifications
8
(20P FEMALE)
9
OUT –60 dBu, –50 dBu,
–40 dBu,
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10 MIC (Y)
OUT –30 dBu, –20 dBu,
selectable
10
11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20
11 INCOM/MIC GND
—
GND for INCOM/
MIC,
CHU F, IRIS CONT
(External view)
12 IRIS CONT
13 CHU F
IN +3.4 V (F16) to
+6.2 V (F2.8)
No
Signal
S DATA
I/O
Specifications
IN 0.3 V p-p Positive
pulse
1
IN/ TTL level
OUT
14 INCOM RECEIVE
15 INCOM MIC (X)
IN 0 dBu
2
3
4
NC
No connection
No connection
IN TTL level
OUT –20 dBu (CAR-
BON MIC)
NC
SCK
16 INCOM MIC (Y)
17 CHU H
OUT –60 dBu
MANU : 0 V or OPEN
(DYNAMIC MIC)
5
6
7
8
NC
No connection
IN 150 mV p-p Posi-
tive pulse
NC
No connection
18 VF VIDEO (X)
19 VF VIDEO (G)
IN 180 mV p-p, Zi =
75 Ohms
NC
No connection
G TALLY
IN ON : 5 V
—
GND for VF
OFF : GND
VIDEO,CHU H
9
NC
No connection
20 PGM
IN 0 dBu
10 NC
No connection
21 RX COMMAND (X)
22 RX COMMAND (Y)
IN 340 mV p-p
IN 340 mV p-p
11 NC
No connection
12 Y VIDEO
13 VIDEO GND
14 NC
IN 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Ohms
23 TX COMMAND (X) OUT 340 mV p-p
24 TX COMMAND (Y) OUT 340 mV p-p
—
GND for VIDEO
No connection
No connection
No connection
15 NC
y OPT HEAD (HKC-T950)
16 NC
(26P FEMALE)
17 R TALLY
IN ON : 5 V
OFF : GND
B
6
18 NC
19 NC
20 NC
No connection
No connection
No connection
5
A
11
16
21
24
4
9
17
22
3
8
10
15
20
2
1
14
19
7
13
18
12
23
x CAM BODY (HKC-T950)
(26P MALE)
(External view)
B
6
5
A
4
11
16
21
24
No
Signal
UNREG
I/O
Specifications
3
8
17
22
10
15
20
23
2
9
1
A
B
1
OUT 13 V to 17 V
7
14
19
13
18
12
UNREG GND
OHB H
—
GND for UNREG
IN 0.3 V p-p Positive
pulse
(External view)
2
3
4
OHB H (G)
—
—
GND for OHB H
G VIDEO (G)
G VIDEO (X)
GND for G VIDEO
No
Signal
UNREG
I/O
Specifications
IN 300 mV p-p, Zo =
75 Ohms(100 %)
A
B
1
IN 13 V to 17 V
UNREG GND
OHB H
—
GND for UNREG
5
R VIDEO (X)
IN 300 mV p-p, Zo =
75 Ohms (100 %)
OUT 0.3 V p-p Positive
pulse
6
7
R VIDEO (G)
B VIDEO (X)
—
GND for R VIDEO
2
3
4
OHB H (G)
—
—
GND for OHB H
IN 95 mV p-p, Zo = 75
Ohms (100 %)
G VIDEO (G)
G VIDEO (X)
GND for G VIDEO
8
9
B VIDEO (G)
MIC (X)
—
GND for B VIDEO
OUT 300 mV p-p, Zo =
75 Ohms(100 %)
IN –60 dBu, –50 dBu,
–40 dBu,
5
R VIDEO (X)
OUT 300 mV p-p, Zo =
75 Ohms (100 %)
10 MIC (Y)
IN –30 dBu, -20 dBu,
selectable
6
7
R VIDEO (G)
B VIDEO (X)
—
GND for R VIDEO
11 INCOM/MIC GND
—
GND for INCOM/
MIC,
CHU F, IRIS CONT
OUT 95 mV p-p, Zo = 75
Ohms (100 %)
8
B VIDEO (G)
—
GND for B VIDEO
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 150
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
8
12 IRIS CONT
OUT +3.4 V (F16) to
+6.2 V (F2.8)
18 VF VIDEO (X)
19 VF VIDEO (G)
20 PGM
OUT 180 mV p-p, Zi =
75 Ohms
13 CHU F
OUT 0.3 V p-p Positive
pulse
—
GND for VF
VIDEO,CHU H
14 INCOM RECEIVE
15 INCOM MIC (X)
OUT 0 dBu
OUT 0 dBu
IN –20 dBu (CAR-
BON MIC)
21 RX COMMAND (X) OUT 340 mV p-p
22 RX COMMAND (Y) OUT 340 mV p-p
16 INCOM MIC (Y)
17 CHU H
IN –60 dBu
23 TX COMMAND (X)
24 TX COMMAND (Y)
IN 340 mV p-p
IN 340 mV p-p
(DYNAMIC MIC)
OUT 150 mV p-p Posi-
tive pulse
8-1-2 Wiring Diagrams for Cables
CCA-5 Cable
Black
White
Orange
White
Brown
Red
White
Red
Brown
Brown
8-pin connector (Male)
(Wiring side)
8-pin connector (Male)
(Wiring side)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 151
HDCZ Cable
8
26P CONNECTOR(FEMALE/MALE)
(WIRING SIDE)
Black
White
Yellow
Red
Black
Blue
Red
White
Red
Blue
Red
Brown
Gray
Red
White
Orange
White
Red
Yellow
White
8-1-3 Connection Connectors/Cables
Connections made with the connector panels during
installation or service should be made with the
connectors/complete cable assemblies specified in
the following list, or equivalent parts.
Indication
VTR
CAM BODY
Connection connector/cable
1-564-184-00 Plug, 26P Female or
*3
Cable assembly
HDCZ-A10
Indication
Connection connector/cable
(supplied with HKC-T950, 10 m)
1-823-615-11
HDCZ-A25 (option, 25 m)
1-823-616-11
HDCZ-A50 (option, 50 m)
1-823-617-11
MONITOR
PROMPTER
SERIAL OUT
VIDEO OUT
(BNC)
1-569-370-12 Plug, BNC
OPT HEAD
1-564-183-31 Plug, 26P Male or
(26P FEMALE) Cable assembly
AUDIO IN
MIC IN
(3P FEMALE)
1-508-084-00 XLR, 3P Male or
ITT Cannon XLR-3-12C equivalent
Cable assembly
*3
HDCZ-A10
(supplied with HKC-T950, 10 m)
1-823-615-11
HDCZ-A25 (option, 25 m)
1-823-616-11
HDCZ-A50 (option, 50 m)
1-823-617-11
(supplied with HKC-T950, 0.8 m)
*3
1-823-599-11
MIC IN
(3P MALE)
1-508-083-00 XLR, 3P, Female or
ITT Cannon XLR-3-11C equivalent
Cable assembly
(supplied with HKC-T950, 0.8 m)
DC IN
(4P MALE)
1-508-362-00 XLR, 4P Female or
ITT Cannon XLR-4-11C equivalent,
or
Cable assembly 1-551-577-00
(Supplied with AC-550/550CE)
*3
1-823-599-11
RET CONTROL 1-560-078-00 Plug, 6P Male or
(6P FEMALE)
HIROSE HR10-7PA-6P equivalent
DC OUT
1-566-425-11 Plug, 4P Male or
(4P FEMALE)
HIROSE HR10A-7P-4P equivalent
REMOTE
(8P FEMALE)
1-766-848-11 Plug, 8P Male or
CCA-5 cable assembly (option)
CCA-5-10 (10 m) /CCA-5-3 (3 m) or
REMOTE cable 1-783-372-11
(supplied with RM-B150, 10 m)
*2
INTERCOM
INCOM
(5P FEMALE)
1-508-370-11 XLR, 5P Male or
ITT Cannon XLR-5-12C equivalent
Cable assembly
*1 *2
(supplied with HKC-T950, 0.8 m)
*3
1-823-600-11
TRACKER
HIROSE HR25-9P-20P equivalent
INCOM
(5P MALE)
1-508-363-00 XLR, 5P Female or
ITT Cannon XLR-5-11C equivalent
Cable assembly
(20P FEMALE)
VF
Cable assembly
(20P FEMALE) (supplied with HKC-T950, 0.7 m)
(supplied with HKC-T950, 0.8 m)
1-792-603-21
*3
1-823-600-11
*1 Use of the REMOTE cable enables the operator to monitor
video signals.
*2 If using a cable of length different from that of a standard
length, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service
Center.
*3 Only for HKC-T950.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 152
8-2. HDCU-900, HD Camera Control Unit
8
WF OUT: BNC
0.714 V p-p, 75 Ohms
ENC : 1.0 V p-p
SYNC OUT: BNC
0.3 V p-p, SD SYNC, 75 Ohms
8-2-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
8-2-1-1 BNC connector
HDCU-900
HKCU-902 (1125 analog signal)
RET INPUT (1-4): BNC
1.0 V p-p (picture : 0.7 V, sync : 0.3 V), 75 Ohms
Y/G OUTPUT (1-2): BNC
1.0 V p-p (picture : 0.7 V, sync : 0.3 V), 75 Ohms
PB/B OUTPUT (1-2): BNC
B : 1.0 V p-p (picture : 0.7 V, sync : 0.3 V), 75 Ohms
PB : Picture : 0.35 V, Sync : 0.3 V, 75 Ohms
PR/R OUTPUT (1-2): BNC
R : 1.0 V p-p (picture : 0.7 V, sync : 0.3 V), 75 Ohms
PR : Picture : 0.35 V, Sync : 0.3 V, 75 Ohms
PIX OUT: BNC
1125 digital signal
SERIAL RET INPUT (1-4) : BNC
1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
SMPTE 292M
SERIAL OUTPUT (1-3, MONI): BNC
0.8 V p-p, 75 Ohms, 1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
SMPTE 292M
REFERENCE IN: BNC
0.3 V, tri-level SYNC, 75 Ohms
Or, Black burst
0.286 V p-p, 75 Ohms (for UC)
0.3 V p-p, 75 Ohms (for CE)
1.0 V p-p (picture : 0.7 V, sync : 0.3 V), 75 Ohms
: BNC
SD (525/625) digital signal
SERIAL RET INPUT (1-4): BNC
Component serial signal: 270 Mbps
SMPTE 259M
SERIAL OUTPUT (1-4): BNC
Component serial signal: 0.8 V p-p, 75 Ohms, 270
Mbps
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
HKCU-903 (1125 digital signal)
SERIAL RET INPUT (1-4): BNC
1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
SMPTE 292M
SERIAL OUTPUT (1-3, MONI): BNC
0.8 V p-p, 75 Ohms, 1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE 259M
Analog signal
PIX OUT: BNC
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
WF OUT: BNC
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
Analog signal
SYNC OUT: BNC
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
[SYNC|OUT] : BNC
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
FRAME REFERENCE IN : BNC
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
Black burst
0.286 V p-p, 75 Ohms (for UC)
0.3 V p-p, 75 Ohms (for CE)
FRAME REFERENCE OUT: BNC
THROUGH OUT/0.3 V p-p, FRAME SYNC pulse, 75
Ohms
[SYNC|OUT]: BNC
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
0.3 V p-p, SD SYNC, 75 Ohms selectable
CHARACTER: BNC
525/625 black and white
Picture: 0.5 V, Sync: 0.3 V, 75 Ohms
Others
DIGITAL AUDIO: BNC
AES/EBU format
PROMPTER IN: BNC
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
HKCU-904 (720/60P signal)
SERIAL RET INPUT (1-4): BNC
1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
SMPTE 292M
SERIAL OUTPUT (1-3): BNC
0.8 V p-p, 75 Ohms, 1.485 Gpbs/1.4835 Gbps
SMPTE 292M
SYNC OUT: BNC
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
[SYNC|OUT] : BNC
HKCU-901 (525/625 analog signal)
RET INPUT (1-4): BNC
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
Y/G OUTPUT: BNC
Y : 1.0 V p-p (picture: 0.714 V, sync : 0.286 V), 75
Ohms
G : 0.7 V, 75 Ohms
B-Y/B OUTPUT: BNC
B-Y : 0.7 V p-p, 75 Ohms
(for UC : during 75 % color bar input)
0.525 V p-p, 75 Ohms
(for CE : during 75 % color bar input)
B : 0.7 V, 75 Ohms
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
0.3 V p-p, SD SYNC, 75 Ohms selectable
8-2-1-2 CAMERA connector (optical/electrical
connector)
VIDEO
Y/PB/PR
1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps serial
SMPTE 292M
Y/PB/PR
1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps serial
SMPTE 292M
2ch
2ch
R-Y/R OUTPUT: BNC
R-Y : 0.7 V p-p, 75 Ohms
(for UC : during 75 % color bar input)
0.525 V p-p, 75 Ohms
(for CE : during 75 % color bar input)
R : 0.7 V, 75 Ohms
VBS OUT (1-2): BNC
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
PIX OUT: BNC
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
RET VIDEO
INCOM
MIC
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)
CAMERA COMMAND
PROMPTER
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 153
*2
8-2-1-3 AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2 (XLR 3-pin,
Male)
8
8pin
15pin
MIC GAIN CONT
MIC 1 and 2 ON
L
L
L
H
L
MIC 1 ON
1
2
H
H
MIC 2 ON
3
H
INTERNAL set
*3
(External view)
Specifications
CONT1
CONT2
ASPECT
No.
Signal
L
H
L
H
H
L
SQ (16 : 9)
EC (4 : 3)
1
2
3
MIC OUT (G)
MIC OUT (X)
MIC OUT (Y)
0 dBu/_20 dBu (Selecta-
ble with S402, S403/AT
board)
INTERNAL set
LB (4 : 3)
H
L
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
8-2-1-5 WF REMOTE (D-sub 15-pin, Female)
8-2-1-4 MIC REMOTE (D-sub 15-pin, Female)
8
1
8
1
15
9
15
9
(External view)
(External view)
*4
Recall system
No.
Signal
Specifications
Max. 250 mA
No.
Signal
Specifications
No connection
1
2
3
+5.5 V OUT
TALLY GND
G TALLY OUT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC
NC
NC
NC
GND for TALLY
No connection
No connection
No connection
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
ON (GND) : Max. 30 mA
IN
4
5
6
7
8
9
R TALLY OUT
ON (GND) : Max. 30 mA
IN
RECALL2 (G)
RECALL3 (B)
RECALL1 (R)
RECALL4 (SEQ)
GND
*1
CHU MIC CONT2
AMP CONT1
Refer to the below col-
umn.
*1
Refer to the below col-
umn.
*1
GAIN IN CONT0
Refer to the below col-
umn.
10 NC
No connection
No connection
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
*2
MIC1 GAIN CONT
ON/OFF IN
Refer to the below col-
11 NC
umn
12 RECALL5 (ENC)
13 RECALL6 (R+B)
14 RECALL7 (R+G)
15 RECALL8 (G+B)
GND
GND for +5.5 V
10 TALLY OUT
R/G TALLY OUT
ON (GND) : Max. 30 mA
IN
11 NC
No connection
*4
1735HD/1730HD
12 ASPECT REMOTE L : REMOTE
ON/OFF
No.
Signal
Specifications
*3
13 ASPECT CONT1
Refer to the below col-
1
LINE/FIELD
LINE : 5 V dc
FIELD : 0 V dc
umn.
*3
14 CTL CONT2
Refer to the below col-
2
3
FOUR OUT
FOUR : 0 V dc
umn.
*2
ONE/TWO OUT
ONE : 5 V dc
TWO : 0 V dc
15 MIC2 GAIN CONT
ON/OFF IN
Refer to the below col-
umn.
4
REMOTE 1 OUT
REMOTE : 5 V dc
ENB : 0 V dc
*1 CHU MIC 1/2 AMP GAIN
5
6
7
8
9
RECALL 1 OUT
STORE OUT
RECALL 0 OUT
THREE OUT
GND
RECALL : 5 V dc
STORE : 0 V dc
RECALL : 5 V dc
THREE : 0 V dc
CONT0 CONT1 CONT2 CHU MIC AMP GAIN
H
L
H
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
60 dB
50 dB
40 dB
30 dB
20 dB
H
L
GND for signal
L
10 REMOTE SYNC
11 BOTH OUT
REMOTE SYNC : 5 V dc
BOTH : 0 V dc
H
H
12 CH-1-ON OUT
13 CH-2-ON OUT
CH-1 ON : 0 V dc
CH-2 ON : 0 V dc
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 154
8-2-1-8 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (D-sub 25-pin,
Female)
No.
Signal
Specifications
8
14 CH-3-ON OUT
15 A/B OUT
CH-3 ON : 0 V dc
A : 5 V dc
B : 0 V dc
13
25
1
*4 This is set using the S103-4 and -5 switches on the AT-141
board.
14
4 : ON : Recall system (5 : OFF 1125 SDI/ON 525/625 SDI)
4 : OFF : 1735HD/1730HD
(External view)
Signal Specifications
8-2-1-6 TRUNK LINE (D-sub 9-pin, Female)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENG (R) (X) OUT ENG SYSTEM RECEIVE
1
5
0 dBu BALANCED
ENG (R) (Y) OUT
6
9
ENG (G)
GND for ENG
ENG (T) (X) IN
ENG (T) (Y) IN
PGM1 (X) IN
PGM1 (Y) IN
PGM1 (G) IN
GND
ENG SYSTEM TALK
0 dBu BALANCED
(External view)
No.
Signal
Specifications
–20 dBu/0 dBu
(Selectable with S301/AT
board)
*5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC (DCD IN)
EXT-CMD0-IN (RXD IN)
No connection
*5
*5
*5
EXT-CHD0-OUT (TXD OUT)
GND for AUX
*5
(DTR-OUT)
12 V, 15 kOhms
No connection
10 AUX3
GND
11 R TALLY (X) IN
12 R TALLY (Y) IN
13 GND
ON : 24 Vdc, TTL (H), SHORT
OFF : 0 Vdc, TTL (L), OPEN
*5
(DSR IN)
EXT-CMD1-OUT (RTS OUT)
CHASSIS GND
*5
EXT-CHD1-IN (CTS IN)
14 PROD (R) (X)
OUT
PROD SYSTEM
RECEIVE 0 dBu BALANCED
NC
No connection
*5 This is set using the S1 switch on the AT-141 board.
AT : (AUX)
15 PROD (R) (Y)
OUT
DPR : Set using TRUNK.
16 PROD (G)
GND for PROD
17 PROD (T) (X) IN PROD SYSTEM TALK
8-2-1-7 I/O PORT (D-sub 15-pin, Female)
0 dBu BALANCED
18 PROD (T) (Y) IN
19 PGM2 (X) IN
20 PGM2 (Y) IN
21 PGM2 (G) IN
22 AUX4
–20 dBu/0 dBu
(Selectable with S302/AT
board)
8
1
15
9
23 AUX5
(External view)
Specifications
24 G TALLY (X) IN
25 G TALLY (Y) IN
ON : 24 Vdc, TTL (H), SHORT
OFF : 0 Vdc, TTL (L), OPEN
No. Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
GND
GND/+5 V, OPEN (47 kOhms +5 V
PULL UP)
8-2-1-9 WF MODE (4-pin, Female)
GND/+5 V, OPEN (47 kOhms +5 V
PULL UP)
4
3
1
2
GND/+5 V, OPEN (47 kOhms +5 V
PULL UP)
GND/+5 V, OPEN (47 kOhms +5 V
PULL UP)
(External view)
GND/+5 V, OPEN (47 kOhms +5 V
PULL UP)
No.
Signal
Specifications
GND/+5 V, OPEN (47 kOhms +5 V
PULL UP)
1
SEQ CONT OUT
(G)
OPEN COLLECTOR
+(PNP)/–(NPN)
GND/+5 V, OPEN (47 kOhms +5 V
PULL UP)
(Selectable with COP1/
VDA board)
2
3
4
SEQ CONT OUT
(X)
GND/+5 V, OPEN (47 kOhms +5 V
PULL UP)
*6
STAIR CASE OUT
(X)
STAIR CASE OUT GND for STAIR CASE
(G)
10 OUT1 0/+5 V (1 kOhms)
11 OUT2 0/+5 V (1 kOhms)
12 OUT3 0/+5 V (1 kOhms)
13 OUT4 0/+5 V (1 kOhms)
14 OUT5 0/+5 V (1 kOhms)
15 OUT6 0/+5 V (1 kOhms)
*6 Stair Case signa
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 155
No.
Signal
Specifications
8
7
8
POWER (–) OUT
SPARE
GND for POWER
R
G
B
+1
- 6
DC 0 ±2 V
12
V
8-2-1-11 INTERCOM (5-pin, Female)
1
5
8-2-1-10 RCP/CNU (8-pin, Female)
4
2
3
1
2
7
(External view)
Specifications
8
3
6
4
5
No.
Signal
1
INCOM (T) IN (Y)
–20 dBu
(CARBON MIC)
–60 dBu
(External view)
Signal Specifications
2
INCOM (T) IN (X)
No.
(DYNAMIC MIC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
TX (+)
TX (–)
RX (+)
RX (–)
CCU SERIAL DATA
3
4
INCOM (T) IN (G) GND for INCOM
INCOM (R) OUT
(X)
GND for POWER
Max. 12 dBu
RCP/CNU/BVP/MSU/VCS
SERIAL DATA
5
NC
No connection
TX GND
GND for TX
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
POWER (+) OUT
RCP POWER, +30 V
8-2-2 Cable Wiring Diagram
CCA-5 cable (for RCP/CNU connector)
Black
White
Orange
White
Brown
1
1
2
7
2
7
8
8
3
6
3
6
4
5
4
5
Red
White
Red
Brown
Brown
8-2-3 Connection Connectors
When connecting cables to each connector of the
connector panel during installation or service, connect
the following connectors or equivalent to the tip.
HKCU-901
RET INPUT (1-4)
Y/G OUTPUT
B-Y/B OUTPUT
R-Y/R OUTPUT
VBS OUT (1-2)
PIX OUT
Connector
HDCU-900
Connector/cable
1-564-742-11 PLUG, BNC
or B-B cable assembly
(1.5 m, optional)
REFERENCE IN
PIX OUT
WF OUT
SYNC OUT
WF OUT
SYNC OUT
CHARACTER
DIGITAL AUDIO
PROMPTER IN
HKCU-902
RET INPUT (1-4)
Y/G OUTPUT (1-2)
PB/B OUTPUT (1-2)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 156
Connector
PR/R OUTPUT (1-2)
PIX OUT
Connector/cable
Equivalent
WF REMOTE/MIC REMOTE
8
SYNC OUT
1-506-582-11 D-sub 15-pin,
male
HKCU-903
SYNC OUT
FRAME REFERENCE IN
FRAME REFERENCE OUT
I/O PORT
or JAE DA-CI-J10 equivalent
(D-sub 15-pin, Female)
INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM D-sub 25-pin, male
(D-sub 25-pin, Female) JAE DA-25PF-N equivalent
HKCU-904
SYNC OUT
(BNC)
WF MODE
1-560-155-00 PLUG, 4-pin
male
HDCU-900
1-569-370-12 PLUG, BNC or
(4-pin, Female) (supplied)
SERIAL RET INPUT
(1-4)
SERIAL OUTPUT (1-3,
BELDEN8281 Cable or
RCP/CNU
1-766-848-11 PLUG, 8-pin
male
or CCA cable assembly
MONI)
equivalent
(8-pin, Female)
SERIAL RET INPUT (1-4)
SERIAL OUTPUT (1-4)
(optional)
CCA-5-10 (10 m), CCA-5-3 (3
m)
HKCU-903
SERIAL RET INPUT (1-4)
SERIAL OUTPUT (1-3,
MONI)
INTERCOM
(5-pin, Female)
1-508-370-11 XLR 5-pin, male
or CANNON XLR-5-12C
equivalent
HKCU-904
TRUNK LINE
1-560-651-00 D-sub 9-pin,
male
SERIAL RET INPUT (1-4)
SERIAL OUTPUT (1-3)
(BNC)
(D-sub 9-pin, Female) or JAE DE-9PF-N equivalent
1-561-749-00 JUNCTION
SHELL
AUDIO OUTPUT CH-1/CH-2
1-508-083-00 XLP 3-pin
female
(3-pin, Male)
or CANNON XLR-3-11C
8-3. HDCU-950, HD Camera Control Unit
8-3-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
8-3-1-1 BNC connector
HDCU-950
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
1125 digital signal
Or, 0.3 V p-p, SD SYNC, 75 Ohms selectable
RET (1 to 3) IN: BNC
Conforms to BTA-S004B, 1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
SMPTE 292M
SERIAL OUT (1 to 2, MONI): BNC
Conforms to BTA-S004B, 0.8 V p-p, 75 Ohms, 1.485
Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
Other
PROMPTER IN : BNC
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
HKCU-951 (525/625 analog signal)
Y/G OUT: BNC
Y : 1.0 V p-p (video: 0.714 V, sync : 0.286 V ), 75
SMPTE 292M
REFERENCE IN: BNC
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
Or, black burst signal 0.286 V p-p, 75 Ohms
Ohms
G : 0.7 V, 75 Ohms
B-Y/B OUT: BNC
B-Y : 0.756 V p-p, 75 Ohms (when 75 % color bar is
input)
SD (525/625) digital signal
RET (1 to 3) IN: BNC
Component serial signal : 270 Mbps
SMPTE 259M
B : 0.7 V, 75 Ohms
R-Y/R OUT: BNC
SD SDI OUT (1 to 2): BNC
Component serial signal : 0.8 V p-p, 75 Ohms, 270
Mbps
R-Y : 0.756 V p-p, 75 Ohms (when 75 % color bar is
input)
R : 0.7 V, 75 Ohms
SMPTE 259M
VBS OUT: BNC
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
Analog signal
PIX OUT: BNC
HKCU-953
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
WF OUT: BNC
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
SYNC OUT: BNC
1125 digital signal
HD SDI OUT (1 to 2): BNC
Conforms to BTA-S004B, 0.8 V p-p, 75 Ohms, 1.485
Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 157
SMPTE 292M
No.
Signal
Specifications
8
*1
7
GAIN IN CONT0
Refer to the below
column.
Analog signal
FRAME REFERENCE IN: BNC
0.3 V, ternary SYNC, 75 Ohms
Or, black burst signal 0.286 V p-p, 75 Ohms
FRAME REFERENCE OUT: BNC
THROUGH OUT/0.3 V p-p, FRAME SYNC pulse, 75
Ohms
*2
8
9
MIC1 GAIN CONT
ON/OFF IN
Refer to the below
column
GND
GND for +5.5 V
10 TALLY OUT
R/G TALLY OUT
ON (GND) : Max. 30 mA
IN
8-3-1-2 CAMERA connector (optical/electrical
composite connector)
11 NC
No connection
VIDEO
Y/PB/PR
12 ASPECT REMOTE L : REMOTE
Conforms to BTA-S004B,
1.485 Gbps/
1.4835 Gbps serial
SMPTE 292M
Y/PB/PR
Conforms to BTA-S004B,
1.485 Gbps/
1.4835 Gbps serial
SMPTE 292M
2ch
ON/OFF
*3
13 ASPECT CONT1
Refer to the below
column.
*3
14 CTL CONT2
Refer to the below
RET VIDEO
column.
*2
15 MIC2 GAIN CONT
ON/OFF IN
Refer to the below
column
*1 CHU MIC 1/2 AMP GAIN
INCOM
MIC
2ch
CONT0 CONT1 CONT2 CHU MIC AMP GAIN
DIGITAL AUDIO (AES/EBU)
CAMERA COMMAND
PROMPTER
H
L
H
H
L
H
H
H
H
L
60 dB
50 dB
40 dB
30 dB
20 dB
H
L
8-3-1-3 MIC1/MCI2 (XLR 3-pin, Male)
L
H
H
The setup for the HDCU-700A mode is shown in parenthesis
( ).
1
2
In the case -of theHDCU-700A mode : S423-2/AT-149 t ON
3
*2
8pin
15pin
MIC GAIN CONT
MIC 1 and 2 ON
(External view)
L
L
L
H
L
No.
Signal
Specifications
0 dBu/-20 dBu
(Selectable with S502,
S503/AVP-4)
MIC 1 ON
H
H
MIC 2 ON
1
2
3
MIC OUT (G)
MIC OUT (X)
MIC OUT (Y)
H
INTERNAL set
*3
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
CONT1
CONT2
ASPECT
8-3-1-4 MIC REMOTE (D-sub 15-pin, Female)
L
H
L
H
H
L
SQ (16 : 9)
EC (4 : 3)
(WF REMOTE (D-sub 15-pin, Female))
INTERNAL set
LB (4 : 3)
H
L
8
1
In the case of the WF REMOTE mode : S423-3/AT-149t ON
Recall system
15
9
No.
Signal
Specifications
No connection
(External view)
In the case of MIC REMOTE mode : S423-3/AT-149 t OFF)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC
NC
NC
NC
No connection
No connection
No connection
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
No.
Signal
Specifications
Max. 250 mA
1
2
3
+5.5 V OUT
TALLY GND
G TALLY OUT
GND for TALLY
RECALL2 (G)
RECALL3 (B)
RECALL1 (R)
RECALL4 (SEQ)
GND
ON (GND) : Max. 30 mA
IN
4
5
6
R TALLY OUT
CHU MIC CONT2
AMP CONT1
ON (GND) : Max. 30 mA
IN
*1
Refer to the below
10 NC
No connection
No connection
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
column.
11 NC
*1
Refer to the below
12 RECALL5 (ENC)
13 RECALL6 (R+B)
column.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 158
No.
Signal
Specifications
LOW ACTIVE
LOW ACTIVE
No.
Signal
Specifications
8
14 RECALL7 (R+G)
15 RECALL8 (G+B)
4
STAIR CASE OUT (G) GND for STAIR CASE
*4 Stair Case signal
8-3-1-5 INTERCOM/TALLY/PGM (D-sub 25-pin,
Female)
R
G
B
+1
-
DC 0 –2 V
12
V
6
13
25
1
14
8-3-1-7 RCP/CNU (8-pin, Female)
(External view)
No.
Signal
Specifications
1
2
7
8
3
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENG (R) (X) OUT
ENG (R) (Y) OUT
ENG (G)
ENG SYSTEM RECEIVE
0 dBu BALANCED
4
5
GND for ENG
(External view)
Signal Specifications
ENG (T) (X) IN
ENG (T) (Y) IN
PGM1 (X) IN
PGM1 (Y) IN
PGM1 (G) IN
GND
ENG SYSTEM TALK
0 dBu BALANCED
No.
–20 dBu/0 dBu
(Selectable with S301/AT
board)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX (+)
TX (–)
RX (+)
RX (–)
CCU SERIAL DATA
RCP/CNU/BVP/MSU/VCS
SERIAL DATA
GND for AUX
10 AUX3
TX GND
GND for TX
11 R TALLY (X) IN
ON : 24 Vdc, TTL (H),
SHORT
OFF : 0 Vdc, TTL (L),
OPEN
POWER (+) OUT
POWER (–) OUT
SPARE
RCP POWER, +30 V
GND for POWER
12 R TALLY (Y) IN
13 GND
8-3-1-8 INTERCOM (5-pin, Female)
CHASSIS GND
14 PROD (R) (X) OUT PROD SYSTEM
RECEIVE 0 dBu BAL-
ANCED
15 PROD (R) (Y) OUT
1
5
4
2
3
16 PROD (G)
GND for PROD
17 PROD (T) (X) IN
18 PROD (T) (Y) IN
19 PGM2 (X) IN
20 PGM2 (Y) IN
21 PGM2 (G) IN
22 AUX4
PROD SYSTEM TALK
0 dBu BALANCED
(External view)
–20 dBu/0 dBu
(Selectable with S302/AT
board)
No.
Signal
Specifications
–20 dBu
(CARBON MIC)
–40 dBu
1
2
INCOM (T) IN (Y)
INCOM (T) IN (X)
23 AUX5
(ECM MIC)
–60 dBu
(DYNAMIC MIC)
24 G TALLY (X) IN
ON : 24 Vdc, TTL (H),
SHORT
OFF : 0 Vdc, TTL (L),
OPEN
25 G TALLY (Y) IN
3
4
5
INCOM (T) IN (G)
GND for INCOM
INCOM (R) OUT (X) Max. 12 dBu
NC No connection
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)
8-3-1-6 WF MODE (4-pin, Female)
8-3-2 Connection Connectors
4
3
1
2
When connecting cables to each connector of the
connector panel during installation or service, connect
the following connectors or equivalent to the tip.
Connector
HDCU-950
REFERENCE IN
PIX OUT
Connector/cable
1-569-370-12 PLUG, BNC
(External view)
Signal Specifications
No.
1
SEQ CONT OUT (G) OPEN COLLECTOR
+(PNP)/_(NPN)
WF OUT
SYNC OUT
PROMPTER IN
(Selectable with COP1/
VDA board)
*6
2
3
SEQ CONT OUT (X)
HKCU-951
Y/G OUT
STAIR CASE OUT (X)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 159
B-Y/B OUT
R-Y/R OUT
VBS OUT
REMTOE) (D-sub
15-pin, Female)
8
1-506-582-11 D-sub 15-pin,
male or JAE DA-CI-J10
equivalent
INTERCOM/TALLY/
PGM (D-sub 25-pin,
Female)
Connector
HKCU-953
FRAME REFERENCE IN
FRAME REFERENCE OUT
Connector/cable
D-sub 25-pin, male
JAE DA-25PF-N equivalent
WF MODE (4-pin,
Female)
1-560-155-00 PLUG, 4-pin
male (supplied)
HDCU-950
RET IN (1-3)
1-569-370-12 PLUG, BNC or
BELDEN8281 Cable or
RCP/CNU (8-pin,
Female)
SERIAL OUTPUT (1-2,
MONI)
SD SDI OUT (1-3)
1-766-848-11 PLUG, 8-pin
male or CCA cable assembly
(optional)
equivalent
CCA-5-30 (30 m), CCA-5-10
(10 m), CCA-5-3 (3 m)
HKCU-953
HD SDI OUT (1-2)
MIC1/MIC2(3-pin, Male)1-508-083-00 XLR 3-pin
female or CANNON XLR-3-
11C equivalent
INTERCOM (5-pin,
Female)
1-508-370-11 XLR 5-pin, male
or CANNON XLR-5-12C
equivalent
MIC REMOTE (WF
8-4. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit
8-4-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
No.
Signal
Specifications
Main connector input and output signals are as
9
NC
—
follows.
*1 The RS-232C-3 port can be used only when the BKP-7930
is installed.
*2 The RS-232C-2 and RS-232C-3 ports can be used for RS-
422 interfaceing by changing the switch setting of S802 to
S806 on the IF-777 board.
8-4-1-1 BNC connector 75 Ohms
[Input Signal]
REFERENCE
[Output Signal]
CHARACTER
300 mV p-p, loop through
700 mV p-p,
8-4-1-3 REMOTE (8P, Female)
300 mV p-p (SYNC)
RCP/CCU/MSU/VCS
AUX 1/2/3/4
8-4-1-2 RS232C-1/2/3*1 (9P, Female)
1
5
1
2
7
8
3
6
6
9
4
5
(External view)
(External view)
Signal Specifications
RS232C
No.
No.
Signal
DCD IN
Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX (+)
TX (–)
RX (+)
RX (–)
CNU SERIAL DATA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DATA CARRIER DETECT
RECEIVED DATA
TRANSMITTED DATA
DATA TERMINAL READY
SIGNAL GND
RXD IN
MSU/RCP/CCU/VCS/AUX
SERIAL DATA
TXD OUT
DTR OUT
SIGNAL GND
DSR IN
TX GND
GND for TX
*3
POWER (+)
POWER (–)
SPARE
DATA SET READY
REQUEST TO SEND
CLEAR TO SEND
—
*3
RTS OUT
CTS IN
CHASSIS GND
CHASSIS GND
NC
*3
CCU1 to CCU6 CONNECTOR
6PIN . . POWER (+) IN
RS422*2
7PIN . . POWER (–) IN
No.
Signal
Specifications
RCP1 to RCP6, AUX1, AUX2, MSU
6PIN . . POWER (+) OUT (RCP POWER +25 V)
7PIN . . POWER (-–) OUT (GND for Power)
VCS CONNECTOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DCD IN
DATA CARRIER DETECT
RECEIVED DATA
RXD IN
6PIN . . NOT USED
7PIN . . NOT USED
TXD (+) OUT
TXD (-) OUT
SIGNAL GND
RXD (-) IN
RTS OUT
CTS IN
TRANSMITTED DATA
TRANSMITTED DATA
SIGNAL GND
RECEIVED DATA
REQUEST TO SEND
CLEAR TO SEND
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 160
8-4-2 Cable Wiring
8
CCA-5 Cable (for REMOTE connector)
Black
White
Orange
White
Brown
1
1
2
7
2
7
8
8
3
6
3
6
4
5
4
5
Red
White
Red
Brown
Brown
8-4-3 Connection Connector
Use the connectors below or the equivalent at its tip
when cables are connected to each connector on the
connector panel during installation and servicing.
RS232C (9P, FEMALE) 1-566-354-11
D-SUB, 9P MALE
CCU
RCP
1-766-848-11 PLUG, 8P MALE
or CCA cable assembly
(option)
Connector name
Connectoin connector/cable
1-569-370-12 Connector,
BNC
MSU
VCS
CCA-5-10 (10 m)
CCA-5-3 (3 m)
REFERENCE
AUX 1/2/3/4 (8P,
FEMALE)
CHARACTER
(BNC)
CCA-5-30 (30 m)
8-5. CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit
8-5-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
Main connector input and output signals are shown
No.
Signal
Specifications
below.
9
NC
—
8-5-1-1 BNC connector 75 Ohms
[Input Signal]
8-5-1-3 REMOTE (8P, Female)
REFERENCE
[Output Signal]
CHARACTER
300 mVp-p, loop through
RCP/CCU/MSU/VCS/AUX
700 mVp-p,
300 mVp-p (SYNC)
1
2
7
8
3
6
8-5-1-2 RS232C (9P, Female)
4
5
1
5
(External view)
Specifications
6
9
No.
Signal
TX (+)
(External view)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CNU SERIAL DATA
TX (–)
No.
Signal
DCD IN
Specifications
RX (+)
MSU/RCP/CCU/VCS/AUX
SERIAL DATA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DATA CARRIER DETECT
RECEIVED DATA
RX (–)
RXD (+) IN
TXD (+) OUT
DTR OUT
SIGNAL GND
DSR IN
TX GND
POWER (+)
POWER (–)
SPARE
GND for TX
*1
TRANSMITTED DATA
DATA TERMINAL READY
SIGNAL GND
*1
DATA SET READY
REQUEST TO SEND
CLEAR TO SEND
CHASSIS GND
CHASSIS GND
RTS OUT
CTS OUT
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 161
*1
6pin . . POWER (+) OUT (RCP POWER +30 V)
7pin . . POWER (–) OUT (GND for Power)
MSU/VCS Connectors
8
CCU1 to CCU6 Connectors
6pin . . POWER (+) IN
7pin . . POWER (–) IN
RCP1 to RCP6, AUX Connectors
NOT USED
8-5-2 Cable Wiring
CCA-5 Cable (for REMOTE connector)
Black
White
Orange
White
Brown
1
1
2
7
2
7
8
8
3
6
3
6
4
5
4
5
Red
White
Red
Brown
Brown
8-5-3 Connection Connector
Connections made with the connector panels during
installation or service should be made with the
connectors/complete cable assemblies specified in
the following list, or equivalent parts.
RS-232C (9P, FEMALE)
1-566-354-11
D-SUB, 9P MALE
1-766-848-11 PLUG, 8P MALE
or CCA cable assembly
(option)
CCA-5-10 (10 m)
CCA-5-3 (3 m)
CCU
RCP
Connector name
REFERENCE
Connection connector/cable
1-569-370-12 Connector,
BNC
MSU
VCS
AUX (8P, FEMALE)
CHARACTER
(BNC)
8-6. MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit
8-6-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
1 POWER switch
3 CCU/CNU REMOTE connector
2 AC IN connector
4 AUX REMOTE connector
REMOTE
CCU/CNU
AUX
POWER
AC IN
I
I/O PORT
O
5 I/O PORT connector
a POWER switch
Turns the power to the unit on and off.
c CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera
command network unit remote) connector (8-
pin)
Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of the CCU-700A/
700AP or the MSU connector of the CNU-700.
b ~AC IN (AC power input) connector
Connect to an AC power source using the supplied AC
power cord. The power cord can be fixed to this unit
using the supplied plug holder.
d AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8-
pin)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 162
e I/O PORT connector (50-pin)
Reserved for future use.
Main connector input and output signals are shown
Pin
No
8
Signal
Specifications
*1
*1
*1
*1
below.
25 EXT I/O-26
26 EXT I/O-31
27 EXT I/O-34
28 EXT I/O-37
29 EXT I/O-42
30 EXT I/O-45
31 +5 V OUT
32 GND (+5 V)
33 GND (+5 V)
34 EXT I/O-02
35 EXT I/O-05
36 EXT I/O-10
37 EXT I/O-13
38 EXT I/O-16
39 EXT I/O-21
40 EXT I/O-24
41 EXT I/O-27
42 EXT I/O-32
43 EXT I/O-35
44 EXT I/O-40
45 EXT I/O-43
46 EXT I/O-46
47 +5 V OUT
48 GND (+5 V)
49 GND (+12 V)
50 SPARE
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
8-6-1-1 REMOTE (8-pin, Female)
AUX
CCU/CNU
*1
OUTPUT PORT
*1
INPUT PORT
1
Utility power 5 V
2
7
8
3
6
GND for utility power 5 V
GND for utility power 12 V
4
5
*1
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
(External view)
*1
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
*1
No.
Signal
TX (+)
Specifications
MSU Serial data
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
*1
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
*1
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
TX (–)
MSU Serial data
CCU/CNU/AUX Serial data
MSU/RCP/CCU/VCS/AUX
GND for TX
*1
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
RX (+)
*1
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
RX (–)
*1
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
TX GND
POWER (+)
POWER (–)
SPARE
*1
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
Not used
*1
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
Not used
*1
OUTPUT PORT
—
*1
OUTPUT PORT
CHASSIS GND
CHASSIS GND
*1
INPUT PORT
8-6-1-2 I/O PORT (50-pin, Female)
Utility power 5 V
GND for utility power 5 V
GND for utility power 12 V
No connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
*1
INPUT
ON: 5 V
OFF : 0 V
TTL LEVEL
Darlington transistor drive
One port: max 5 mA
OUTPUT
(External view)
Pin
No
(VEXT: 1.5 V, RETX: 1.1 kOhms)
All ports total: max 60 mA
Signal
Specifications
*1
*1
*1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EXT I/O-00
EXT I/O-03
EXT I/O-06
EXT I/O-11
EXT I/O-14
EXT I/O-17
EXT I/O-22
EXT I/O-25
EXT I/O-30
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
10 EXT I/O-36
11 EXT I/O-03
12 EXT I/O-41
13 EXT I/O-44
14 EXT I/O-47
15 +12 V OUT
16 +12 V OUT
17 SPARE
*1
OUTPUT PORT
*1
INPUT PORT
*1
INPUT PORT
Utility power 12 V
Utility power 12 V
No connection
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
18 EXT I/O-01
19 EXT I/O-04
20 EXT I/O-07
21 EXT I/O-12
22 EXT I/O-15
23 EXT I/O-20
24 EXT I/O-23
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
INPUT/OUTPUT PORT
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 163
8-6-2 Cable Wiring
8
CCA-5 Cable
Black
White
Orange
White
Brown
1
2
1
7
2
7
8
8
3
6
3
6
4
5
4
5
Red
White
Red
Brown
Brown
8-pin connector (Male)
(Wiring side)
8-pin connector (Male)
(Wiring side)
8-6-3 Connection Connector
Connections made with the connector panels during
installation or service should be made with the
connectors/complete cable assemblies specified in
the following list, or equivalent parts.
CCA-5 cable assembly
(Option)
CCA-5-3 (3 m)/CCA-5-10 (10
m)
I/O PORT (50-pin)
Plug, D-SUB 50-pin, Male
(Sony part number: 1-566-
358-11)
Connector name
Connection connector/cable
REMOTE AUX (8-pin) Plug 8-pin, Male (Sony part
number: 1-766-848-11)
REMOTE CCU/CNU
or
JAE DDU-50PF-F0 or
equivalent
(8-pin)
or
8-7. MSU-750, Master Setup Unit
8-7-1 Connector Panel
1POWER switch
2AC IN connector
-AC IN
REMOTE
AUX
CCU/CNU
POWER
I
O
4CCU/CNU REMOTE connector
3AUX REMOTE connector
a POWER switch
c AUX REMOTE (auxiliary remote) connector (8-
Turns the power on and off of this unit.
pin)
b AC IN (AC power input) connector
d CCU/CNU REMOTE (camera control unit/camera
command network unit remote) connector (8-
pin)
Connect to the RCP/CNU connector of the CCU or the
MSU connector of the CNU.
Connect to an AC power source using an optional AC
power cord. The power cord can be fixed to this unit
using an optional plug retainer.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 164
8-8. RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panel
8
8-8-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
8-8-2 Connection Connector
Connections made with the connector panels during
installation or service should be made with the
connectors/complete cable assemblies specified in
the following list, or equivalent parts.
8-8-1-1 AUX REMOTE
CCU/CNU REMOTE
(8P, Female)
Connector function Connection connector
AUX REMOTE
1-706-848-11 PLUG, 8P MALE
or
Cable assembly (Option)
CCA-5-3 (3 m), CCA-5-10 (10
m),
1
2
7
6
8
3
CCU/CNU REMOTE
(8P, FEMALE)
4
5
CCA-5-30 (30 m)
1-560-651-00 D-SUB 9P,
MALE
1-561-749-00 JUNCTION
SHELL 9P
(External view)
Specifications
EXT I/O
No.
Signal
TX (+)
(9P, Female)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C
RCP SERIAL DATA
TX (–)
RX (+)
RX (–)
TX GND
CCU/CNU/AUX
SERIAL DATA
GND for TX
POWER (+) IN RCP POWER, +10 V to +30 V
POWER (–) IN GND for POWER
SPARE
CHASSIS GND CHASSIS GND
8-8-1-2 EXT I/O
(9P Female)
5
1
9
6
(External view)
No.
Signal
PREVIEW S1 CONTACT (X)
(Modification is required for
Specifications
1
some units)
2
PREVIEW S2 CONTACT (Y)
(Modification is required for
some units)
3
4
5
6
7
SPARE I/O
PORT 1
(CMOS LEVEL 3.3 HI ACTIVE)
Assignable
SPARE I/O
PORT 2
(CMOS LEVEL 3.3 HI ACTIVE)
Assignable
SPARE I/O
PORT 3
(CMOS LEVEL 3.3 HI ACTIVE)
Assignable
SPARE I/O
PORT 4
(CMOS LEVEL 3.3 HI ACTIVE)
Assignable
SPARE I/O
PORT 5
(CMOS LEVEL 3.3 HI ACTIVE)
Assignable
8
9
POWER OUT +5V DC
GND
—
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 165
8-9. HDVF-20A, HD Electronic Viewfinder
8
8-9-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
Pin
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
VF (20P Male)
9
PEAKING OUT
CTL
VF to CAM (Ro = 1
kOhms)
0 V to 5 V
0 V : PEAKING OFF
5 V : PEAKING MAX
10 NC
11 NC
(External view)
12 Y VIDEO
IN
IN
1.0 V p-p (Ro = 75
kOhms)
Pin
No
13 VIDEO
GND
Signal
I/O
Specifications
1
2
3
S-DATA
NC
IN/OUT TTL level
14 NC
15 NC
POWER
IN
ON : OPEN
OFF : GND
16 NC
OFF CTL
17 R TALLY
ON : 5 V
OFF : GND
4
5
SCK
IN
TTL level
COLOR/
BW
OUT
B/W : GND
COLOR : OPEN
18 NC
19 UNREG
GND
6
7
8
NC
NC
20 UNREG
+10.5 V to 17 V
G TALLY
IN
ON : 5V
OFF : GND
8-10. HDVF-700A, HD Electronic Viewfinder
8-10-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
Pin
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
D-sub (25P Male)
13 NC
14 VIDEO GND
15 S-CK
1
13
IN
IN
TTL level
16 BATT
ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V
14
25
17 CHASSIS
GND
(External view)
18 G TALLY
IN
ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V
Pin
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
19 GND (+12 V)
20 GND (+12 V)
21 VF-SEL
1
2
3
4
5
6
VIDEO IN
NC
IN
1.0 V p-p, 75 Ohms
IN
IN
BW: 0 V
COLOR: +5 V
NC
NC
22 H EXPAND
BW: 0 V
COLOR: +5 V
NC
PEAKING
ON/OFF
OUT
ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V
23 NC
24 NC
7
8
9
+12 V IN
+12 V IN
NC
IN
IN
+10.5 to +20 V
+10.5 to +20 V
25 V EXPAND
IN
ON: GND
OFF: +5 V
10 S-DATA
11 R TALLY
OUT
IN
TTL level
ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V
12 EFFECT
IN
ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 166
8-11. HDVF-C700W, HD Electronic Viewfinder
8
8-11-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
Pin
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
D-sub (25P Male)
9
NC
No connection
10 S-DATA
11 R TALLY
IN/OUT TTL level
1
13
IN
ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V
14
25
12 NC
13 NC
No connection
No connection
GND for Y VIDEO
TTL level
(External view)
14 Y VIDEO GND —
Pin
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
15 S-CK
16 NC
IN
No connection
GND for CHASSIS
1
2
3
4
5
6
Y VIDEO (X)
IN
1.0 V p-p, Zi = 75
Ohms
17 CHASSIS
GND
—
IN
PR VIDEO
GND
—
GND for PR VIDEO
18 G TALLY
ON: +5 V
OFF: GND
PR VIDEO (X) IN
0.7 V p-p, Zi = 75
Ohms
19 UNREG
—
GND for UNREG
GND for UNREG
20 UNREG
—
PB VIDEO
GND
—
GND for PB VIDEO
21 COLOR/BW
OUT
BW: GND
COLOR: OPEN
PB VIDEO (X) IN
0.7 V p-p, Zi = 75
Ohms
22 H EXPAND
23 NC
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
PEAKING
CTL
OUT
ON: +5 V
OFF: GND
24 NC
7
8
UNREG
UNREG
IN
IN
+10.5 to +17 V
+10.5 to +17 V
25 NC
8-12. HDVF-C750W, HD Electronic Viewfinder
8-12-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
Pin
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
VF (20P Male)
12 Y VIDEO
IN
1.0 V p-p (Zi = 75
Ohms)
13 VIDEO GND
14 PB VIDEO
—
IN
GND for VIDEO
0.7 V p-p, Zi = 75
Ohms
15 PR VIDEO
IN
IN
0.7 V p-p, Zi = 75
Ohms
(External view)
16 NC
No connection
17 R TALLY
ON : +5 V
Pin
No
Signal
S-DATA
I/O
Specifications
OFF : GND
18 NC
No connection
GND for UNREG
+10.5 V to 17 V
1
2
3
4
5
IN/OUT TTL level
No connection
19 UNREG GND
20 UNREG
—
IN
NC
NC
No connection
TTL level
S-CK
IN
COLOR/BW
OUT
B/W : GND
COLOR : OPEN
6
7
8
NC
No connection
No connection
NC
G TALLY
IN
ON : +5 V
OFF : GND
9
PEAKING
OUT
VF to CAM (Zi = 1
kOhms)
CTL ON: +5 V
OFF: GND
10 NC
11 NC
No connection
No connection
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 167
8-13. VCS-700, Video Selector
8
8-13-1-3 I/O Port (D-SUB 37P, Female)
8-13-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
Main connector input and output signals are shown
below.
19
37
1
PIX 1 to PIX 6 INPUT: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms
WF 1 to WF 6 INPUT: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.714 Vp-p (V),
75 Ohms
20
CHARACTOR INPUT: 0.7 Vp-p (V), 75 Ohms
PIX A INPUT:
WF A INPUT:
1.0 Vp-p(VBS), 75 Ohms
1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms
– External view –
PIX A, PIX B OUTPUT: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms
WF A, WF B OUTPUT: 1.0 Vp-p (VBS)/0.714 Vp-p (V),
75 Ohms
Pin
No
Signal
Specifications
SYNC OUTPUT:
0.3 Vp-p, 75 Ohms, negative
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CH1 ON IN
CH2 ON IN
CH3 ON IN
CH4ON IN
CH5 ON IN
CH6 ON IN
L: ON
H: OFF
8-13-1-1 WF Mode (4P, Female)
4
3
1
2
PIX/WF SEL 1 SEL 1: L, SEL 2: L — NC
IN
SEL 1: H, SEL 2: L — WF/PIX
SEL 1: L, SEL 2: H — WF
SEL 1: H, SEL 2: H — PIX
(External view)
8
9
PIX/WF SEL 2
IN
Pin
No
Signal
Specifications
PORT ENB IN L: ACTIVE
10 SW RESET IN L: RESET
1
2
3
SEG CONT OUT (G) OPEN COLLECTOR
SEG CONT OUT(X)
11 NC
12 NC
13 NC
14 NC
15 NC
16 NC
17 NC
18 NC
19 +5V
—
STAIR CASE OUT (X) STAIR CASE SIGNAL
+1
12 Vp-p
R
G
B
- 6
-0 ±2 Vdc
4
STAIR CASE OUT (G)
8-13-1-2 Remote (8P, Female)
POWER SUPPLY OUT max.
500 mA
20 CH1 LED OUT (NPN TRANSISTOR)
1
7
OPEN COLLECTOR OUT
ON: LOW
8
4
2
6
21 CH2 LED OUT
22 CH3 LED OUT
3
5
23 CH4 LED OUT
24 CH5 LED OUT
25 CH6 LED OUT
(External view)
26 SEQ 3A ON IN L: ON,
H: OFF
Pin
No
CH 1, 2 and 3 of WF INPUT will
be output in sequence when
the pin status is LOE (ON)
Signal
Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX(+)
TX(–)
RX(+)
RX(–)
VCS SERIAL DATA
27 SEQ 3B ON IN L: ON,
H: OFF
CH 4, 5 and 6 of WF INPUT will
be output in sequence when
the pin status is LOE (ON)
MSU/CNU
SERIAL DATA
TX GND
GNE for TX
NOT USED
NOT USED
—
28 NC
29 NC
30 NC
31 NC
32 NC
33 NC
34 NC
35 NC
36 GND
37 GND
—
POWER (+)
POWER (–)
SPARE
CHASSIS GND
CHASSIS GND
—
SIGNAL GND
FRAME GND
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 168
8-14. CA-905L, Large Lens Adaptor
8
8-14-1-3 LENS (36P, Female)
8-14-1 Connector Input/Output Signals
FIBER (CA-905L): LEMO type
18
1
8-14-1-1 REMOTE (8P, Male)
36
19
(External view)
Pin
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
(External view)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NC
NC
NC
No connection
No connection
No connection
Pin
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
+12 V (LENS)
LENS DC GND
GND
OUT +12 V (2 A max)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NC
NC
No connection
No connection
SERIAL DATA
SERIAL DATA
GND for DATA
—
—
GND for +12 V (LENS)
GND
IIC DATA
IIC CLK
(Z POT FOL-
LOW)
No connection
GND
8
LENS EXT1
(SERIAL RXD)
IN *2 (LENS SERIAL
DATA)
POWER (+)
POWER (–)
NC
IN +12 V
IN GND for +12V
(VIDEO (X) IN)
9
LENS EXT2
IN *2
IN *2
10 LENS EXT3
11 LENS AUX
CHASSIS GND
—
CHASSIS GND
OUT ON: GND
OFF: High impedance
8-14-1-2 LENS (12P, Male)
12 IRIS POSI
IN Zi ≥10 kOhms
2 to 7 V
“3.4 0.1 V (F16)’’
“6.2 0.1 V (F2.8)’’
13 ZOOM POSI
14 RET 1 ON
15 RET 2 ON
16 FOCUS POSI
17 IRIS CONT
IN Zi ≥10 kOhms
2 to 7 V
2 V (WIDE), 7 V (TELE)
IN Zi ≥10 kOhms
ON: L
(External view)
OFF: High impedance
Pin
No
IN Zi ≥10 kOhms
ON: L
Signal
I/O
Specifications
OFF: High impedance
1
RET VIDEO
ENABLE
OUT ENABLE: GND
DISABLE: +5 V or
OPEN
IN Zi ≥10 kOhms
2 to 7V
2 V (MIN), 7 V (∞ )
OUT 2 to 7 V
2
RET 2 ENABLE OUT ENABLE: GND
DISABLE: +5 V or
OPEN
“3.4 0.1 V (F16)’’
“6.2 0.1 V (F2.8)’’
Zo ≤1 kOhms
3
4
GND
—
GND
IN AUTO: +5 V
MANU: 0 V or OPEN
AUTO +5 V
18 IRIS AUTO/
MANU(SERIAL
TXD)
OUT AUTO: L
MANU: H
5
IRIS CONT
IN +2.0 V to +7.0 V (+3.4
V = F16, +6.2 V = F2.8)
Zo ≤1 kOhms (LENS
SERIAL DATA)
6
7
NC
(UNREG)
19 NC
20 NC
No connection
No connection
IRIS POSITION OUT +2.0 V to +7.0 V (+3.4
V = F16, +6.2 V = F2.8)
21 LENS R TALLY OUT ON: L
8
9
AUTO/MANU
IN AUTO IRIS: 0 V
MANUAL IRIS: +5 V
ON
OFF: H
Zo ≥1 kOhms
EXTENDER
ON/ OFF
OUT EX ON: 0 V
OFF: +4.8 V
22 EXP POSITION IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms 1 to 4 V
1 V: –7.5° 4 V: +7.5°
10 ZOOM
POSITION
11 LAUX1
(SERIAL RXD)
12 LAUX1
(SERIAL TXD)
OUT WIDE: +2 V
TELE: +7 V
23 RET 3 ON
IN Zi ≥10 kOhms
ON: L
OUT LENS AUX
OFF: High impedance
(LENS SERIAL DATA)
24 LENS ADRS A
25 LENS ADRS B
26 LENS ADRS C
IN *1
IN *1
IN *1
IN LENS AUX
(LENS SERIAL DATA)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 169
Pin
No
Pin
No
8
Signal
I/O
Specifications
Signal
I/O
Specifications
No connection
27 LENS ADRS D
IN *1
11 NC
28 EXTENDER 1
ON
OUT ON: GND
OFF: High impedance
OUT ON: GND
OFF: High impedance
12 VF VIDEO (X)
IN 1.0 V p-p, VF: Zi = 1.5
kOhms
29 EXTENDER 2
ON
13 (AUDIO CTL)
14 B-Y (X)
IN 700 mV p-p, VF: Zi =
1.5 kOhms, 75 % color
bars
30 (F DEM FAR)
No connection
31 INCOM 1
ENG/PRD
IN Zi≥10 kOhms
ENG: GND
15 R-Y (X)
IN 700 mV p-p, VF: Zi =
1.5 kOhms, 75 % color
bars
PRD: High impedance
32 INCOM 2
ENG/PRD
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ENG: GND
16 NC
No connection
PRD: High impedance
17 TALLY IND
IN H: Indicator lights
L: Indicator goes out
33 INCOM MIC 1
ON
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON: GND
18 NC
19 GND
20 NC
No connection
OFF: High impedance
—
GND
34 INCOM MIC 2
ON
IN Zi ≥ 10 kOhms
ON: GND
No connection
OFF: High impedance
HD video
35 (F CONT SIG)
36 (F DEM NEAR)
No connection
No connection
Pin
Signal
No
I/O
Specifications
*1 Zi ≥10 kOhns
1: High impedance
0: 0 +0.5 V
1
S-DATA
IN/ TTL level
OUT
LENS ADRS A (Low-order bit)
LENS ADRS D (High-order bit)
*2 Zi ≥10 kOhms
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NC
No connection
No connection
IN TTL level
NC
1: High impedance
0: 0 0.5 V
SCK
NC
No connection
No connection
No connection
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
MODE
NC
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
EXTENDER OFF
EXT-A (x1.5) ON
EXT-B (x2) ON
NC
G TALLY
IN ON: 5 V
OFF: GND
EXT-C (x2.5) ON
9
NC
No connection
No connection
No connection
10 NC
11 NC
8-14-1-4 VF (20P, Male) (BKP-9057)
12 VF VIDEO (Y)
IN VS = 1.0 V p-p, Zi = 75
Ohms
13 VIDEO GND
—
GND for Y VIDEO
14 VF VIDEO (P )
IN 0.7 V p-p, Zi = 75
Ohms
B
15 VF VIDEO (P )
IN 0.7 V p-p, Zi = 75
Ohms
R
16 NC
No connection
(External view)
17 R TALLY
IN ON: 5 V
OFF: GND
SD video
Pin
18 NC
No connection
Signal
I/O
Specifications
19 UNREG GND
20 NC
—
GND for UNREG
No connection
No
1
2
3
1 (VTR SAVE)
NC
No connection
8-14-1-5 VF (25P, Female) (BKP-9057)
16:9 MODE
IN H: NORMAL (4:3)
L: WIDE (16:9)
13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
5
(REC ALARM)
(COMP/VBS
SW IN/OUT)
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
6
7
8
NC
No connection
No connection
(External view)
NC
G TALLY
IN H: Indicator lights
L: Indicator goes out
9
PEAKING OFF
IN
10 Y (X)
IN 1 V p-p, VF: Zi = 1.5
kOhms
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 170
SD video
Pin
No
8
Signal
I/O
Specifications
Pin
No
Signal
I/O
Specifications
6
PEAKING
LEVEL
IN 0 to 5 Vdc
0 V: PEAKING OFF
5 V: PEAKING MAX
OUT +12 V (at 4 A)
1
VF R VIDEO (X) OUT V = 714 mV p-p (NTSC)
700 mV p-p (PAL)
Zo = 75 Ohms 5 %
POSI
7
8
9
+12 V
+12 V
NC
OUT +12 V (at 4 A)
No connection
2
3
NC
No connection
VF G (X)
OUT B/W: Y/RET,
COLOR: G
10 S-DATA
IN/ TTL level
OUT
Zo = 75 Ohms 5 % 1
V p-p
11 R TALLY
OUT ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V
4
5
NC
No connection
12 NC (EFFECT)
No connection
(ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V)
VF B VIDEO (X) OUT V = 714 mV p-p (NTSC)
700 mV p-p (PAL)
Zo = 75 Ω 5 % POSI
13 NC
No connection
6
7
8
9
RET ON
OUT ON: GND, OFF: +5 V
OUT +12 V dc
14 Y VIDEO GND
15 S-CK
—
GND for Y VIDEO
OUT TTL level
No connection
+12 V (VF)
+12 V (VF)
OUT +12 V dc
16 NC (BATT IND)
UP TALLY ON OUT ON: +12 V
OFF: 0 V
(ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V)
10 NC (VF RET
VIDEO (X))
No connection
(V = 1.0 V p-p
Zo = 75 Ohms 5 % )
17 CHASSIS GND
18 G TALLY
—
OUT ON: +5 V
OFF: 0 V
11 R TALLY ON
OUT ON: 5.0 V 0.5 V
OFF: 0 +0.5 V
19 GND (+12 V)
20 GND (+12 V)
21 NC (VF SEL)
—
—
GND for +12 V
GND for +12 V
12 VF SEL
COL/BW
IN COLOR:GND
No connection
(BW: 0 V
COLOR: +5 V)
B/W: High impedance
13 NC
No connection
14 VF R VIDEO
(G)
OUT GND for VF R VIDEO
22 NC
No connection
(EXPAND (4:3): GND
NORMAL: +5 V)
(H EXPAND)
15 PEAKING OFF OUT OFF: GND
ON: High impedance
OUT GND for VF G VIDEO
23 NC
24 NC
No connection
No connection
16 VF G VIDEO
(G)
25 NC
No connection
(EXPAND (4:3): GND
NORMAL: +5 V)
17 CHASSIS GND
—
CHASSIS GND
(V EXPAND)
18 VF B VIDEO
(G)
OUT GND for VF B VIDEO
19 VF DC GND
20 VF DC GND
21 TALLY GND
—
—
—
GND for +12 V (VF)
GND for +12 V (VF)
GND for TALLY
22 NC (VF RET
VIDEO OUT
(G))
No connection (GND
for VF RET VIDEO)
23 G TALLY ON
OUT ON: 5.0 V 0.5 V
OFF: 0 +0.5 V
24 NC
No connection
25 16:9 ON
OUT ON: GND
OFF: High impedance
HD video
Pin
Signal
No
I/O
Specifications
1
Y VIDEO
OUT VS = 1.0 Vp-p, Zo = 75
Ohms
2
3
P
P
VIDEO GND
VIDEO (X)
—
GND for P VIDEO
R
R
R
OUT V = 0.7 Vp-p, Zo = 75
Ohms
4
5
P
P
VIDEO GND
VIDEO (X)
—
GND for P VIDEO
B
B
B
OUT V = 0.7 Vp-p, Zo = 75
Ohms
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 8 Connectors and Cables 171
9-1. Hardware
9
The following are some technical terms that are
standard function for a video camera even though the
encoder has been digitalized.
frequently used in camera brochures or technical
papers.
Crisp
Adaptive DTL
DTL enhances picture sharpness but at the same time
also emphasizes the noise, which makes the picture
noisy. Crisp is a circuit that removes small amplitude
DTL to improve S/N.
A simple limiter makes DTL become thick. Adaptive
DTL is a very effective function to keep the DTL under
a certain level. It was originally developed for anti-
aliasing.
DTL comb filter
Adaptive highlight control
The DTL comb filter is used to weaken the oblique DTL
that interferes with the sub carrier to generate cross
color. However, resolution seems to look bad if the
oblique DTL becomes too weak. Some component-
dedicated cameras such as HD cameras do not adopt
DTL comb filter.
To make the picture look perceptively better -, the
picture is divided into several zones along the bright
level in which the compression rates of the smaller
zones are increased while those of the larger zones are
decreased. The Adaptive Highlight Control has been
developed for Sony’s HDC/BVP-Series, which only
applys to the portion whose level is higher than the
knee point.
Electronic soft focus
The DTL circuit can make the picture sharper, but it
can also shade off the picture by reverting the polarity.
When used this way, electronic soft focus is a function
to generate a gentle film-like picture. It is more
effective to make an announcer’s skin color much
more lustrous when used in combination with the Skin
Tone DTL.
Aspect ratio conversion
Converting 16:9 video signals to 4:3 signals is
essential because most of the applications today are
4:3 even though sometimes shot with 16:9 cameras.
Sony video cameras for broadcasting and professional
use provide the aspect ratio conversion function in
combination with a digital filter. Some manufacturers
perform this function by changing the reading process
of the CCD.
Encoder
Inside the camera, video signals are processed in R/G/
B component signals. The encoder is a device used to
convert the component signals into composite signals
such as NTSC and PAL.
Auto knee/DCC
It is a device that automatically adjusts the knee point
and knee slope to raise the dynamic range depending
on the pattern of the subject for photography.
Flare correction
In an optical system, the image might sometimes seem
floating or some colors might appear in dark portions
of the picture because of diffused reflection. Flare
correction electronically compensates for this
phenomenon.
Black Gamma
Black Gamma is a function to change the Gamma
curve of dark portions of the picture. It also can change
the coloring.
Gamma correction
Black shading correction
A CRT does not beam at the screen linearly as per the
signal level. Normally, a TV set should compensate for
the error because it is part of a CRT’s characteristics.
However, in consideration of the total cost, the industry
has reached an agreement with TV stations that the
acquisition side should take the responsibility to
correct the error. This is the gamma correction. As the
standard in this agreement is not very strict, the
Gamma correction value is not always completely the
same between different manufacturers and different
TV stations. In the camera field, Gamma correction is
also a way of creating user’s taste and setting the
picture quality.
Black shading correction is used to compensate for
the irregular black shading which occurs because of
the dark current of picture elements and the
characteristics of power circuits.
Boost frequency
Horizontal image enhancement is usually performed
by raising the space frequency between 3 to 4 MHz.
The peak of the frequency raised can be adjusted in
order to meet the users’ different tastes.
CCD
CCD is the acronym for Charge Coupled Device. It is a
kind of semiconductor that converts an optical image
into electronic signals - the heart of a camera. After
accomplishing the conversion, each pixel (a kind of
photoelectric transformer) on the CCD first holds the
signal and then transfers it to the next cell. These cells
work like a bucket brigade. According to the transfer
method, there are two types of CCDs - IT CCD and FIT
CCD.
Gen lock
Synchronization should be done when using multiple
cameras. Gen lock is a function developed for this
purpose to synchronize the cameras to an external
VBS input. Then, horizontal phase, vertical phase, and
sub-carrier phase will be synchronized.
Horizontal image enhancement (H DTL)
Horizontal image enhancement is performed by
raising the frequency characteristic of the video
signals which is carried out by using the Low Pass
Filter and Delay Line for analog cameras while using
the digital filter for digital cameras.
Color bars
Almost all of the video cameras used for broadcasting
- have a color bar generator. Although the color bar
has been originally developed for the adjustment of an
analog encoder, it has become a standard function for
professional video camera. Since video cameras are
quite often used as a color bar generator, it is still a
Image Enhancement
It is a function to give a perception of a sharper picture
or higher resolution. Since the characteristic cannot be
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 9 Glossary – Terms and Definitions 173
compared in numbers, it does not appear in the
specifications of the brochure. However, it is very
important for evaluating picture quality intuitively.
Usually, it is only called “DTL (detail)”.
the signal standard. It seems that the linear matrix
should be more important to emphasize the visual
appeal of the picture apparently rather than just be
theoretically determined by some coefficients.
9
IT/FIT
Mix DTL/NAM DTL
In an IT type CCD, beside the pixels there are columns
of cells dedicated for vertical transfer. The electronic
signals are transferred from the pixels to the columns
of cells during vertical blanking. Finally, the signals
reach a row of cells driven by a horizontal block for
horizontal transfer, from where the signals are output
as video signals. Although there is a cover to protect
the cells from light leakage, sometimes the leakage still
happens under a strong light, which causes smear.
To avoid this phenomenon, in an FIT type CCD,
there is additional storage added to the CCD which
enables the vertical transfer to perform much more
quickly so to minimize the chance of light leakage even
under a strong light. However, this additional storage
increases the cost.
Recently, most of the cameras create V DTL from all
three channels of R/G/B. Depending on how to apply
these three values of V DTL to the add operation, there
are two types of mix: the Mix DTL – a simple sum of the
values and the NAM DTL – a non-additive mix of the
values. Both of them have pros and cons. The Mix DTL
is not always better than “out of green”, while the NAM
DTL helps make a picture sharper but sometimes it
makes the S/N become worse or adds the DTL
opposite to the luminance. The NAM DTL does not
apply to H DTL, because it will increase aliasing.
Multi matrix
Multi matrix is used to easily implement color
reproduction that complies with color matching and
visual appeal between different cameras by adjusting
the matrix coefficient to match the color phase. For
instance, it is possible to change the color phase and
saturation of red color only. In most of Sony’s cameras,
it works with 16 axes for color phase on a color plane
like a vector, each of which has its own matrix
coefficient to perform the linearity corrections between
each axis. Normally, each axis needs six matrix
coefficients (that means 96 matrix coefficients are
needed). However, the number of coefficients can be
reduced to two for each axis in most of Sony’s cameras
using some dedicated software - color phase and
saturation.
Recently, there has been great advances in IT CCD
technology and the gap between IT and FIT has been
dramatically reduced.
Knee aperture
Contrasts always become worse when compressing in
the direction of the bright level during knee correction.
Knee aperture is used to improve this point to
emphasize the contour to which the knee correction
applies.
Knee correction
The dynamic range of a natural scene is very large, but
that of a video standard is limited. When we use the iris
to adjust for the subject photographically, the bright
portion of the picture will become almost completely
white. However, when we focus on the bright portion,
the subject for photography will become very dark.
Knee correction is a function to solve this problem by
compressing the level of the bright area to meet that in
the video standard so as to make the dynamic range
seem larger.
On-chip-lens
To obtain a better quality picture, -the more pixels the
better for a CCD. However, increasing the number of
pixels means decreasing the pixel size. When the pixel
size becomes smaller, less incident light can be
gathered, which degrades the sensitivity. The on-chip-
lens is a micro lens put on each pixel to help increase
light gathering so to improve the sensitivity.
Knee point and knee slope
Optical filter
Knee point is the starting point of the knee correction
process, and the knee slope is its compression rate.
Usually, knee slope is the peak value under an
environment of 200% incident light.
There are two types of optical filters, Neutral Density
(ND) filter and Color Temperature Conversion (CC)
filter. The former is like a pair of sunglasses for the
camera to avoid the iris to be stopped down too much
under a very strong light, while the latter works like a
pair of colored glasses to compensate for the color
temperature beyond the white balance compensation
range. Both of them are integrated on a built-in filter
disk, can be manually or electronically controlled and
can be remotely controlled using the remote controller
for the electronic filter.
Knee saturation
Because knee correction performs independently in R/
G/B channels in a conventional knee circuit, the R/G/B
percentage of the portion to which the knee correction
applys will change, and thus the color phase and
saturation change. This is called “white clip” or “wash
out.” Knee saturation is used to balance the coloring to
avoid this phenomenon.
Optical low pass filter
Shooting with a CCD camera means sampling a
picture via the use of the pixels on a CCD. An optical
low pass filter is made of optical crystal to cut off the
unnecessary high frequency that might cause beat
interference caused by the relation between the
number of pixels and the pattern of the shooting
subject during the sampling.
Level depend
Just like Crisp reduces noise, level depend is a circuit
that decreases the DTL value in dark areas.
Limiter
A limiter is a circuit used to constrain the DTL peak
value that may ruin the picture quality when the
luminance difference is too big that it will generate too
large of a DTL.
Out of green
The older version cameras create V DTL from the G
channel and add it to each channel to carry out image
enhancement. This method helps use a less number of
delay lines, but does not perform well in some cases
such as a deep red flower picture. Some cameras
create V DTL from R/G channels.
Linear matrix
The linear matrix is actually a circuit used to make the
color reproduction look better, although some
textbooks mention that it is used to correct the
difference between camera chromaticity and that of
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 9 Glossary – Terms and Definitions 174
Pedestal/Master black
It is the black level. If the pedestal level is too high, the
whole picture will become a little bit white.
Vertical image enhancement (V DTL)
Vertical image enhancement is performed by
enhancing the difference between vertical picture
elements using a 2H delay line.
9
Prism block for color separation
A prism block that breaks down sunlight into red,
green, and blue - the three element colors for a video
image - is an essential component for a CCD camera.
White balance
White balance is used to compensate for the color
temperature of the subject for photography. Contrarily,
a sunset scene can be taken even in the daytime by
using the white balance adjustment.
Skin tone DTL
Skin tone DTL is a function that changes the DTL value
by color. It was originally designed to make an
announcer’s face more lustrous by reducing the DTL
on his/her face. It is also a useful function for
intentionally emphasizing certain scenes such as the
surface of a lawn.
White clip/Black clip
The range between black level and the maximum white
level is fixed in video signal standards. The white clip
and black clip are the circuits used to prevent video
signals from exceeding this range.
System conversion
White shading correction
In addition to HD output, NTSC and PAL outputs are
also necessary for HD cameras. For that, the CCU
uses a down converter.
Because irregular shading happens during light-to-
current inversion in a CCD, sensitivity becomes
uneven on the screen. It is not so conspicuous for a
one-chip camera, but for a three-chip camera
sometimes the color may not be completely the same
depending on the portion of the screen. White shading
correction is used to avoid this phenomenon that is
also called modulation shading.
9-2. Software
Software plays an important role in cameras today. It is
not too strong to say that a camera without software is
just like a body without a brain. Usually, software is
integrated into switches for internal setting or for
communications with other devices. The following are
some technical terms we frequently use in this field.
Auto white shading/Auto black shading
Both of them automatically adjust the shading. Auto
black shading is simply carried out when the lens is
closed. However, in the strict sense of the word, a
complete white subject for photography is needed for
auto white shading, in which there are two modes - one
keeps each of the R/G/B waves flat and the other
matches them to the G-channel.
Auto black balance (ABB)
Auto black balance automatically adjusts the black
level to prevent coloring other than black, which
occurs while the lens is closed. Sometimes, black set
is also carried out at the same time. Some CCD
cameras use APR (Automatic Pixel Restoration) to
perform auto black balance for convenience.
File system
Increasing camera functions also expands the number
of its setting items. In order to improve the operability
and make it easy, setting and correction information
are stored in the files in the camera, while the reference
and scene files are stored on a memory card.
Auto Iris
Auto iris is a function that automatically controls the
aperture (lens opening) based on the mean or the
peak value of video signals.
Lens file
Lenses of the cameras for broadcasting use are often
changed to meet different shooting environments.
Since each lens has its own characteristic, individual
settings and adjustments have to be done every time
the lens is changed. In order to improve the operability,
a lens file is developed to store the setting data that
can be recalled so to skip over the process of setting
and adjustment to save time.
Auto set up
Auto set up is a function for camera automatic
adjustment which can be divided into Auto White
Balance (AWB), Auto Tracing White (ATW), Auto Black
Balance (ABB), Level Auto Setup, Auto White Shading,
Auto Black Shading, etc.
Level auto set up
Level auto set up is a function that automatically keeps
adjusting the camera to a standard setting, e.g.
automatically adjusting gamma, knee, etc.
Auto tracing white (ATW)
It is a convenient function for low-end or consumer
type cameras, which automatically keeps adjusting the
white balance during shooting. However, most of the
cameras used for broadcast applications do not adopt
this method because the white balance is not very
precise and the ongoing changing of color
temperature is not usually a variable to consider
because scenes are staged and controlled.
Pattern auto iris
Pattern auto iris is used to emphasize auto iris on
certain portions of the screen, e.g. granting priority to
the center portion, cutting the upper portion, or
emphasizing the center.
Auto white balance (AWB)
Reference file
Auto white balance automatically adjusts color
temperature when shooting a white subject.
A reference file is a place to store setting data for
normal status that varies depending on the user’s
individual settings. The data is also the target value for
“level auto set up” including not only the analog control
data but also the digital file data for switch settings.
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 9 Glossary – Terms and Definitions 175
Scene file
camera setting data made during rehearsal can be
stored in a scene file and then be recalled during an
actual take.
9
A scene file is a place to temporally store the data that
differs from the normal settings. For instance, a
9-3. Camera characteristics
Most of the camera characteristics cannot just be
determined by numbers. Good values do not always
equal good picture quality. Judging by human eyes is
one of the most important processes to evaluate a
camera. The following are a few technical terms to be
familiar with:
different DTL settings. Usually, it is measured when
IRIS is closed, gamma is off, DTL is off, Chroma is off,
and the pedestal level is set at 5%.
There is a close relationship between S/N,
sensitivity, and dynamic range. When we raise the
sensitivity, the S/N and dynamic range will decrease.
So, it is difficult to decide to emphasize which item
while the other two items will be affected. Although the
measured value of the S/N is important, it seems that
the S/N judged by human eyes after gamma and DTL
are set is more important.
Modulation depth
Modulation depth is used to measure a camera’s
fundamental performance. It shows a video level
percentage of a 0.5 MHz pulse wave in a subject so
that the 0.5 MHz pulse wave video level is 100% as
black to white, by shooting a Multi Burst chart while
Detail, Gamma, Matrix and Knee are off. The camera’s
performance is calculated by measuring the 0.5 MHz
response in the actual video bandwidth. Usually, the
frequency characteristics of the amplifier should be
kept flat, because if the level is raised too high, aliasing
noise will increase and the S/N becomes worse. In
actual shooting, picture quality is adjusted by adding
Detail signals to enhance the response.
Weight and balance
Very naturally, less weight is better for shoulder-
operated equipment. However, balance is also a very
important factor. If the camera weight is too low, then
the overall balance of the camera will be off when a
large lens is attached.
Power consumption and heating
Power consumption is a factor that develops heat,
which is critical for shoulder-operating production
cameras although it is a little bit relaxed for studio
cameras. Using a cooling fan to reduce heating is not
a good solution, because the camera operator can
hear this noise. So, low power consumption is an
essential factor.
Reliability
Reliability is one of the most important factors when we
evaluate a camera. Unlike other broadcasting
equipment, cameras are often used outside under
severe circumstances such as live broadcasting of
skiing events below the freezing point or live
broadcasting of baseball in mid-summer, where
reliability always has first priority and a camera
malfunction is not acceptable.
Resolution
When we are talking about camera resolution, it usually
means horizontal resolution. It is calculated on how
many black and white lines that you can see
horizontally in a subject to that of the black and white
lines counted independently. For instance, a black line
and a white line are counted as two lines. When it is
converted to vertical resolution, because the definition
is how many lines can be seen vertically, it should be
revised with the aspect ratio. Therefore, even though
the horizontal pixel number is the same; resolution of
4:3 is better than that of 16:9.
Since the video signals of most of the cameras are
processed digitally, the resolution limit is fixed; this is
why the modulation depth has become to be regarded
as more important.
S/N (signal-to-noise ratio), Sensitivity and dynamic
range
When we are talking about camera S/N, it usually
means the S/N of black. The black level is amplified by
gamma and its gain greatly affects the S/N, which vary
between different manufacturers and even - different
models from the same manufacturer. Of course, users
also have different tastes. S/N is also changed by
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 9 Glossary – Terms and Definitions 176
10-1. HDC-900, HD Color Video Camera
10
General
For MIC:
–60 dBs (may be
Operating temperature –20°C to +45°C (–4°F to
113°F)
selected to –20 dBs by
viewfinder menu or
HDCU-900 operations),
balanced
Storage temperature
–20°C to +50°C (–4°F to
122°F)
Mass Approx.
21 kg (46 lb 5 oz) (main unit
only)
For LINE:
Dimensions
See below
–20 dBs, balanced
(Unit: mm/inches)
Output connectors
Imager
Imager
TEST OUT
BNC type (1)
1.0 Vp-p, 75-ohm
terminated
2/3-type frame interline
transfer CCD
Method
Effective resolution
3-CCD, RGB
1920 (horizontal) × 1080
(vertical)
PROMPTER
BNC type (1)
1.0 Vp-p, 75-ohm
terminated
AC OUT
HD SERIAL OUT
VF
100 V AC (1)
1.5 Gbps (1)
D-sub 25-pin (1)
4-pin (1)
Optical system specifications
Spectral system
Built-in filters
f1.4 prism
DC OUT
Color temperature
conversion filters
A: cross filter
B: 3200K (clear)
C: 4300K
DC 12 V, 5 W
Input/output connectors
CCU
Electro-optical connector
(1)
D: 6300K
E: 8000K
VTR
26-pin (1)
ND filters
TRACKER
20-pin (1)
1: clear
2: 1/4 ND
REMOTE
INTERCOM 1 and 2
8-pin multi-connector (1)
XLR 5-pin (1 each)
3: 1/8 ND
4: 1/16 ND
5: 1/64 ND
Yes
Supplied accessories
Angle adjustment brackets (2)
Front cover (1)
Servo filter control
Lens mount
Sony hanger mount
Number plates
• for up tally (1 set)
Electrical characteristics
Sensitivity
• for side panel (2 sets)
• for back tally (1 set)
Cable clamp (2)
Operation manual (1)
Installation & maintenance manual (1)
F10.0 (at 2000 lx with
89.9% reflectivity)
10 lux (F 1.4, +12 dB gain
up)
Minimum illumination
Image signal-to-noise ratio
54 dB or more (typical)
1000 TV lines
Dynamic range (1080/60i mode)
600 %
Optional accessories
HDVF-700A HD Electronic Viewfinder (7-type,
monochrome)
HDVF-C700W HD Electronic Viewfinder (6-type,
color)
VFH-770 Outdoor Hood
BKP-7911 Script Holder (with script light)
CAC-6 Return Video Selector
Maintenance manual CD-ROM version
Horizontal resolution
Registration
Within 0.02 % (all zones,
without lens)
Shutter speed selection (1080/60i)
1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000 (s)
–3, 0, +3, +6, +12 dB
60.1 to 4300 Hz
Gain selection
Clear Scan selection
Extended Clear Scan
Modulation depth
30.3 to 58.3 Hz
45 % or more horizontally
(800 TV lines at center,
27.5 MHz, with typical lens)
–135 dB
Within 0.5 dB, 10 to 25
MHz
Smear level (typical)
Frequency response
Within 1.0 dB, 25 to 30
MHz
Horizontal resolution
Geometric distortion
1000 TV lines (at center of
screen)
45 +10, –5% (27.5 MHz)
Negligible (not including
lens distortion)
Input connectors
DC IN
RET CONTROL
4-pin (1)
6-pin (1)
AUDIO IN CH-1, CH-2 XLR 3-pin, male (1 each)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 178
10
Dimensions Unit: mm(inches)
463 (18 1/4)
368 (14 1/2)
388 (15 3/8)
1
80
(3 1/4)
392 (15 1/2)
442 (17 1/2)
Dimensions Unit: mm(inches)
368 (14 1/2)
260 (10 1/4)
368 (14 1/2)
260 (10 1/4)
15
(10/32)
OPTICAL CENTER
OPTICAL CENTER
10-2. HDC-950, HD Color Video Camera
General
Horizontal resolution
1000 TV lines
Power consumption
25W (in stand-alone use,
without options)
Dynamic range (1080/60i mode)
600 %
Operating temperature –20° C to +45° C (–4° F to
+113° F)
Registration
Within 0.02 % (all zones,
without lens)
Storage temperature
–20° C to +50° C (–4° F to
Shutter speed selection (1080/60i)
+122° F)
1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
Mass Approx.
Dimensions
(Unit: mm/inches)
5.1 kg (112 lb 7 oz)
See below
1/1000, 1/2000 (s)
–3, 0, +3, +6, +12 dB
60.1 to 4300 Hz
Gain selection
Clear Scan selection
Extended Clear Scan
Modulation depth
30.3 to 58.3 Hz
45 % or more horizontally
(800 TV lines at center,
27.5 MHz, with typical lens)
–135 dB
Within 0.5 dB, 10 to 25
MHz
Imager
Imager
2/3-type frame interline
transfer CCD
3-CCD, RGB
1920 (horizontal) × 1080
(vertical)
Smear level (typical)
Frequency response
Method
Effective resolution
Within 1.0 dB, 25 to 30
MHz
Electrical characteristics
Horizontal resolution
Geometric distortion
1000 TV lines (at center of
screen)
45 +10, –5% (27.5 MHz)
Negligible (not including
lens distortion)
Sensitivity
F10.0 (at 2000 lx with
89.9% reflectivity)
10 lux (F 1.4, +12 dB gain
up)
Minimum illumination
Image signal-to-noise ratio
54 dB or more (typical)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 179
Optical system specifications
DC OUT
4-pin (1), 10.5 to 17 V DC,
5W maximum
BNC type (1)
XLR 5-pin, female (1)
BNC type (1)
10
Spectral system
Built-in filters
F1.4 prism
Color temperature
conversion filters
A: cross filter
B: 3200K (clear)
C: 4300K
HD SERIAL OUT
INCOM1 and 2
TEST OUT
GENLOCK IN/RET IN/PROMPT OUT
BNC type (1), 1 Vp-p,
D: 6300K
E: 8000K
ND filters
75 ohms
6-pin (1)
8-pin (1)
20-pin (1)
20-pin (1)
RET CONT
REMOTE
TRACKER
EXT I/O
1: clear
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/8 ND
4: 1/16 ND
5: 1/64 ND
Yes
Supplied accessories
Operation manual (1)
Installation & maintenance manual (1)
Servo filter control
Lens mount
Sony bayonet mount
Laser Diode Properties
Material:
Wave length:
Emission duration:
Laser output power: 141 +37 –19 mW
Optional accessories
BKP-L551 Battery Adaptor
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
C-74 Microphone
CA-905L Large Lens Adaptor
CAC-6 Return Video Selector
CAC-12 Microphone holder
HDVF-20A HD Electronic Viewfinder
HDVF-C750W HD Electronic Viewfinder
MSA-4A/8A/16A Memory Stick
VCT-14 Tripod adaptor
InGaAsP
1310 40 nm
Continuous
Input/output connectors
VTR
CCU
LENS
CCZ, 26-pin (1)
Electro-multi connector (1)
12-pin (1)
VF
20-pin (1)
MIC IN
XLR 3-pin, female (1)
XLR 3-pin, female (1)
Minijack (1), 8 ohms
XLR 4-pin (1), 10.5 to 17 V
DC
Maintenance manual CD-ROM version
AUDIO IN 1, 2
EARPHONE OUT
DC IN
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Dimensions Unit: mm (inches)
133 (5 1/4)
348 (13 3/4)
10-3. HDC-930, HD Color Video Camera
General
Power consumption
Imager
2/3-type interline transfer
CCD
3-CCD, RGB
25W (in stand-alone use,
without options)
Method
Operating temperature –20° C to +45° C (–4° F to
Effective resolution
1920 (horizontal) × 1080
+113° F)
(vertical)
Storage temperature
–20° C to +50° C (–4° F to
+122° F)
Electrical characteristics
Mass Approx.
Dimensions
(Unit: mm/inches)
5.1 kg (112 lb 7 oz)
See below
Sensitivity
F10.0 (at 2000 lx with
89.9% reflectivity)
10 lux (F 1.4, +12 dB gain
up)
Minimum illumination
Imager
Image signal-to-noise ratio
54 dB or more (typical)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 180
Horizontal resolution
Dynamic range (1080/60i mode)
600 %
1000 TV lines
Emission duration:
Laser output power:
Continuous
141 +37 –19 mW
10
Registration
Within 0.02 % (all zones,
without lens)
Shutter speed selection (1080/60i)
1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
Input/output connectors
VTR
CCU
LENS
VF
MIC IN
AUDIO IN 1, 2
EARPHONE OUT
DC IN
CCZ, 26-pin (1)
Electro-multi connector (1)
12-pin (1)
1/1000, 1/2000 (s)
–3, 0, +3, +6, +12 dB
60.1 to 4300 Hz
45 % or more horizontally
(800 TV lines at center,
27.5 MHz, with typical lens)
–125 dB
Within ±0.5 dB, 10 to 25
MHz
Within ±1.0 dB, 25 to 30
MHz
20-pin (1)
Gain selection
Clear Scan selection
Modulation depth
XLR 3-pin, female (1)
XLR 3-pin, female (1)
Minijack (1), 8 ohms
XLR 4-pin (1), 10.5 to 17 V
DC
4-pin (1), 10.5 to 17 V DC,
5W maximum
BNC type (1)
Smear level (typical)
Frequency response
DC OUT
HD SERIAL OUT
INCOM1 and 2
TEST OUT
XLR 5-pin, female (1)
BNC type (1)
Horizontal resolution
Geometric distortion
1000 TV lines (at center of
screen)
45 +10, –5% (27.5 MHz)
Negligible (not including
lens distortion)
GENLOCK IN/RET IN/PROMPT OUT
BNC type (1), 1 Vp-p,
75 ohms
6-pin (1)
8-pin (1)
20-pin (1)
20-pin (1)
RET CONT
REMOTE
TRACKER
EXT I/O
Optical system specifications
Spectral system
F1.4 prism
Built-in filters
Color temperature
conversion filters
A: cross filter
B: 3200K (clear)
C: 4300K
D: 6300K
E: 8000K
ND filters
Supplied accessories
Operation manual (1)
Installation & maintenance manual (1)
Optional accessories
BKP-L551 Battery Adaptor
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
C-74 Microphone
1: clear
2: 1/4 ND
3: 1/8 ND
CA-905L Large Lens Adaptor
CAC-6 Return Video Selector
CAC-12 Microphone holder
HDVF-20A HD Electronic Viewfinder
HDVF-C750W HD Electronic Viewfinder
MSA-4A/8A/16A Memory Stick
VCT-14 Tripod adaptor
4: 1/16 ND
5: 1/64 ND
Yes
Servo filter control
Lens mount
Sony bayonet mount
Laser Diode Properties
Material:
Wave length:
Maintenance manual CD-ROM version
InGaAsP
1310 ±40 nm
Design and specifications are subject to change without
notice.
Dimensions Unit: mm (inches)
133 (5 1/4)
348 (13 3/4)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 181
10-4. HDCU-900, HD Camera Control Unit
10
General
WF REMOTE
D-sub 15-pin, female (1)
(JAEmade DA-C1-J10
recommended)
Power supply
100/110-120/220-240 V
AC, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption
Peak inrush current
5.4 A (at 100 V AC, entire
system active)
(1) Power ON, current
probe method:
HD SERIAL OUTPUT
BNC type (3)
SMPTE-292M, 0.8 Vp-p, 75
ohms,
Bit rate: 1.485 Gbps/
1.4835 Gbps
HD SERIAL MONI OUTPUT
BNC type (1), SMPTE-
80 A (240 V), 80 A (100
V)
(2) Hot switching inrush
current, measured in
accordance with European
standard EN55103-1:
10 A (230 V)
292M,
0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms
Bit rate: 1.485 Gbps/
1.4835 Gbps
Operating temperature 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)
SD SERIAL OUTPUT
SYNC OUT
BNC type (4), SMPTE-
259M,
0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms
Bit rate: 270 Mbps
BNC type (1)
Storage temperature
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to
+140°F)
Mass Approx.
Dimensions
20 kg (44 lb 1 oz)
See below
(Unit: mm/inches)
HD: BTA S001A, tri-level
sync, 0.6 Vp-p, 75 ohms
SD: composite sync, 0.3
Vp-p, 75 ohms
Input/Output connectors
CAMERA
Optical fiber connector (1)
HD SYNC or SD SYNC
selectable
1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps SDI’ 2,
240 V AC power supply
PIX OUT
WF OUT
WF MODE
BNC type (1), VBS/R/G/B
(VBS 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms)
BNC type (1), VBS/R/G/B
(VBS 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms)
4-pin (1)
INCOM/TALLY/PGM
D-sub 25-pin (1)
• INCOM-4W, 2 systems (PD /ENG), 0 dB
• PGM, 2 systems, 0 / –20 dB
• TALLY (R, G)
RCP/CNU REMOTE
TRUNK LINE
8-pin multi-connector (1)
D-sub 9-pin, female (1)
RS-232C, for CHU
transmission or system
expansion
D-sub 15-pin, female (1)
(JAE-made DA-C1-J10
recommended)
Supplied accessories
AC power cord (1)
Power cord plug holder (1)
2-pin/3-pin transformer AC plug (1)
4-pin connector (1)
I/O PORT
Number plates (1 set)
Fuses (1 set)
Operation manual (1)
Input connectors
Maintenance manual Part 1 (1)
AC IN
100, 110 to 120, 220 to 240
V AC switchable
HD SERIAL RET INPUT BNC type (4), SMPTE-
Optional accessories
292M,
Bit rate: 1.485 Gbps/
1.4835 Gbps
HKCU-901 SD Analog Interface Unit
HKCU-902 HD Analog Interface Unit
HKCU-903 Frame Rate Converter Unit
HKCU-904 Line Converter Unit
CCA-5-3 Connection Cable (3 meter/10 feet)
CCA-5-10 Connection Cable (10 meter/33 feet)
Maintenance manual Part 2
SD SERIAL RET INPUT BNC type (4), SMPTE-
259M
Bit rate: 270 Mbps
BNC type (2), loop-through
output
REFERENCE INPUT
HD: SMPTE-274M, tri-level
sync, 0.6 Vp-p, 75 ohms
SD: Black burst (or 10F-
BB), 0.286 Vp-p, 75 ohms
(NTSC)
0.3 Vp-p, 75 ohms (PAL)
BNC type (2), loop-through
output, analog signal, 1.0
Vp-p, 75 ohms
D-sub 15-pin (1) (JAE-
made DAC1-J10
PROMPTER IN
MIC REMOTE
recommended)
Output connectors
MIC OUT
XLR 3-pin, male (2), 0 dBs/
–20 dBs
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT BNC type (1), AES/EBU
format
CHARACTER OUT
BNC type (1), 525/625
black and white
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 182
10
Dimensions Unit: mm (inches)
424 (16 3/4)
465 (18 3/8)
481 (19)
10-5.HDCU-950, HD Camera Control Unit
General
Power supply
Current consumption
Standby power Approx. 5 W
Peak inrush current (1) Power ON, current
HD-SDI: SMPTE-292M,
1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
SD-SDI: SMPTE-259M, 270
Mbps
BNC type (2), loop-through
output
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
3.6 A max.
REFERENCE
probe method:
30A (240V), 8A (100V)
(2) Hot switching inrush
current, measured in
accordance with European
standard EN55103-1:
26A (230V)
HD: SMPTE-274M, tri-level
sync, 0.6 Vp-p, 75 ohms
SD: Black burst
(NTSC: 0.286 Vp-p, 75
ohms)
(PAL: 0.3 Vp-p, 75
ohms)
Operating temperature –10°C to +40°C (+14°F to
+104°F)
or NTSC 10F-BB
Storage temperature
–20°C to +50°C (–4°F to
+122°F)
6.5 kg (14 lb 5 oz)
See below
PROMPTER
BNC type (2), loop-through
output, analog signal, 1.0
Vp-p, 75 ohms
D-sub 15-pin (1) (JAE-
made DAC1-J10
recommended)
Mass Approx.
Dimensions
(Unit: mm/inches)
MIC REMOTE
(switchable to WF
REMOTE by an internal
setting)
Input/output connectors
CAMERA
1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps SDI × 2,
180 V DC power supply
Optical fiber connector (1)
INCOM/TALLY/PGM
D-sub 25-pin (1)
Output connectors
• INCOM-4W, 2 systems
(PD /ENG), 0 dB
MIC
XLR 3-pin, male (2),0 dBu/
–20 dBu
• PGM, 2 systems, 0 dB/
–20 dB
• TALLY (R, G)
HD SDI OUT
SD SDI OUT
MONI (HD SDI)
BNC type (2), SMPTE-
292M, 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
1.485 Gbps/1.4835 Gbps
BNC type (2), SMPTE-
259M, 0.8 Vp-p, 75 ohms,
270 Mbps
BNC type (1), 0.8 Vp-p, 75
ohms, 1.485 Gbps/1.4835
Gbps
RCP/CNU
8-pin multi-connector (1)
Input connectors
AC IN
RET 1/2/3
100 to 240 V AC
BNC type (3),
VBS: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 183
SYNC OUT
BNC type (1)
Optional accessories
AC power cord:
USA and Canada: 1-551-812-XX
Other countries: 1-782-929-XX
Power cord plug holder:
USA and Canada: 2-990-242-01
Other countries: 3-613-640-01
HKCU-951 SD Encoder Unit
HKCU-953 HD Frame Rate Converter Unit
CCA-5-3 Connection Cable (3 meter/10 feet)
CCA-5-10 Connection Cable (10 meter/33 feet)
RMM-301 Rack Mount Adaptor
Expansion Board
10
HD: BTA S001A, tri-level
sync, 0.6 Vp-p, 75 ohms
SD: composite sync, 0.3
Vp-p, 75 ohms
HD SYNC or SD SYNC
selectable
BNC type (1), VBS/R/G/B
(VBS 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms)
BNC type (1), VBS/R/G/B
(VBS 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms)
4-pin (1)
PIX OUT
WF OUT
WF MODE
Supplied accessories
4-pin connector (1)
Number plates (1 set)
Operation manual (1)
.
Installation and maintenance manual (1)
Dimensions Unit: mm (inches)
1
POWER
CAM
CABLE
ALRAM
OPEN
MAIN
SHORT
INCOM MIC ON
OFF
PROD
PRIV
PGM
ENG
HD CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
200 (7 7/8)
5 (7/32)
9 (3/8)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 184
10-6. CNU-700, Camera Command Network Unit
10
General
Power requirements
RCP 1 through 6
8-pin multi-connector (1
each)
8-pin multi-connector (1)
8-pin multi-connector (1)
8-pin multi-connector (1
each)
For United States: 100 to
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
For other countries: 220 to
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Max.4.0 A
MSU
VCS
AUX 1 and 2
Current consumption
Operating temperature 0°C to +45°C (+32°F to
+113°F)
CHARACTER
REFERENCE
BNC type (2), video: 0.7
Vp-p, sync: 0.3 Vp-p
BNC type (2), 0.3 Vp-p with
loop-through output
D-sub 9-pin
Dimensions
424 (W) × 132 (H) × 400
(D) mm
(16 3/4 × 5 1/4 × 15 3/4
inches)
RS232C
AC IN
3-pin (1)
Mass
9.5 kg (20 lb 15 oz)
Supplied accessories
Input and output connectors
CCU 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1
each)
AC power cord x1
Plug holder for the AC power cord x1
Operation manual x1
Maintenance manual x1
10-7. CNU-500, Camera Command Network Unit
General
Power requirements
RCP 1 through 6
8-pin multi-connector (1
each)
8-pin multi-connector (1)
8-pin multi-connector (1)
8-pin multi-connector (1
each)
For United States: 100 to
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
For other countries: 220 to
240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Max.4.0 A
MSU
VCS
AUX 1 and 2
Current consumption
Operating temperature 5°C to +45°C (+41°F to
+113°F)
CHARACTER
REFERENCE
BNC type (2), video: 0.7
Vp-p, sync: 0.3 Vp-p
BNC type (2), 0.3 Vp-p with
loop-through output
D-sub 9-pin
Dimensions
424 (W) × 45 (H) × 400 (D)
mm
(16 3/4 × 1 3/4 × 15 3/4
inches)
RS232C
AC IN
3-pin (1)
Mass
7 kg (15 lb 7 oz)
Supplied accessories
Input and output connectors
CCU 1 through 6 8-pin multi-connector (1
each)
AC power cord x1
Plug holder for the AC power cord x1
Operation manual x1
Maintenance manual x1
10-8. VCS-700, Video selector
General
For other countries: 1.0 Vp-
Power requirements
In United States: 100 to 120
VAC, 50/60 Hz
p (VBS)/0.7 Vp-p (V), 75
ohms
In other countries: 220 to
240VAC, 50/60 Hz
For USA and Canada: Max
0.28A
PIX A INPUT
BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p
(VBS), 75 ohms
BNC type (1), 1.0 Vp-p
(VBS), 75 ohms
Current consumption
WF A INPUT
For other countries:
Max.0.28 A
Operating temperature 0°C to +45°C (+32°F to
CHARACTER INPUT
BNC type (1, with loop-
through output), 0.7 Vp-p
(V), 75 ohms
+113°F)
AC IN
3-pin (1)
Dimensions
Mass
424 (W) × 44 (H) × 400 (D)
mm
(16 3/4 × 1 3/4 × 15 3/4
inches)
Output connectors
PIX A and PIX B OUTPUT
BNC type (1 each), 1.0 Vp-
p (VBS), 75 ohms
5.2 kg (11 lb 7 oz)
WF A and WF B OUTUT For USA and Canada: 1.0
Vp-p (VBS)/0.7 Vp-p (V),
75 ohms
Input Connectors
PIX 1 to PIX 6 INPUT
BNC type (6), 1.0 Vp-p
(VBS), 75 ohms
BNC type (6),
For USA and Canada: 1.0
Vp-p (VBS)/0.714 Vp-p (V),
75 ohms
For other countries: 1.0 Vp-
p (VBS)/ 0.7 Vp-p (V), 75
ohms
WF 1to WF 6 INPUT
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 185
SYNC OUTPUT
WF MODE
BNC type (1), 0.3 Vp-p
(VBS), 75 ohms, negative
polarity
Supplied accessories
AC power cord x1
Plug holder for the AC power cord x1
4-pin connector x1
Operation manual x1
10
Round 4-pin connector (1)
Maintenance manual x1
Remote connectors
REMOTE
I/O PORT
8-pin multi-connector (1)
D-sub 37-pin (1)
10-9. MSU-700A, Master Setup Unit
General
Mass
Approx. 4.5 kg (9 lb 15 oz)
Power requirements
Current consumption
Peak inrush current
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
0.45 A
(1) Power ON, current
probe method:
20A(100V), 55A (240V)
(2) Hot switching inrush
current, measured in
accordance with European
standard EN55103-1:
12A (230V)
Inputs/outputs
REMOTE
CCU/CNU
AUX
I/O PORT
AC IN
8-pin multi connector (1)
8-pin multi connector (1)
50-pin (1)
3-pin (1)
Supplied accessories
Operation Manual (1)
Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)
Maximum cable length 200 m (656 feet)
Maintenance Manual Part 1 (1)
Button labels for HD system (1 set)
Dimensions (w/h/d)
482 × 222 × 67 mm
(19 × 83/4 × 23/4 inches)
including projecting parts
and controls
Optional accessories
AC power cord
10-10. MSU-750, Master Setup Unit
General
Mass
Approx. 3.5 kg (7 lb 11 oz)
Power requirements
Current consumption
Peak inrush current
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
0.4 A
(1) Power ON, current
probe method:
30A(100V), 60A (240V)
(2) Hot switching inrush
current, measured in
accordance with European
standard EN55103-1:
14A (230V)
Inputs/outputs
REMOTE
CCU/CNU
AUX
8-pin multi connector (1)
8-pin multi connector (1)
3-pin (1)
AC IN
Supplied accessories
Operation Manual (1)
Maintenance Manual Part 1 (1)
Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)
Maximum cable length 200 m (656 feet)
Optional accessories
AC power cord
Dimensions (w/h/d)
204 × 354 × 67 mm
(81/8 × 14 × 23/4 inches)
including projecting parts
and controls
10-11. RCP-750/751, Remote Control Panel
General
Power requirements
Power consumption
Inputs/outputs
REMOTE
10.5 to 35 V DC
4 W max.
CCU/CNU: 8-pin multi
connector (1)
Maximum cable length 200 m (656 feet) with CCU/
HDCU connected
AUX: 8-pin multi connector
(1)
Operating temperature 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)
EXT I/O
9-pin D-sub connector (1)
Dimensions (w/h/d)
RCP-750:
102 × 354 × 126.5 mm
(4 1/8 × 14 × 5 inches)
RCP-751:
Supplied accessory
Operation Manual (1)
102 × 354 × 86.5 mm
(4 1/8 × 14 × 31/2
inches)
Optional accessories
Remote cable CCA-5-3 (3 m)
Remote cable CCA-5-10 (10 m)
Remote cable CCA-5-30 (30 m)
Maintenance Manual
Mass
RCP-750: 1.5 kg (3 lb 5 oz)
RCP-751: 1.3 kg (2 lb 14
oz)
Memory Stick
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 186
10-12. RCP-700/701, Remote Control Panel
10
Connectors
Dimensions
RCP-700: 68 (W) × 221 (H)
× 127 (D) mm (2 3/4 × 8 3/
4 × 5 inches)
RCP-701: 68 (W) × 221 (H)
× 83 (D) mm (2 3/4 × 8 3/4
× 3 3/8 inches)
REMOTE
CCU/CNU: 8-Pin
PREVIEW: 8-Pin
I/O port: 29-pin
Power requirements
Mass
30 VDC
RCP-700: 1.0 kg (2 lb 3 oz)
RCP-701: 0.9 kg (2 lb)
10-13. RM-B150 (front panel), Hand-held Remote Control Unit
General
Power Requirements
Mass
Approx. 0.7 kg (1 lb 9 oz)
DC 10.5 – 30 V (max)
(supplied from camera/
camcorder/CCU
Inputs
Control interface
8-pin (x 1), Sony Camera
Command
Network Protocol
Operating Temperature –20°C to +45°C
Storage Temperature –20°C to +55°C
Dimensions (W × H × D)86 mm × 65 mm × 179 mm
Monitor in
BNC type (x 1) VBS (No HD
(3 1/2 × 2 5/8 × 7 1/8
signal capable)
inches)
10-14. RM-B750 (front panel), Hand-held Remote Control Unit
General
Power Requirements
Mass
Approx. 0.7 kg (1 lb 9 oz)
DC 10.5 – 30 V (max)
(supplied from camera/
camcorder/CCU
Inputs
Control interface
8-pin (x 1), Sony Camera
Command
Network Protocol
Operating Temperature +5°C to +40°C
Storage Temperature –20°C to +55°C
Dimensions (W × H × D)197 mm × 62 mm × 124
Monitor in
BNC type (x 1) VBS (No HD
mm
signal capable)
(7 7/8 × 2 1/2 × 5 inches)
10-15. HDVF-20A, HD Electronic Viewfinder
General
Power requirements
Power consumption
Operating temperature –20°C to +45° C (–4°F to
+113°F)
Storage temperature
External dimensions
Mass
Effective
scanning
lines
Horizontal
scanning
frequency frequency
Vertical
scanning
10.5 to 17 V DC
4 W
Format
1080
1080
1035
1035
59.94i
60i
33.72kHz
33.75kHz
33.72kHz
33.75kHz
59.94Hz
60Hz
–20°C to +50°C (–4°F to
122°F)
239 × 76 × 210 mm (9 1/2
× 3 × 8 3/8 inches) (w/h/d)
600 g (1 lb 5 oz)
59.94i
60i
59.94Hz
60Hz
Video input
Indicators
1.0 Vp-p 6 dB, 75-ohms
terminated
REC/TALLY, BATT, VTR
SAVE,
Performance
CRT
Horizontal resolution
2-type monochrome
500 TV lines (at center)
Conforming to BTA-S001
and SMPTE274M
Signal system
Accessories
Microphone spacer (diameter 19 mm) (1)
Microphone spacer (diameter 21 mm) (1)
Operation manual (1)
standards
Supported formats
Effective
scanning
lines
Horizontal
scanning
frequency frequency
Vertical
scanning
Optional accessories
Format
BKW-401 Viewfinder Rotation Bracket
Fog-proof filter (Part No. 1-547-341-12)
Lens assembly (farsighted) (Part No. A-8262-537-A)
Lens assembly (low magnification) (Part No. A-
8262-538-A)
Lens assembly (standard magnification with special
compensation for aberrations) (Part No. A-8267-
737-A)
1080
1080
1080
1080
1080
1080
23.98PsF
24PsF
25PsF
29.97PsF
30PsF
50i
26.97kHz
27kHz
47.95Hz
48Hz
28.13kHz
33.72kHz
33.75kHz
28.13kHz
50Hz
59.94Hz
60Hz
50Hz
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 187
10-16. HDVF-700A, HD Electronic Viewfinder
10
General
Power supply
Effective
scanning
lines
Horizontal
scanning
Vertical
scanning
10.5 to 17.0 V DC (supplied
by the camera)
33 W
Format
frequency frequency
Power consumption
Operating temperature 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
1035
1035
59.94i
60i
33.72kHz
33.75kHz
59.94Hz
60Hz
Mass
5.0 kg (11 lb) not including
hood
Video input
Video input
1.0 Vp-p 6 dB, 75-ohms
terminated
1.0 Vp-p 6 dB (SMPTE
240M), 75-ohms
terminated
Back porch type
External dimensions:
See below
CRT
CRT
7-type monochrome, 90°
deflection
160 × 131 mm (6 3/8 × 5 1/
4 in)
120 × 90 mm (4 3/4 × 3 5/8
in) (4:3 aspect ratio)
DC restoration
CRT Dimensions
Picture size
Back porch level: within
2% of peak
(The fluctuation in black
level against 10% to 90%
fluctuation in APL)
0.1 to 23 MHz ( 2 dB)
23 to 27 MHz ( 3 dB)
0 to 18 dB (17 MHz)
Line pull range:
Horizontal, 500 Hz or
more
Vertical, –10 Hz or more
Line hold range:
Deflection and high voltage
Brightness
Resolution
Frequency response
500 cd/m2
800 lines at center
600 lines at edges
2.0% or less
Peaking
Synchronization
Geometric distortion
EHT voltage regulation within 2.0%
EHT voltage
12.5 kV (standard)
Input voltages and signal characteristics
Supported formats
500 Hz or more
Connectors
CAMERA connector
Effective
scanning
lines
Horizontal
scanning
frequency frequency
Vertical
scanning
D-sub 25-pin
Format
Supplied accessories
Studio monitor hood (1)
Number plate (1)
Fuse (1)
1080
1080
1080
1080
1080
1080
1080
1080
23.98PsF
24PsF
25PsF
29.97PsF
30PsF
50i
26.97kHz
27kHz
47.95Hz
48Hz
28.13kHz
33.72kHz
33.75kHz
28.13kHz
33.72kHz
33.75kHz
50Hz
Operation manual (1)
59.94Hz
60Hz
Optional accessories
VFH-770 Outdoor Hood
50Hz
59.94i
60i
59.94Hz
60Hz
External dimensions Unit: mm(inches)
265 (10 1/2)
362 (14 3/8)
300 (11 7/8)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 188
10-17. HDVF-C700W/C750W, HD Electronic Viewfinder
10
General
Power supply
Effective
scanning
lines
Horizontal
scanning
Vertical
scanning
DC10.5 to 17.0V (supplied
by the camera)
10W
Format
frequency frequency
Power consumption
Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)
1080
1080
1035
1035
59.94i
60i
33.72kHz
33.75kHz
33.72kHz
33.75kHz
59.94Hz
60Hz
Storage temperature
–20°C to 60°C (–4°F to
140°F)
59.94i
60i
59.94Hz
60Hz
Mass
HDVF-C750W: 2.0kg(4.4
lb) not including hood
HDVF-C700W: 2.2kg(4.9
lb) not including hood
See below
Color temperature
Indicators
6500K
R TALLY/G TALLY/BATT/
External dimensions:
LCD
LCD
Input signals
Pb,Pr:
6-type color TFT screen
0.7Vp-p, asynchronous,
75-W terminated
1.0Vp-p, synchronous, 75-
W terminated
Image display area dimensions
132 × 74mm (5 1/4 × 3 in)
(16:9 aspect ratio)
Tally lamps display area dimensions
Y :
132 × 4mm (5 1/4 × 3/16 in,
the upper and the lower
part)
Connectors
CAMERA connector
HDVF-C750W: Round type 20-pin
HDVF-C700W: D-sub 25-pin
Performance
Brightness
Resolution
300cd/m2
500 or more lines
Supplied accessories
Monitor hood (1)
Number plate (1)
Supported formats
Operation manual (1)
The followings are supplied with the HDVF-C750W
only:
Effective
scanning
lines
Horizontal
scanning
frequency frequency
Vertical
scanning
Format
V-shaped shoe attachment (1)
Hexagonal key (1)
Hexagonal socket head screws (4)
Connecting cable (1)
1080
1080
1080
1080
1080
1080
23.98PsF
24PsF
25PsF
29.97PsF
30PsF
50i
26.97kHz
27kHz
47.95Hz
48Hz
28.13kHz
33.72kHz
33.75kHz
28.13kHz
50Hz
59.94Hz
60Hz
Optional accessories
VHF-770 Outdoor Hood
50Hz
External dimensions Unit: mm(inches)
HDVF-C750W:
259 (10 1/4)
216 (8 5/8)
HDVF-C700W:
260 (10 1/4)
314 (12 3/8)
258 (10 1/4)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 189
10-18. HKC-T950, HD CCD Block Adaptor
10
General
MIC IN
VIDEO OUT (HD Y)
XLR-3 (Female)
BNC × 1
Current consumption
13.0 to 17.0 V DC
Operating temperature –20 °C to +45 °C
LENS
VF
12 Pin
20 Pin
Operating humidity
Mass
10% to 90% (no
condensation)
Cable adapter:
Approx. 0.5 kg (1 lb 2
oz)
INCOM
XLR-5 (Female)
Cable adaptor I/F
Camera cable
MIC OUT
VF
INCOM
CCZ type 26pin (Female)
XLR-3 (Male)
20 Pin
CCD block adapter:
Approx. 0.85 kg (1 lb 14
oz) (adapter only)
Approx. 1.65 kg (3 lb 10
oz) (with the CCD
block)
XLR-5 (Male)
Supplied accessories
HDCZ-A10 cable (10 m) (1), VF relay cable (1),
MIC relay cable (1), INCOM relay cable (1),
Top cover (1), Operation manual (1)
Dimensions (W × H × D)Approx. 108 mm × 230.3
mm × 237 mm
(4 3/8 × 9 1/8 × 9 3/8
inches)
Optional accessories
HDCZ-A25 (25 m) Part number: 1-823-616-11
HDCZ-A50 (50 m) Part number: 1-523-617-11
CCD block adaptor I/F
Camera cable
CCZ type 26 pin (Male)
10-19. CA-905L, Large Lens Adaptor
General
Mass
Dimension (w/h/d)
12 kg (24 lb 4 oz)
368 × 327 ×x 534 mm
(14 5/8 × 13 × 21 1/8
inches)
Operating temperature range
–20 °C to + 45 °C
(–4 °F to +113 °F)
–20°C to + 55°C
(–4°F to +131°F)
90 W (Large lens and 7-
type color viewfinder with
the BKP-9057)
Storage temperature
Power Consumption
Input/Output connectors
CCU connector
LEMO type fiber connector
Lens connector (front) 36-pin
LENS connector (top) 12-pin
CA connector
REMOTE connector
LEMO type fiber connector
8-pin
Supplied accessories
Number plate (2) (side panel)
Number plate (1) (rear panel)
Cable clamp (2)
Operation manual including BKP-9057 (1)
Maintenance manual part 1 (1)
Angle-adjusting plates (2)
Rear-panel sticker (1)
Optional accessories
BVF-77/77CE 7-type monochrome viewfinder
HDVF-700A 7-type monochrome viewfinder
BVF-7700/7700P 7-type color viewfinder
(Only when the CCU-900/900P is used)
HDVF-C750W/C700W 6-type color LCD viewfinder
BVF-55/55CE 5-type monochrome viewfinder
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Chapter 10 Specifications 190
Function comparison chart – Paint
11
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
Menu
Sub Menu
Control Item
Direct
Button
Direct
Button
Direct
Menu
Direct
Button
Menu
Menu
Menu
Button
R/B/
Master
Black
R,G,B,Master
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
ABB
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
R/B
✔
White
R,G,B
✔
AWB
✔
*2
Flare
R,G,B
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Flare Off
Gamma/Knee
Gamma
Blk Gamma
Knee Point
Knee Slope
Gamma Off
Black Gamma (on/off)
Knee Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
Auto Knee (on/off)
R,G,B, Master
V Mod Saw Off
Level
✔
V mod Saw
Detail
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Detail 1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Limiter
Crispening
Level Dep
Level Dep Off
Detail Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
SD DTL Off
H/V Ratio
Detail 2
Detail 3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Frequency
Mix Ratio
Detail Comb
Detail Off
✔
✔
SD DTL Off
W. Limiter
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
B.Limiter
Knee Aperture
Knee Aperture(on/off)
Detail (on/off)
✔
✔
1/2/3
(common)
Skin Detail
Level
Phase
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Width
Saturation
Auto Hue#
✔(1)
✔(1)
DTL Gate
✔
✔
✔
Gate# (on/off)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Skin Dtl#(cach channel) (on/off)
SkinDetail (all channels) (on/off)
R,G,B, Master
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
✔
✔
✔
Gamma
Gamma 0.40, 0.45, 0.50
Gamma Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Black Gamma RGB
R,G,B, Master
Low/L Mid/H Mid/High Range
Black Gamma (on/off)
Y
*1
✔
✔
✔
Y
✔
✔
Low/L Mid/H Mid/High Range
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 192
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
11
Menu
Sub Menu
Control Item
Direct
Button
Direct
Button
Direct
Menu
Direct
Button
Menu
Menu
Menu
Button
Black Gam(Y) (on/off)
Standard
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Gamma Table
User
Standard (on/off)
User (on/off)
Gamma Off
Knee Point
R,G,B, Master
Auto Knee (on/off)
Knee Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Knee Slope
R,G,B Master
Auto Knee (on/off)
Knee Off
*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Knee Saturation
Knee Point
Knee Slope
Level
*1
Auto Knee (on/off)
Knee Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
Knee Sat (on/off)
R,G,B, Master
White Clip Off
R-G, G-B, B-R
Multi Matrix (on/off)
User Matrix (on/off)
Preset Matrix (on/off)
Matrix Off
✔
White Clip
Matrix
1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
2
R-B, G-R, B-G
Multi Matrix (on/off)
User Matrix (on/off)
Preset Matrix (on/off)
Matrix Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Multi
Phase, Hue, Saturation
All Clear
Multi Matrix (on/off)
User Matrix (on/off)
Preset Matrix (on/off)
Matrix Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Low Key Sat
Mono Color
Level
Low/L Mid/H Mid/High Range
Low Key Sat (on/off)
Saturaion
✔
✔
Hue
Mono (on/off)
Pattern
Auto Iris
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Auto Iris (on/off)
Shutter
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
ECS/S-EVS
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
ECS
S-EVS
Shutter (on/off)
ECS (on/off)
✔
✔
S-EVS (on/off)
Note
MSU: V1.20
RCP: V1.01
RM-B750: V1.00
*1 Available w/VTR function SW (selectable when in the ENG Mode in the menu)
*2 Available w/Black knob (selected from the menu)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 193
Function comparison chart – File
11
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
Menu
Sub Menu
Control Item
Direct
Button
Direct
Button
Direct
Menu
Direct
Button
Menu
Menu
Menu
Button
Reference
Ref. Store
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Ref. Transfer
CAM t CARD
✔(MS)
✔(MS)
✔(MS)
✔(MS)
CARD t CAM
CARD t CAMs
CAM t CAMs
(Paint Menu Items)
CAM t CARD
CARD t CAM
CARD t CAMs
CAM t CAMs
Delete
Adjusting
Scene File
Scene Transfer
✔(MS)
✔(MS)
✔(MS)
✔(MS)
Adjusting
(Paint Menu Items)
Lens File
OHB File
Lens Store
Auto White
Lens Select
✔
✔
✔
✔
Select File
Change Name
(Lens Adjusting Items)
Adjusting
OHB Store
✔
✔
Auto W.Shading
Auto B. Shading
Auto White
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Auto Black
Adjusting
Black Shading
White Shading
Black Set
OHB Matrix
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 194
Function comparison chart – Maintenance
11
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
Secondary
Menu
Menu
Sub Menu
Control Item
Direct
Direct
Button
Direct
Menu
Direct
Button
Menu
Menu
Menu
Button
Button
Black
Shading
H saw, H Para,
V Saw, V Para
Adjusting 1/2
R, G, B
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Auto B. Shading
Blk Shd Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
White
Shading
H saw, H Para,
V Saw, V Para
R, G, B
White
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Auto W. Shading
R, G, B
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
AWB
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Black Set Black Set
R, G, B
Gain Bounce (on/
off)
✔
✔
Black
R, G, B, Master
ABB
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
OHB Matrix 1
R-G, G-B, B-R
Matrix Off, OHB
Matrix Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
2
R-B, G-R, B-G
Matrix Off, OHB
Matrix Off
Phase, Hue,
Saturation
Multi
✔
✔
✔
✔
Matrix Off, OHB
Matrix Off,
All Clear
Phase
H
H Step (usec)
H Coarse
SC
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
SC
Y, Sync,
I Black, Q Black
VBS Level VBS Level 1
✔
✔
Chroma, SC
Quad,
VBS Level 2
✔
✔
Q Level
Y/C Level
Y/C Black
Y, R-Y, B-Y
Y, R-Y, B-Y
✔
✔
✔
✔
Monitor
Output
Skin Gate
✔
✔
Mod Level
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
4:3 Marker (on/off)
4:3 Mod (on/off)
Cam SW
Setting
Camera Fan
Mode
✔
✔
Auto Setup
Auto White
Auto Black
Auto Level
Auto Hue
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Skin Detail 1, 2, 3
✔(1)
✔(1)
Auto W.
Shading
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Auto B.
Shading
Lens Adjusting Flare
V Mod Saw
R, G, B
✔
✔
✔
✔
R,G,B, Master
D Shad Comp (on/
off)
✔
✔
V Mod Saw Off
Pattern
✔
✔
✔
✔
Auto Iris
✔
✔
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 195
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
11
Secondary
Menu
Menu
Sub Menu
Control Item
Direct
Button
Direct
Button
Direct
Menu
Direct
Button
Menu
Menu
Menu
Button
Level
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
APL Ratio
Iris Gain
SD Adjusting
Gamma
(HD)M Gamma
(HD)Blk Gamma
SD M Gamma
A,B,C,D,E
H Interp
V Interp
Detail
A,B,C,D,E
Detail 1
(SD) Level
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
(SD) Limiter
(SD) Crispening
(SD) Level
Depend
✔
✔
✔
✔
(HD) Detail Off
(SD) Detail off
(SD) H/V Ratio
(SD) Frequency
(HD) Detail Off
(SD) Detail off
(SD) W.Limiter
(SD) B. Limiter
(HD) Detail Off
(SD) Detail off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Detail 2
Detail 3
✔
✔
✔
✔
Crs Col
Reduce
Crs Col Reduce
(on/off)
✔
✔
✔
Coring
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Level
Comb
Aspect
Aspect Select
16:9 Squeeze
Letter Box
4:3 Crop
Letter size
Crop Posi
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 196
Function comparison chart – Configuration
11
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
Secondary
Menu
Sub Menu
Control Item
Direct
Direct
Button
Direct
Menu
Direct
Button
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
Button
Button
CAM Mode
Set 1/2
Camera
White Setup Mode
✔
✔
✔
✔
OHB Matrix Correct Mode
(on/off)
2/2
V Detail Creation Mode
V Detail Control Mode
Preset Matrix
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
16:9->4:3 Crop On
CCU Mode
Set 1/2
CCU
BARS Character (on/off)
✔
✔
2/2
Return Letter Box Mode
Gen Lock Mode
✔
✔
✔
✔
BARS Char
Set
Bars Characters
Return 1,2,3,4
✔
✔
✔
✔
Return
Setting
Multi
Format
System
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Output 1,2,3
RCP
Assign
CNU
MSU
Assign
✔
✔
✔
✔
MSU or
Call, Touch, Switch,
Master
RCP or Adjusting Buzzer
RM
✔
✔
Call Buzzer, Touch Click,
Switch Click, All Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Switch, Tally, Other LED,
Master
LED Bright
Date/Time Date
Time
Year, Month, Day
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Hour, Minute, Second
Engineer
Mode (on/off)
Security
✔
✔
✔
✔
Status
Ref. Enable (on/off)
Lens Enable (on/off)
OHB Enable (on/off)
Crop Enable (on/off)
Full Lock (on/off)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
View Mode (on/off)
Paint Only (on/off)
Code Change
Information
✔
✔
MSU
Adjusting
MSU
EL Bright
Level
✔
✔
✔
✔
LED Disp
Bright
Level
MSU SW
Set 1/2
PIX/WF Syncro(on/off)
✔
PIX/WF All Mode (on/off)
PIX/WF Control Mode
Screen Saver
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
TestSW Mode (Saw,
3step, 10step)
✔
✔
✔
2/2
Extended Call Mode
✔
✔
Shutter Angle Mode (on/
off)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 197
MSU-700A
Direct
MSU-750
Direct
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
11
Secondary
Menu
Menu
Sub Menu
Control Item
Direct
Menu
Direct
Button
Menu
Menu
Menu
Button
Button
Button
Rotary
Encoder
Setting
BLACK/
FLARE
RCP
Black
✔
Flare
✔
✔
✔
DETAIL
Detail
SD Detail
LCD
LCD
Brightness/
Bright
✔
✔
Contrast
Contrast
Format
✔
✔
✔
✔
Memory Memory
Stick
Stick
Cable
Comp
RM
10M, 30M, 50M
Full/Part/Lock
✔
✔
SWSetting Panel Active
1/2
Mode
Full/Lock
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
Test
Saw/3 Step/10Step
VTR/CALL
2/2
VTR S/S
Function SW VTR Ctrl/CAM Ctrl
VF Menu
Control Enable
Absolute, Relative 1/1,
Relative 1/2, Relative 1/4
VR Setting White
BLACK
✔
✔
✔
Absolute, Relative 1/1,
Relative 1/2, Relative 1/4
Absolute, Relative 1/1,
Relative 1/2, Relative 1/4
Master Black
Absolute, >Min, >Max,
Relative 1/1, Relative 1/2,
Relative 1/4
Iris
✔
✔
WF/PIX
R,G,B, RGB, SEQ, ENC
Note
Italic: Accessible only when in the ENG Mode
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 198
Function comparison chart – Function
11
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
Menu
Control Item
Direct
Direct
Button
Direct
Menu
Direct
Button
Menu
Menu
Menu
Button
Button
Operation
Ctrl
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
ND (1/2/3/4/5)
CC (A/B/C/D/E)
Shutter (on/off)
ECS (on/off)
Shutter
ECS
Gamma
Master Gain
*1
SW 1/2
5600K (on/off)
Auto Knee (on/off)
Skin Detail (on/off)
Detail Gate (on/off)
Black Gamma (on/off)
Knee Aperture (on/off)
Knee Sat (on/off)
Mono (on/off)
S-Skin Knee (on/off)
Low Key Sat (on/off)
Knee off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
✔
*1
✔
*1
✔
*1
✔
2/2
Gamma Off
Detail Off
Matrix Off
White Clip Off
Level Dep Off
Chroma Off
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
SD Detail Off
SD Matrix Off
White Preset
Memory A
White Select
Memory B
Note
*1 Available w/VTR function SW (selectable when in the ENG Mode in the menu)
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 199
Function comparison chart – Multi, Card
11
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
Direct
Menu
Control Item
Direct
Button
Direct
Direct
Menu
Menu
Menu
Menu
Button
Button
Button
Multi-Control Menu
Master/Slave
Master
Slave
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
All Slave
All Off
Character
Character on
Default
✔
✔
System
Auto
Diag/One Cam
Data/One Cam
IC Memory Card Menu
Card Initialize
✔
✔
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 200
Function comparison chart – Button and Knob
11
Button
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
*4
*4
All
✔
✔
*4
*4
*4
CAM PW
VF PW
✔
✔
✔
*4
*4
✔
✔
*4
✔
*4
*4
*4
✔
✔
✔
Signal output select
TEST1/TEST2/
BARS
TEST/BARS
TEST/BARS
TEST/BARS
*4
*4
*4
*4
CLOSE
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
*4
*4
*4
STANDARD
AUTO SETUP
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
SKIN DTL AUTO HUE
LEVEL
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
✔
START/BREAK
WHITE
✔
*4
✔
✔
✔
*4
BLACK
✔
Camera/CCU function ON/OFF
KNEE off
DETAIL off
LVL DEP off
GAMMA off
CHROMA off
MATRIX off
KNEE APERTURE
KNEE SAT
*1
✔
MONO COLOR
COLOR CORRECT
5600K
*1
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
*1
AUTO KNEE
SKIN DETAIL
DETAIL GATE
SATURATION
CONTRAST
BLACK GAMMA
CHARACTER
SD MATRIX off
SD DETAIL off
LOW KEY SAT
SCENE FILES
STORE
✔
*1
✔
*1
✔
✔
*4
✔
✔
Scene File Control
✔
✔
*4
*4
PICTURE MONITOR
WAVEFORM MONITOR
Camera Select
✔
✔
*4
*4
✔
✔
*4
*4
PANEL ACTIVE
PARA
✔
✔
*4
*4
*4
✔
✔
✔
*4
*4
EXPAND
MASTER
SLAVE
✔
✔
*4
✔
*4
✔
Filter control
FILTER CTRL
ND
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
CC
ECS/Shutter select
Gamma select
Master gain select
IRIS/MB ACTIVE
*4
*4
*4
✔
✔
✔
MASTER BLACK control knob
MASTER BLACK RELATIVE
Iris Control knob
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
✔
*4
*4
*4
*4
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
*4
*4
*1&*4
CALL
✔
✔
✔
✔
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 201
Button
MSU-700A
MSU-750
RCP-750/751
RM-B750
11
Auto Iris
✔
✔
✔
✔
*4
IRIS RELATIVE
SENS control
✔
*4
✔
*4
COARSE control
WHITE knobs
✔
✔
✔(R,B)
✔
BLACK knob
✔(R,B,Master)
(R,G,B,Master)
*2
FLARE knob
✔
*4
*4
PANEL ACTIVE
Full<->Lock
✔
✔
*4
Full<->Part<->Lock
✔
DETAIL knob
VTR START/STOP
STOP
✔
*4
✔
*4
✔
*4
REW
✔
*4
PLAY
✔
*4
FF
✔
*4
REC REVIEW
MONITOR
✔
*4
✔
*4
FUNCTION (Menu Mode)
MAINTENANCE (Menu Mode)
SCENE (Menu Mode)
PAINT (Menu Mode)
VF DISP
✔
*4
✔
*4
✔
*4
✔
*3&*4
✔
*3&*4
VF MENU
✔
*3&*4
CANCEL
✔
*3&*4
ENTER
✔
Note
*1 Available w/VTR function SW (selectable when in the ENG Mode in the menu)
*2 Available w/Black knob (selected from the menu)
*3 Available w/Menu Mode buttons by pressing the MONITOR button
*4 Accessible only with switches or knobs on the control panel
HDC-900/950/930 Series Product Information Manual
Appendix 202
|
